Home

Sonnet User`s Manual Volume I - Sonnet User`s

1. Analysis Engine S Y Z Parameters Zo E GMax Zin VSWR Loss factor Electromagnetic Simulation Analysis Monitor Analysis Monitor and Batch Editor Current Density Viewer Current Visualization Tool Em performs electromagnetic analysis 79 80 82 for arbitrary 3 D planar 54 e g microstrip coplanar stripline etc geometries maintaining full accuracy at all frequencies Em is a full wave analysis in that it takes into account all possible coupling mechanisms The analysis inherently includes dispersion stray coupling discontinuities surface waves moding metalization loss dielectric loss and radiation loss In short it is a complete electromagnetic analysis Since em uses a surface meshing technique 1 e it meshes only the surface of the circuit metalization em can analyze predominately planar circuits much faster than volume meshing techniques Chapter 1 Introduction The Analysis Engine em Em does a full three dimensional analysis that includes both 3 D fields and 3 D currents This is in contrast to 2 5 D analyses which while including full 3 D fields allow only 2 D currents Thus a 2 5 D analysis does not allow vias or any other vertical current Em analyzes 3 D structures embedded in planar multilayered dielectric on an underlying fixed grid For this class of circuits em can use the FFT Fast Fourier Transform analysis technique to efficiently calculate the
2. Illegal Subdivision Lines Once you have completed adding all the desired subdividers to your circuit you must save the project before performing the subdivision Setting Up Circuit Properties Since the geometry subprojects created by the subdivide inhent their properties from the source project you should complete entering all the desired attributes for your circuit before performing the subdivide This includes such things as defining the dielectric layers which includes the height of the box top top and bottom box metals metal and dielectric brick materials cell size and box size This saves the effort of having to enter these values in each of the subprojects 216 Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision Setting Up the Coarse Step Size Frequency Sweep If you plan to use interpolation to obtain response data when analyzing the master netlist project you should input the coarse frequency sweep at which you wish to analyze the geometry subprojects before subdividing the circuit These frequencies should cover the same frequency range as the analysis frequencies for the whole circuit but use a coarser step size The subprojects should be analyzed at the same minimum and maximum frequency as the overall analysis and at enough points in between to provide for reasonable interpolation of the response By inputting the coarse frequency sweep prior to subdivision the master netlist and geometry subprojects created by the subdiv
3. The waveguide simulator for infinite arrays inspired the technique described here In this side view the waveguide walls form images of the array of microstrip patches simulating an infinite array v is the velocity of light in the medium filling the waveguide Ina phased array with the array scanned to a specific direction a single waveguide mode is generated The em software can model the waveguide simulator of that infinite array just by setting the top cover impedance to the impedance of the excited waveguide mode Modeling an Open Environment If we can use a closed i e terminated waveguide to model an infinite array we can also model radiation from a finite array although it must be done under certain conditions It is important to keep in mind that unless the analysis is 345 Sonnet User s Guide 346 carefully prepared these conditions are easily violated yielding incorrect results When the conditions are met useful results can be obtained as shall be demonstrated First Condition Make both of the lateral substrate dimensions greater than one or two wavelengths When using the Open Waveguide Simulator we view the sidewalls of the shielding box as forming a waveguide whose tube extends in the vertical direction propagating energy from the antenna toward the Termination as shown on page 345 Radiation is then approximated as a sum of many waveguide modes If the tube is too small there are f
4. Cells Per Subsection Limits X max Y max 100 100 Click on the desired checkbox Conformal Mesh or Diagonal Fill to use that cell fill type for the selected polygon This applies the cell fill type to the selected polygon Click on the OK button to apply the changes and close the Conductor Property Pages Controlling the Subsectioning Meshing 236 Sonnet allows you to control how cells are combined into subsections for each polygon This is done using the parameters X Min Y Min X Max and Y Max These parameters may be changed for each polygon allowing you to have Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface coarser resolution for some polygons and finer resolution for others These parameters are available on the Mesh tab of the Options property pages in Microwave Office as shown below Options General Frequencies Layout Drawing Mesh Sonnet Options Meshing Density Sonnet ptions O Low C Conformal Mesh Normal O High O No variable mesh C Diagonal Fill Cells per subsection limits X max Y max X min Y min 100 100 1 1 n N E X X X Subsectioning comer You may set these parameters globally locally or for a particular polygon as was shown in the Changing the Fill Type section above For a detailed discussion of these parameters and how they affect subsectioning in Sonnet please refer to Changing the Subsectioning of a Polygon on pag
5. Via Port Lower Polygon An example of a circuit with a standard via port A side view of the enclosed area on the circuit is shown in the middle Em cannot de embed via ports However in a circuit which contains a combination of via ports and other port types the other port types can still be de embedded Em will automatically identify all of the other ports present in the circuit and de embed them but leave the via ports un de embedded The example file Dual patch has an example of a via port used in a patch antenna This example file can be found in the Sonnet example files In most cases where you need grounded ports your first choice would be to use auto grounded ports as discussed in the next section especially since it is possible to de embed an autogrounded port The two most common cases where 111 Sonnet User s Guide a via port would be used is when you wish to attach a port between two adjacent levels in your circuit or when you want a port to go up to the box cover rather than down to ground Adding Via Ports 1 To add a via port you must first have two polygons on adjacent levels with a via connecting them For more details on how to create vias see Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures 2 Then click on the Add Port button in the tool box of the project editor to put you in Add Port mode 3 Then click on the edge via at the lower level polygon to add the port An example is pictured on the previou
6. ccc cece osana eee IIL Applications of Dielectric Bricks 0 00 eese 333 Guidelines for Using Dielectric Bricks 2 0 esee 333 Subsectioning Dielectric Bricks 00 2000005 333 Using Vias Inside a Dielectric Brick 0 04 334 Air Dielectric Bricks ooo 334 Limitations of Dielectric Bricks ooo esses 334 Diagonal Fills rep ERREUR 334 Antennas and Radiation oossoo eee eee eee eee 334 The Agilent Translator ebridge lesse 335 Dielectric Brick Concepts 0000 cee eect eee 335 Creating a Dielectric Brick 2 0 0 cece eee eee ee 335 Viewing Dielectric Bricks 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 335 Defining Dielectric Brick Materials 000 337 Changing Brick Materials soon nnen 338 Z Partitioning t s 1 4 cox pror E de V h t s Sale ads s 339 21 Antennas and Radiation 0cc ccc cee eee 4 343 Background eren LEE UU E R 344 Modeling Infinite Arrays ele 344 Modeling an Open Environment sssoss onnen 345 Validation Example sos ss nnen 349 Far Field Viewer 4 5 stan REPRE bs Seis EU 351 13 Sonnet User s Guide Analysis Limitations soon eee 352 Spherical Coordinate System sossun 352 Normalization 20 0 0 cece a p e a 356 Polarizer ton oe eth een p re elo 357 References xo cede Deve S IE ae IPS 357 22 SPICE Model Synthesis leere
7. 60 X Min and Y Min with Edge Mesh On 62 Using X Max and Y Max for an Individual Polygon 64 Using the Speed Memory Control 000 c eee eee 65 Setting the Maximum Subsection Size Parameter 68 Defining the Subsectioning Frequency 000 0000s 68 Conformal Mesh Subsectioning 0 00 cece eens 69 Conformal Mesh Subsectioning Control 71 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss 20cceeee8088 73 Metalization LOss assa cr cw ERU ELS 74 Sonnet s Loss Model 0 0 cee e cece eee eee ee 74 Problems In Determining Metal Loss 45 75 Determining Good Input Values 2 00 0 0 0s 76 Creating Metal Types 2 0 0 0 00sec cece eee 77 Metal Libraries eeo eI ea EE cease cise UE 84 MILAN PRI 89 Setting Losses for the Box Top and Bottom Ground Plane 89 Dielectric E088 ie m s ani kitten kii 90 Dielectric Layer Parameters ooo cece eee eee 91 Dielectric Layer Loss Reve kt Yin 92 How to Create a New Dielectric Layer 92 Dielectric Libraries soon eee ee ene 93 6 Table of Contents Port 223 2 4 S KASAN x enr P EE a a 4 VD Port Types 2i uus esr wee E DRE eder ATEA UPN e 99 Standard Box Wall Ports 00 soks nn 101 Adding Standard Ports 0 0 0 c eects 101 Special Port Numbering 0 00 0 r ec eens 102 Ports with Duplicat
8. 0 0 0 0 eee eee 187 Adding Project Elements 0 0 cee 188 Adding Parameters 0 000 e cece eect ene 188 Netlist Example Files 0 0 0 eee e eee eee eee 189 Cascading S Y and Z Parameter Data Files 189 A Network File with Geometry Project soseen 191 Sonnet User s Guide Inserting Modeled Elements into a Geometry 2 0 194 Using Ungrounded Internal Ports 00005 197 13 Circuit Subdivision ssssssssssssssosss o 201 Introduction 22 004 io orc E SUPROROUENSATOTI DeC TES 201 Circuit Subdivision in Sonnet sssusa ss 204 Choosing Subdivision Line Placement 04 207 Good and Bad Placements of Subdivision Lines 209 Subdivision Line Orientation sonaas aeaea 214 Setting Up Circuit Properties 0 0 cece eee eee 216 Setting Up the Coarse Step Size Frequency Sweep 217 Subdividing Your Circuit 218 Analyzing Your Subdivided Circuit sos soks nnnnn 218 14 Microwave Office Interface eee 2210 System Requirements 0 0 eee eee eee eee eens 222 Installation cR ud snt RITA oh eds ee Ier PI 222 Uninstall ins 1s 05 ated het wha Deh adh ae are ads wield ons 223 Licensing sas a RATAS IS SATAN EE A vac EA 223 Microwave Office Interface Overview 000 eee eee 223 Selecting Sonnet as your EM Simulator 005 226 Opening
9. I L mm um um um um um EE EE EE EM EE EE EE EM Em um um d Illustration of how de embedding removes the port discontinuity and transmission line associated with a box wall port Coupled Transmission Lines The two previous figures illustrated how the reference plane for a single transmission line attached to a box wall port is shifted during de embedding In general there may be multiple transmission lines on a given box wall on one or more circuit levels This is illustrated in the next figure In this situation em shifts the reference plane an equal distance for all transmission lines on the given box wall All coupling between the transmission lines is accounted for and removed NOTE Chapter 7 De embedding When shifting a reference plane for coupled lines em assumes the following a all coupled lines are either horizontal or vertical b the width of each coupled line is constant c the spacing between coupled lines is constant gt lt O ED NS Ports N coupled transmission lines Nr A Box Wall De embedding shifts the reference plane an equal distance for all N coupled transmission lines on a given box wall The coupling between transmission lines is removed by the de embedding process De embedding Results The listing below shows the de embedded results obtained earlier in the chapter from the analysis of the example filter circuit see page 121 This
10. refabricate etc ofthe passive planar portion of a circuit At present because em makes no compromise in accura Cy performing an analysis of say an entire amplifier with a single electro magnetic analysis on a mid range workstation or PC is difficult However validation of large portions of an amplifier design is reasonable If a circuit is designed from the start with electromagnetic analysis in mind much larger circuits can be done For example the analysis works best with tightly packed rectangular circuits designed on a common dimension grid Microwave package evaluation It is important to assess how a circuit will operate in the package environment Em analyzes a circuit inside a conduct ing box If the box acting as a dielectric loaded resonator is resonant at a fre quency where the circuits still have gain poor performance results Em provides an analysis of a package prior to fabrication Resonances can then be dealt with on the computer rather than on the test bench Microstrip antennas The top of em s box can be effectively removed While radiation is outside of em s primary thrust a wide variety of microstrip antennas and radiating discontinuities can be evaluated High speed digital interconnect When an approximate model is not good enough em can synthesize a SPICE lumped model including all delays and couplings The lumped model is synthesized directly from electromagnetic data Sonnet is not appro
11. 282 Substrate parameters are set by the instances of MSUB SSUB SSSUB SSUBO PCSUB TAND MCOV and PERM in the schematic of your design Particular SUB instances will only be recognized if they are referenced by the translated elements Otherwise default parameters will be used If no default is found the substrate parameters will default to microstrip with a zero thickness air dielectric Substrate data instances resident in the schematic will only be located if they are referenced by circuit elements in the schematic or if they have DEFAULT as the last part of their name If more than one substrate instance is located only the last one found will be used MCOV TAND PERM TANDM instances are located in either the schematic or the default design They do not need to be referenced by circuit elements but only the last one found in the schematic will be used by the Agilent interface Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface Box Settings Anem analysis takes place inside a bounded metal box with lossless sidewalls and user definable loss on the top and bottom of the box see The Preference File page 286 The box size in the X and Y dimensions area is set by the X and Y extent bounding box of the translated circuit including text labels and or drawing formats plus a substrate extension added to all sides The substrate extension is equal to the substrate height multiplied by the preference parameter EXT The box size in the Z dim
12. 359 PI Spice Model 5 5152 ee ahhh tahoe n Hn 362 Using The PI Model Spice Option 005 362 A Simple Microwave Example sossun 366 Topology Used for PI Model Output lesse esse 367 N Coupled Line Option 0 00 eese 368 Broadband SPICE Model 2 0 cece e eee eee ee 369 Class of Problems 2 0 0 0 c eee eee ee eee 370 Creating a Broadband Spice Model 04 371 Checking the Accuracy of the Broadband Spice Model 374 Improving the Accuracy of the Broadband Spice Model 377 23 Coplanar Waveguide and Balanced Ports 379 Ungrounded Coplanar ossis ss nn KL 380 Different Types of Coplanar Waveguide usus 381 24 Package Resonances 0 cece cece cree cece eee 985 Box R sonances iit LE eR ee e e Sek het 386 Runtime Warning Messages essen 386 Observations of Simulated Results ss 388 A Box Resonance Example loss 00 cece eee eee 389 The Box Resonance Estimator oossoo sonnin 39 Box Resonances Simple Removal sonnin 393 The Capability to Ask What if oss nen 395 14 Table of Contents 25 Viewing Tangential Electric Fields 397 26 Accuracy Benchmarking 0eeeeeeeee eee 401 An Exact Benchmark 402 Residual Error Evaluation 2 000000 cee cee eee ee 404 Using the Error Estimates soon eee ee
13. For the steps son example file your em analysis may take advantage of the symmetry setting Open the project in the project editor and modify steps son using Circuit Box to open the Box Settings dialog box When you click on the Symmetry checkbox it toggles from Off to On and a dashed center line is drawn on the circuit Visually check to make sure the circuit really is centered on the center line If not move the circuit until it is centered In electromagnetic terms the symmetry option places a magnetic wall along the center line In terms of performance the number of subsections is reduced by nearly half reducing the size of the matrix to one quarter of its original memory requirement and decreasing matrix solve time by about a factor of eight Thus symmetry is a powerful tool in reducing both analysis time and hardware requirements You will always get identical analysis results when using symmetry When finished save the file under the new name ste sym son You may want to add a comment or two indicating the modification as you store the file You may also obtain a copy of this file from the Sonnet examples under Ste sym If you do not know how to obtain a Sonnet example select Help gt Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button Be aware that this example is supplied with analysis response data so in order to see the results you will need to use the Project View Log
14. J C Rautio The Microwave Point of View on Software Validation IEEE Antennas and Propagation Magazine Vol 38 No 2 April 1996 pp 68 71 J C Rautio and Hiroaki Kogure EMI Applications Of The Electromagnetic Analysis By The Method Of Moments Electromagnetic Analysis Applied To Analog And Digital PCB Design JPCA Show 96 Text Today and Tomorrow of EMI Design pp 11 19 J C Rautio EM Analysis Error Impacts Microwave Designs Microwaves and RF September 1996 pp 134 144 James R Willhite Turning Clean Theory into Reality Wireless Design and Development March 1996 Vol 4 No 3 pp 19 20 J C Rautio Response 2 Comments on Zeland s Standard Stripline Benchmark Results MIC Simulation Column International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 5 No 6 November 1995 pp 415 417 J C Rautio EMI Analysis from a Wireless Telecommunication and RF Perspective Proceedings of the 1995 Nepcon West Conference Anaheim CA USA pp 749 755 J C Rautio and Hiroaki Kogure An Overview of the Sonnet Electromagnetic Analysis Proceedings of the 1994 IEICE Fall Conference Tokyo pp 325 326 J C Rautio An Ultra High Precision Benchmark For Validation Of Planar Electromagnetic Analyses IEEE Tran Microwave Theory Tech Vol 42 No 11 Nov 1994 pp 2046 2050 J C Rautio A Precise Benchmark for Numerical Validation IEEE Interna
15. Multi Sweep with Stop Restart retains all calculated cache data in your project for every analysis job run In addition cache data is calculated and saved for even non ABS types of sweeps This option can reduce processing time on subsequent ABS analyses of your project but increases project size on non ABS sweeps In order for the cache data to remain useful there are also subsectioning issues of which you must be aware For a detailed discussion of the Multi Sweep cache option please refer to Multiple ABS Sweeps and Subsectioning on page 146 145 Sonnet User s Guide A 146 The third setting for ABS caching level is None In this setting cache data is not retained This option should only be selected if you have constraints on disk space WARNING If you select None for the ABS caching level and an ABS sweep is stopped before the adaptive data has been calculated you will have to start the analysis over from the beginning Any processing time invested in the analysis is lost Multiple ABS Sweeps and Subsectioning If you will need to run multiple ABS sweeps on a project it is important to set your ABS caching to Multi sweep to avoid having to re calculate your caching data each time you analyze your circuit But be aware that in order to maintain the validity of the caching data the subsectioning of the circuit must remain the same To control the subsectioning you must use the Advanced Subsectioning Controls which you open
16. Rigs 79 Sonnet User s Guide As an example the conductivity O for copper is 5 8E 7 Mhos m giving Rpc 0 006 Ohms square t 3 um and a microstrip Rgp 2 6E 7 In reality the bulk conductivity of copper or any other given metal may not equal the laboratory value so the figures as calculated above are likely to be lower than actual results The table below provides calculated results of commonly used metals using the equations above Properties of Commonly Used Metals RRF S RDC RDC Gn 12 Metal my Os isa res Saa t 1uM t 1mil Skin Effect microstrip Aluminum 3 72e7 0 027 1e 3 3 3e 7 Brass 1 57e7 0 070 2 5e 3 5 0e 7 Copper 5 80e7 0 017 6 8e 4 2 6e 7 Gold 4 09e7 0 024 9 6e 4 3 1e 7 Nichrome 1 00e6 1 000 3 9e 2 2 0e 6 Silver 6 17e7 0 016 6 4e 4 2 5e 7 Tantalum 6 45e6 0 155 6 1e 3 7 8e 7 Tin 8 70e6 0 115 4 5e 3 6 7e 7 General This loss model includes the metalization resistivity described above in Rdc Rrf The General loss definition also includes the metalization reactance composed of the surface reactance X4 and the kinetic inductance L Surface reactance X go is specified in Ohms square Em uses the same reactance at all frequencies 80 Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Until recently the only surface resistivities of practical interest were pure real 1 e pure loss With the growing application of superconductors in high frequ
17. Sonnet User s Guide Thick metal polygons are connected to thin metal polygons by drawing the thin metal polygon on the same level on which the thick metal was drawn and placing the thin metal polygon adjacent to or overlapping the thick metal This connects the two structures electrically Restrictions with Thick Metal Polygons If you are using the thick metal model with more than two sheets of metal be aware that analyzing a thick metal of 3 or more sheets at low frequencies may introduce error into the DC loss To avoid this problem use only 2 sheets for your thick metal when analyzing at very low frequencies Modeling an Arbitrary Cross Section In this section we use a combination of thick metal and Normal zero thickness metal to approximate thick metal lines where the vertical cross section has an arbitrary geometry To demonstrate this capability we use a simple trapezoidal geometry the cross section shown in the figure below Thick metal polygon placed on top of zero thickness polygon Zero thickness polygon as the wide bottom of the trapezoid A trapezoidal cross section transmission line viewed in perspective If the line has no current going around the edge it can be modeled as shown as two infinitely thin sheets of current one at the top and the other at the bottom of the actual metal 324 Chapter 19 Thick Metal To create the thick metal trapezoid set up the dielectrics so that there is one
18. To accomplish this task it is necessary to create a geometry project with the transmission line structure and three holes where modeled elements will eventually be inserted The figure on page 196 shows such a geometry project Here pairs of auto grounded ports have been placed on the edges of each modeled element hole When the modeled elements are inserted later on each is connected across the corresponding pair of auto grounded ports Note that under certain conditions ungrounded internal ports can be used instead of auto grounded ports See Using Ungrounded Internal Ports page 197 for details Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis 16 77 O 16 77 O O M Modeled Elements Modeled Element z67 11 0 The two port T attenuator will be re analyzed to demonstrate the use of modeled elements 195 Sonnet User s Guide The geometry file att Igeo son contains three sets of auto grounded ports placed at locations where modeled elements will eventually be inserted This file is available as part of the Att example used for this chapter Below is the netlist att lumped son that will be used for this example oaa xes ele Iaa Ela PRJ 1 2 3456 7 8 att_Igeo son Hierarchy Sweep RES 3 4 R 16 77 RES 56 R 16 77 RES 7 8 R 67 11 DEF2P 1 2 ATTEN Main Network Use buttons or menus to modify netlist Network None Line None 196 Chapter 12 N
19. in DEF2P Port 1 corresponds to node 1 in the network Port 2 corresponds to node 3 There are two data file elements in the network The first entry is the response file att_res16 s2p with 2 ports Port 1 corresponds to node 1 of the network which as mentioned above is port 1 of the whole circuit Port 2 for the data file corresponds to node 2 of the network The other entry is also for the data file att_res16 s2p except that port 1 ofthe data file goes to node 2 of the network which means that port 1 ofthe second data file is connected to port 2 of the first data file Port 2 of the second data file corresponds to node 3 of the network Node 3 of the network is Port 2 of the network RESNET The S Parameters for an analysis of the netlist are shown below Frequency 200 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 200 000000 0 250782 5 309 0 748778 6 263 0 748778 6 263 0 250782 5 309 Frequency 300 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 300 000000 0 250310 7 963 0 748702 9 395 0 748702 9 395 0 250310 7 963 Frequency 400 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 400 000000 0 249650 10 62 0 748595 12 53 0 748595 12 53 0 249650 10 62 190 Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis A Network File with Geometry Project The next example demonstrates a netlist project analysis which invokes a geometry project analysis in conjunction wit
20. 131 Sonnet User s Guide The lengths of these two through lines can determine the accuracy of the de embedding see below for a discussion of the problems which can occur with improper lengths By default Sonnet chooses calibration lengths for you If the port contains a reference plane then the first calibration length is the same length as the reference plane and the second length is double the first If no reference plane exists Sonnet chooses one for you If you are having trouble with de embedding you may want to change this calibration length using the following sections as a guide If you are using reference planes you can simply change your reference plane length and the calibration lengths will change accordingly If you are not using reference planes then you can set the calibration length using Circuit gt Ref Plane Cal Length This allows you to set the first calibration length The second is always twice as long as the first Defining Reference Planes 132 Sonnet places very few restrictions on the reference planes which may be defined for a given circuit This is done intentionally so as to provide maximum flexibility for all users However there are some basic guidelines concerning reference planes that should almost always be followed These guidelines are discussed below De embedding Without Reference Planes De embedding does not require reference planes Reference planes are optional for all box wall
21. Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface You may also select the Sonnet editor for your EM Structure by selecting the Native Editor radio button in the General tab of the Options page for the EM Structure in Microwave Office If you do this you are not prompted when you end the session in Sonnet and your changes are saved automatically General Frequencies Layout Drawing Mesh Sonnet Options Simulator Editor C MwOffice Editor Sonnet 3D Planar Electromagnetic Simulator N Save Results in Document WARNING Currents Saving these results can cause file size to grow substantially Fields Some simulators do not Antenna support all of these options Editing in Sonnet has the advantage of allowing the user to use all capabilities of the Sonnet engine The user may simulate the circuit view all types of response data including current density data and far field patterns before returning to the Microwave Office environment with the analysis results It is important to remember when you are editing your EM Structure in Sonnet the view in Microwave Office may not be accurate When using Sonnet as your editor your EM Structure may contain objects or features not available in Microwave Office therefore the circuit when viewed in Microwave Office may not be accurately depicted Opening the EM Structure in Sonnet s project editor provides an accurate depiction of your circuit If you open your EM Stru
22. Dielectric Thick metal Below are shown the views of level 1a and 1b in the current density viewer Note that 1a is the top of the thick metal structure and is not visible in the project editor 1b is the bottom where the polygon was drawn and is visible in the project editor thick emvu son JXY Magnitude at 10 GHz D x thick emvu son JXY Magnitude at 10 GHz D x FXEYENETES 3 8 amp amp fA s eo is 9 Amps Meter 8 7 7 5 6 2 5 0 3 7 Click or drag mouse to readout data values 1 0x Pointer Moves up one level Up Arrow 1 0x Pointer 328 Chapter 19 Thick Metal The current density viewer creates as many sublevels as are needed A thick metal which is defined as having 4 sheets placed on level 2 would appear in the current density viewer as 2a 2b 2c and 2d with 2a being the top of the thick metal structure and 2d being the bottom drawn on level 2 329 Sonnet User s Guide 330 Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks Although em is primarily a planar electromagnetic simulator it also has the capability to add dielectric brick material anywhere in your circuit A dielectric brick is a solid volume of dielectric material embedded within a circuit layer See the illustration below Dielectric bricks can be made from any dielectric material including air and can be placed in circuit layers made from any ot
23. Metal Unknown m E JFILTER MASK Metal j Unknown m Layer External Layer File Add Delete Load Save Loa nee tese lt J Cancel Help The first two columnsrefer to the incoming GDSII file The last three columns are the choices to be used in the Sonnet project for the GDSII elements identified in the first two columns Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators GDSII Stream The layer number in your circuit layout program Note that this layer number has no relationship to the project editor s dielectric layer number or metallization level number This field can be used to map a single GDSII stream to multiple project editor levels By using the Add button you can have multiple entries for the same stream layer which are mapped to different levels in the Sonnet project GDSII Type The data type number as defined in your circuit layout program Each layer defined by your circuit layout program may have multiple data types This field can be used to map different Data Types in a stream layer to different Sonnet objects and materials By using the Add button you can have multiple entries for the same stream layer with different Data Type numbers which are mapped to different objects and or materials in the Sonnet project Map Use this checkbox to select which layers in the GDSII file you wish to map to the Sonnet project Ifthis checkbox is off the GDSII stream layer is not
24. Response Data command Chapter 3 Important Options and Concepts The output to the screen should be the same as that shown in the project log on page 42 If a non zero user time was displayed in the previous example the time should be about half that in this example Note that the number of subsections is cut by almost half While not particularly important here the improvement in speed and memory use is very important for large circuits Using the Memory Save Option Em normally works with double precision In many cases using the Memory Save option which uses a single precision matrix reduction is all that is needed Keep in mind that the matrix elements are still calculated in double precision because of potential numerical difficulties Once calculated they are then truncated and stored in single precision format To invoke a single precision matrix using the file ste sym son do the following 1 Open the ste sym son project in the project editor 2 Select Analysis Setup from the project editor main menu 3 Click on the Memory Save checkbox in the Analysis Setup dialog box which appears 4 The De embed option is already on therefore click on the OK button to close the dialog box 5 Click on the Analyze button on the tool bar to launch the analysis The results as shown in the project log are virtually identical to the results in the symmetry example By invoking single precision you cut the memory required by a
25. 207 216 placement examples 208 209 subprojects 188 204 parameters in 188 subs lambda 68 subsectional vias 305 subsectioning 21 48 ABS caching level 146 cell size 51 62 frequency 146 Microwave Office Interface 236 viewing in Microwave Office Interface 245 subsections 51 68 maximum 49 minimum 49 of polygon 57 439 Sonnet User s Guide reduce number 48 vias 305 XMIN 62 YMIN 60 Substrate parameters 282 MCOV 282 MSUB 282 PCSUB 282 PERM 282 SSSUB 282 SSUB 282 SSUBO 282 SUB 282 TAND 282 superconductor 81 surface impedance 83 surface impedance 83 surface plot 343 351 354 surface reactance 81 surface resistance 91 surface wave antennas 351 swapping 47 symmetrical parameter first reference point 160 second reference point 160 symmetrical parameters 159 symmetry 39 45 413 system requirements Microwave Office Interface 222 T 3D structures 275 3DFACE 275 T attenuator 191 194 with ungrounded internal ports 198 tables not handled 275 TAN 282 tane 399 440 tangential electric field 397 TEM modes 139 terminations 351 TEST VALID 294 TEXT 275 theory 22 24 28 theta 352 354 specifying range for calculation 354 thick metal 102 317 329 arbitrary cross section 324 creating a polygon 319 number of sheets 317 restrictions 324 viewing in the current density viewer 327 viewing in the project editor 322 thick metal type 317 thickness metal 79 thin film resistor 74 189 two connected 189 T
26. 36 Sending Projects to Support There is a new command available in the project editor File Send to Sonnet that provides an easy to use interface that allows you to send your projects to Sonnet quickly and easily For more details please see Send to Sonnet in online help Below is a summation of the major changes in release 10 of Sonnet See below for more details For new features in release 10 refer to New Features page 34 Thick Metal Conformal Mesh In previous releases conformal mesh polygons could not use the Thick Metal Model definition for loss This limitation has been removed SPICE generation Changes have been made in the way you generate Spice models and in the formats produced You may now choose between N Coupled Line Models PI Models and Broadband Spice Models Sonnet s Spice generation capability now also supports the Spectre format You may create these files during the em analysis by specifying the file in the project editor or produce them post analysis using the new Output menu in the response viewer For a detailed discussion of these options please see Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis on page 359 Q Factor Accuracy A new advanced run option has been added to the Advanced Options dialog box in the project editor Select Analysis Setup then click on the Advanced button in the Analysis Setup dialog box Selecting this option forces a higher accuracy for ABS convergence by including the Q factor o
27. 4 6 8 and 10 GHz ABS FMIN NET parameter start stop 293 Sonnet User s Guide Find Minimum which performs an adaptive sweep on the frequency band specified by the start and stop fields then searches for the minimum value of the response specified by lt parameter gt For example the command ABS FMIN NET 21 20 0 40 0 would find the minimum value of S21 in the frequency band 20 0 40 0 GHz ABS FMAX NET lt parameter gt lt start gt lt stop gt Find Maximum which performs an adaptive sweep on the frequency band specified by the start and lt stop gt fields then searches for the maximum value of the response specified by lt parameter gt For example the command ABS FMAX NETS 9S21 20 0 40 0 would find the maximum value of S21 in the frequency band 20 0 40 0 GHz TEST VALID Syntax TEST VALID Enable the valid instance tests This should be used if you are having problems translating your files IGNORE VALID Syntax IGNORE VALID Disable the valid instance tests This is the default setting Troubleshooting This section gives some procedures to troubleshoot through some simple problems 294 Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface Ebridge menu does not appear or is corrupted When Agilent is started in a project directory the Ebridge menu does not automatically appear Also if other programs use the command window user menu feature they may corrupt the Ebridge menu If at any time you need to
28. EG2680 Circuit has potential box resonances Filename C Program Files NsonnetNpackage son Second de embedding standard left box wall First few ideal resonant frequencies are 30 0871 GHz TE Mode 0 1 1 31 7625 GHz TE Mode 0 1 2 Note that the warning message defines which calibration standard is causing the problem The observant reader will notice that these resonant frequency values are different than with the primary structure This occurs because Sonnet actually creates and analyzes two calibration standard as a part of the de embedding procedure These standards may have a different box size than the primary structure which causes the change in the resonant frequencies For more information on the calibration standards and de embedding please refer to Chapter 7 De embedding on page 119 and Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines on page 131 Observations of Simulated Results A second way to detect box resonances 1s with a manual review of the simulated data Typically box resonances appear as sharp changes glitches or spikes in S parameter magnitude and phase data They can also be evident in E and Zo data This is because there is a resonance in at least one of the standards that em creates for de embedding Box resonances can also corrupt de embedding results Because em s de embedding feature is based on circuit theory it possesses the same limitation that all de embedding algorithms share It is unable to de e
29. For more information about de embedding see Chapter 7 De embedding and Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines Transmission Line Parameters As part of the de embedding process em also calculates the transmission line parameters Zo and Eg p You should be aware that when running an ABS analysis these parameters are only calculated for the discrete data points at which a full analysis is run If you need the transmission line parameters at more data points analyze the circuit using a non ABS analysis Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS Current Density Data Current density data is calculated for your circuit when the Compute Current Density option is enabled in the Analysis Setup dialog box For non ABS sweeps current density data 1s calculated for all the response data For an adaptive sweep the current density data is only calculated for the discrete data points therefore your plot in the current density viewer shows a coarse resolution of your frequency band If you wish to calculate the current density data at more points in your band run a non ABS sweep for the points in question with the Compute Current Density option enabled For more information about the Compute Current Density option see the help topic Analysis gt Setup in online help for the project editor Ripple in ABS S Parameters Please note that when the value of the S parameters is close to 1 0 dB over the entire band you may have small ripples o
30. H Mesh Coarse Edge Meshing Cancel Help 65 Sonnet User s Guide There are three settings for the Speed Memory Control Fine Edge Meshing Coarse Edge Mesh Coarse No Edge Meshing Fine Edge Meshing is the default setting and is described in Default Subsectioning of a Polygon on page 57 An example is shown below Again note that this setting provides the most accurate answer but demands the highest memory and processing time The second option is Coarse Edge Mesh This setting is often a good compromise between speed and accuracy When this setting is used the Xmin and Ymin of all polygons are set to a large number typically the value of 50 is used and edge 66 Chapter 4 Subsectioning mesh is on Shown below is a typical circuit with this setting Notice the edges of the polygons have small subsections but the inner portions of the polygons have very large subsections because of the large Xmin and Y min The last option is Coarse No Edge Meshing For this setting all polygons are set to a large Xmin Ymin and edge mesh is set to off This yields the fastest analysis but is also the least accurate Shown below is the subsectioning ofa typical circuit using this option 67 Sonnet User s Guide Setting the Maximum Subsection Size Parameter The parameter Max Subsection Size allows the specification of a maximum subsection size in terms of subsections per wavelength where
31. Viewing Tangential Electric Fields on page 397 Thick Metal For thick metal you input two parameters the bulk conductivity and the metal thickness The loss is calculated in the same manner as for the Normal metal type except that the thickness in this case represents a physical thickness which eliminates the need to enter the current ratio For a detailed discussion of thick metal see Chapter 19 Thick Metal on page 324 How to Create a Metal Type To create a metal type do the following 1 Select Circuit Metal Types from the main menu of the project editor The Metal Types dialog box appears on your display 2 Click on the Add button in the Metal Types dialog box The Metal Editor dialog box appears on your display 83 Sonnet User s Guide 84 Select the desired loss model from the Type drop down list Most users should select Normal The text entry boxes are updated with the inputs for the type selected Enter the loss parameters in the appropriate text entry boxes For a detailed discussion of these parameters see the loss model discussions in the previous sections Enter the desired name for the metal type in the Name text entry box This name appears in the Metal Types dialog box and is used to identify the metal in your circuit This step is optional Use the up and down arrows to select a pattern for the metal type Any polygons of this metal type that appear in your circuit are displayed with thi
32. circuit performance This concept is illustrated below Circuit 1 Requires 80 cells Runs slow uses more memory More accurate n 8 um 1 um cell size 1 cell Circuit 2 1 cell Reguires only 6 cells Runs fast uses less memory Less accurate 4 um cell size Circuit 1 takes more time and memory to analyze than circuit 2 even though they have approximately the same amount of metal This is because the dimensions in circuit 2 are divisible by 4 so a 4 um cell size may be used Circuit 1 requires a 1 um cell size Think about the sensitivity of your circuit to these dimensions and Chapter 4 Subsectioning your fabrication tolerances If your circuit is not sensitive to a 1 micron change or can be made with only a 1 micron tolerance you can easily round off the 3 micron dimension in circuit 1 to the 4 micron dimension in circuit 2 Cell Size Calculator Sonnet also provides a cell size calculator which you may use to calculate the optimal cell size based on your critical circuit parameters You access the Cell Size Calculator in the Box Settings dialog box Circuit Box Using the Cell Size Calculator is detailed in Chapter 4 Determining Cell Size of the Sonnet Tutorial A detailed discussion of all the entries in the cell size calculator may be found in online help Viewing the Subsections You ca
33. dxfgeo 19 E EXTMAX 275 EXTMIN 275 ebridge 19 edge mesh option 65 edit cut 310 editing a circuit 17 editing in Microwave Office 230 Eeff 134 152 electric fields 397 electrically thick conductors 79 Electromagnetic models inserting 284 em 432 batch file 415 command line 415 description 20 reduce circuit size 48 speed 47 theory 22 24 28 timing 407 EM structure 226 exporting from Microwave Office 252 EM structure editor choosing Microwave Office 231 emgraph 18 emstatus 18 emvu 18 E plane 353 error codes de embedding 129 nl 134 error function 166 Error in processing the layout 296 error message 273 Error while creating hierarchy 296 error residual 404 Errors while launching applications 296 example files att 199 att cascade son 189 benchmark s100 403 s25 403 s50 403 cvia 314 dual patch 111 348 openmite 299 package resonances 386 ste sym 46 steps 41 45 185 tane 399 Thkthru 326 Tripat 350 via example 314 examples att 189 exceptions 275 entities not handled 275 excitations 351 exporting an EM Structure 252 EXT 283 287 external layer file 269 EXTMAX 275 EXTMIN 275 F far field 343 351 far field viewer 25 351 357 dielectric bricks 334 normalization 356 polarization 357 spherical coordinate system 352 ferrite components 351 fields viewing 397 figure eight polygons 175 file DXF 265 Files bad instances 285 SNP 285 valid instances 285 291 fill diagonal 299 fill t
34. e The Broadband Spice model is generally not accurate for response data below 60 dB e A gentle curve may sometimes get fitted with a straight line e Broadband Spice Extractor has only been tested for passive circuits e Broadband Spice Extractor has only been tested using S parameters produced by em However you should be able to use S parameters produced by other sources such as other simulators or measured data to create a Broadband Spice model If you are concerned with the accuracy of the model you should visually inspect the predicted S Parameter data produced by the same rational polynomial which was used to create the Broadband model to determine the usefulness of the Broadband Spice model Be aware that the processing time needed to create your models can be significant The processing time is proportional to the number of analysis frequencies times the square of the number of ports in your circuit Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis Creating a Broadband Spice Model You use the response data created as the result of an em analysis to create a Broadband Spice model For the best results use an Adaptive sweep ABS to analyze your circuit and produce response data spread evenly over the frequency band The following procedure demonstrates the method to be used in the response viewer For detailed instructions for setting up a Broadband Model file in the project editor please refer to online help Once you have completed the
35. level 0 as shown below Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 If you want to modify this via such that it extends from level 0 to level 2 you would do the following 1 Right click on the via polygon on any level on which it appears A pop up menu appears on your display 2 Select Properties from the pop up menu The Via Properties dialog box appears on your display Via Properties multi layer son 2 xj Via Levels Via Metal From Level NN Lossless gt C Up G Down i v Level s To Level To Level i v drop list Cancel Help 3 Select 2 from the To Level drop list The via originates on level 0 which you do not wish to change Selecting 2 from the drop list changes the via so that it goes down to level 2 instead of level 1 Notice that the number of levels is updated from 1 to 2 309 Sonnet User s Guide 4 Click on OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box Your circuit is redrawn so that it appears as shown below Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Note that the via polygon which appears on level 1 now has both up and down arrows indicating that the via extends in both direction The via polygon now appears on level 2 the new endpoint of the modified via Deleting Vias Vias may be deleted on any metalization level on which they appear even if you are in the middle of the via between the endpoint levels Via Polygons To delete a via polygon select the via polygon while in poin
36. metal will be filled in using whole cells thus a diagonal edge would resemble a staircase An example of this is shown in the figure on page 298 297 Sonnet User s Guide 298 Metal off Metal on An example of staircase fill for a metal polygon On the left is the outline of the polygon with the metal fill turned off On the right is the polygon with the metal turned on with a staircase fill As can be seen the cell fill makes a staircase approximating the diagonal edge of the polygon Note that the error caused by such an approximation decreases as the X and Y cell sizes are decreased Thus it is possible to make this error arbitrarily small by choosing sufficiently small X and Y cell sizes However for a coarser cell size the diagonal fill option which uses triangular subsections on the edge may provide a better fit Chapter 17 Using Diagonal Fill This fill option involves additional computation time However depending on the circuit using this option may allow a given level of precision to be achieved more quickly The circuit on page 298 is shown below with diagonal fill A Coupled Open Miter with Diagonal Fill As an example a right angle mitered bend which is closely interacting with an open end will be analyzed Attempts to model this discontinuity using a circuit theory based program do not include the fringing field interaction between the two discontinuities The circuit is c
37. 3 0 If you add a via on metalization level 1 with the direction set to down to ground Tools Add Vias Down to Ground the via extends from level 1 down through the intervening dielectric layers and metalization levels to the bottom of the enclosing box which is ground This via is drawn on levels 1 2 3 and ground The ground level is completely metalized but the via is drawn here to represent the connection from upper levels Via Types There are basically two types of vias edge and polygon The via polygons can be rectangles circles or any arbitrary shape Via polygons are vias which are a separate object from the metalization polygons They allow you to add vias of any shape whose properties are easy to modify The via polygon may also be of a different metal type than any metalization polygons to which it 1s adjacent Edge polygons are vias that are attached to the edge of a metal polygon The via extends for the length of the polygon edge and is one cell wide The metal type used for an edge via is always the same as the polygon to which the edge via is attached If the metal type of the polygon is modified then the metal type of the via is also changed Via polygons are added to your circuit in much the same way that metal polygons are added to your circuit You may add vias in the preset shapes of rectangles or circles or draw an arbitrary polygon by placing each vertex in its desired location Once the shape is complete
38. 356 changing 357 default 356 directive gain 356 power gain 356 normalizing impedances 104 NUM X GRIDS 283 287 NUM Y GRIDS 283 287 number of iterations 167 numerical precision 407 O object type 269 open environment 352 openmite 299 optimization 155 168 conjugate gradient method 166 methodology 166 number of iterations 167 process 166 results 168 specifying goals 167 optional files 153 optional output files 26 options arc conversion angle 274 orientation of subdivision lines 214 origin 353 output files lumped rsp 197 overview Microwave Office Interface 223 P package resonances 385 395 package resonances 386 parallel subsections 39 49 parameter sweep 149 164 parameterization 155 168 Parameters box 283 EXT 283 NUM X GRIDS 283 287 NUM Y GRIDS 283 287 substrate 282 parameters 156 166 adding to a netlist 188 adjustable point set 158 160 adjustable point sets 159 anchor point 157 anchored 157 circular dependencies 163 dependent 161 error conditions 163 in a subproject 206 nominal value 156 157 ports 107 reference planes 163 reference point 157 select dependents 162 symmetrical 159 patch antenna 343 patch antennas 351 pattern 351 patvu 18 PCSUB 282 PERM 282 phased arrays 343 phi 352 354 Index specifying range for calculation 354 plot cartesian 343 351 354 polar 343 351 354 surface 343 351 354 types 354 POINT 275 polar 354 polar plot 343 351 polarization 357 polyface mes
39. ABS sweep in Sonnet can produce approximately 300 data points from just a few discrete data points it is more efficient and accurate to only specify frequencies in the Global controls and use the data from Sonnet s analysis For example assume the Global frequency control in Microwave Office is set to do an analysis from 1 to 10 GHz in steps of 0 1 GHz This would require the analysis of the EM Structure at 91 frequency points Also assume that the Local controls specify only 11 frequencies from 1 to 10 GHz and you specify an ABS sweep on the Full Band which in this case is 1 GHz to 10 GHz When the Simulate Analyze command is selected in Microwave Office the Sonnet analysis engine em performs an ABS sweep from 1 GHz to 10 GHz producing approximately 300 data points across this band The only data which is returned however are the 11 frequency points from 1 to 10 GHz in steps of 1 GHz as shown in the illustration below Microwave Office would interpolate between these points to produce the Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Global Frequency points Therefore the most efficient way to analyze your EM Structure is to specify all the desired frequencies in your Global controls in Microwave Office and specify an ABS sweep in Sonnet s em Geometry AWR s Microwave Office 91 Global data points and 11 Local data points Sonnet s em ABS sweep produces 300 11 Points data points 289 data points discarded
40. Net The last network in the netlist is the main network The main network is the network whose solution you are solving for in this netlist When you analyze the netlist the response data produced in the analysis is for the main network You can edit the name and attributes of this network including the number of ports by double clicking on the entry This is true of all entries made in the netlist you must double click on them to open the dialog box which allows you to edit the entry or select the item then select the Tools gt Modify command from the main menu Adding Networks To add a network to your netlist select Tools gt Add Network from the project editor main menu or click on the Add Network button on the tool bar The Edit Network dialog box appears on your display Using this dialog box you can define the number of ports in the network port terminations and assign netlist node numbers to the network ports When you add a network it is always added as the main network for the netlist The pre existing network is moved up in the file Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis There are four types of elements available to include in a network network modeled data file and project Adding Network Elements The first type of element is the network element A network element allows you to use another previously defined network as part of the present network This is useful if you want to duplicate a network multiple times T
41. S RAS WSS Bottom Cross section of metalization There are no sides in a zero thickness model therefore when translating from these parameters the current which flows on the sides is ignored In some cir cuits stripline for example the current is symmetrical with half of the current flowing on the top of the metal and half flowing on the bottom of the metal In this instance the current ratio is 1 If you had twice as much current flowing on the top as on the bottom the current ratio is 2 It is difficult to know an exact value of the current ratio without obtaining measured data on your circuit All planar solvers must estimate this value in order to calculate metal loss this par ticular model in Sonnet allows you to enter the value Note that reciprocal values have the same effect i e 0 5 results in the same loss as 2 0 Resistor To define a metal which you wish to use as a resistor enter the DC resistance in ohms sq in the Rdc text entry box which appears when you select this metal type To use this loss model the resistivity should be constant over the frequency range of interest Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Rdc Rrf This method allows you to enter two values Rpc and Rpg The first parameter Rpc determines loss at low frequency where the conductor is much thinner than the skin depth Surprisingly other electromagnetic analyses often predict zero loss at low frequency because they assume Rp
42. Test l I R R I I C C I I I I I L m mm mm mm um d Block cascaded to negate Box wall port box wall port discontinuity discontinuity De embedding automatically cancels the discontinuity associated with a box wall port Shifting Reference Planes 124 Transmission lines are reguired in many circuits to connect ports to the device under test DUT If the length of a transmission line is more than a few degrees relative to a wavelength unwanted phase and possibly loss will be added to the S parameter results If the impedance of the transmission line differs from the normalizing impedance of the S parameters usually 50 ohms an additional error in the S parameters results Thus if we are only interested in the behavior of the DUT any long transmission lines connecting the ports to the DUT should be removed during de embedding The process of removing lengths of transmission line during de embedding is known as shifting reference planes NOTE Chapter 7 De embedding Reference planes may be specified in the project editor for box wall and auto grounded ports but not ungrounded internal ports When em detects a reference plane and de embedding is enabled it automatically builds and analyzes the calibration standards necessary to de embed the port and shift the reference plane by the specified length Reference planes are not necessary for de embedding If you do no
43. The purpose ofthe far field viewer is to calculate the far field pattern of an antenna for a given excitation and set of directions for example phi and theta ranges The far field viewer starts by reading the current density data generated by em for the antenna at the desired frequencies The far field viewer uses the current distribution information in the project and generates the desired far field antenna pattern information This pattern information is viewed in one of three ways Cartesian polar or surface plot A default set of values for directions port excitations and terminations are used to calculate plots for the first frequency upon start up of the far field viewer Thereafter the user specifies the frequencies directions for the radiation pattern and the desired port excitations and terminations Since the far field viewer uses the current density data generated by em it can analyze the same types of circuits as em These include microstrip coplanar structures patch antennas arrays of patches and any other multi layer circuit As with em the far field viewer can analyze any number of ports metal types and frequencies The far field viewer cannot analyze circuits which radiate sideways structures with radiation due to vertical components coaxial structures wire antennas surface wave antennas ferrite components or structures that require multiple dielectric constants on a single layer Be aware that although the current
44. You use the Adaptive Sweep Settings on the Sonnet Options tab of the Options property pages to specify the frequency controls for your Sonnet analysis To open this page right click on the EM Structure and select Options from the pop up menu then click on the Sonnet Options tab in the property pages which appear The settings and their use are described below Current Density C Compute Current Density Adaptive Sweep Settings Adaptive Sweep v Use Adaptive Band Synthesis Settings O FullBand O Select Band Sonnet Task Bar Use Adaptive Band Synthesis Select this checkbox to run an ABS sweep in Sonnet when the EM Structure is analyzed Note that although an ABS sweep produces approximately 300 data points only those data points reguested by 239 Sonnet User s Guide 240 Microwave Office are returned from Sonnet This checkbox is selected by default If you do not want to run an ABS sweep but want only to analyze at the required points set in Microwave Office clear this checkbox Full Band Select this radio button when you wish to perform the ABS sweep on the Full Band required by Microwave Office This band is defined by the lowest and highest frequencies requested by Microwave Office This radio button is only enabled when the Use Adaptive Band Synthesis checkbox is selected This is the default setting for an ABS sweep When this checkbox is selected then the Analysis Control in the Analysis Setup dialog
45. a New EM Structure 0 20 00 eee eee ee 226 Selecting Sonnet for an Existing EM Structure 228 Editing in Microwave Office ooo nnen 230 Selecting Microwave Office as the EM Structure Editor 231 Changing the Fill Type soon eee eee 232 Controlling the Subsectioning Meshing 236 Controlling the Analysis Frequencies 0 237 Computing Current Density 000 0 eese 241 Viewing the Subsectioning sossun 245 Executing the Analysis lees 247 Response Data e nl Al e le eee 248 10 Table of Contents Editing in Sonnet s Project Editor sossun 249 Working Outside Microwave Office soon esses 252 Exporting Your EM Structure to Sonnet 252 Analyzing Outside Microwave Office 45 253 Importing a Sonnet Project sossun nnen 254 Translation Issues osuu nnen 255 Sonnet Features Not Available in Microwave Office 256 Metal Types etico deste Rp ST RU UR RAS ERR 258 Port Mapping eeu s NTS E ERE P E RES 260 Ports on Ground Plane 2 0 cece eee eee eee 261 Port Termination and Excitation 000 eee 261 Off Grid Placement soon cee eee 262 Coordinate System oss teens 262 3D Viewer Scaling se pese ene ep Herr Vds 262 Meshing Current Density Plots and Far Field Plots 263 Troubleshooting sss merisea ar ccc eee 263 Unlocking Microwave O
46. a new library file click on the Specify button to the right of the radio button which opens a browse window which allows you to select a file For instructions on setting up a library see Setting Up a Dielectric Library page 97 Once a library is selected a list of dielectric materials in the library should appear in the dialog box There is a default Global library provided by Sonnet that contains commonly used dielectric materials To add a dielectric material click on the Add button and enter the desired name and loss parameters in the Dielectric Editor dialog box then click on OK to add a new dielectric to the library This dielectric material is now available in the library to be used in your project Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss 5 Toedit an existing dielectric click on its entry to select it then click on the Edit button and make any desired changes then click on the OK button The Dielectric Editor dialog box is closed and any changes are updated in the dielectric material s entry line 6 Todelete a dielectric material from your dielectric library click on the Dielectric Material to select it and click on the Delete button in the Dielectric Library dialog box This deletes the dielectric material from the library Note that if the dielectric material has been added to the project and is in use deleting the dielectric from the library has no effect on the dielectric material being used in the projec
47. a significant compared to required accuracy surface wave it is reflected by the sidewalls of the box Unless this is the actual situation such antennas are inappropriate for this technique Actually the Fifth Condition is a special case of the Second Condition since if there is significant surface wave the Second Condition cannot be met This condition is stated explicitly because of its importance 347 Sonnet User s Guide In general any surface wave is both reflected and refracted when it encounters the edge of the substrate This boundary condition is different from either the conducting wall of Sonnet or the infinite substrate provided by a true open space analysis A dual patch antenna 1s illustrated conceptually below Free Space Top Cover Double Patch Antenna Feed point Radiation can be simulated by including a lossy top cover a lossy dielectric layer optional and by placing the sidewalls far from the radiator drawing not to scale Place the top cover one half wavelengths from the radiator The feed point is created in the project editor by creating a via to ground at the feed point Then the ground end of that via is specified as a port just as one would specify a more typical port on the edge of the substrate at a box sidewall A file showing an antenna similar to this one is named dual patch son and is available in the Sonnet examples 348 Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation
48. all the metalization in this EM Structure If you wish to only use the mesh for a particular polygon see Setting Sonnet Fill Type for a Single Polygon below Click on the OK button to apply the changes and close the Property Pages Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Setting Sonnet Fill Type for a Single Polygon To change the mesh properties for a single polygon do the following 1 Click on the desired polygon to select it The vertices of the polygon will be highlighted to indicate selection 2 Right click and select Mesh Material Properties from the pop up menu which appears The Conductor Properties dialog box appears on your display Conductor Properties Conductor Material Mesh Options Selected Material Material Properties Perfect Conductor Low frequency resistance 0 Ohms Sg High freguency loss coefficient 0 Ohms Sg sart f Material Color Excess surface reactance D jOhms Sq Edit Material 3 Click on the Mesh Options tab in the Conductor Properties dialog box The Mesh options are displayed 235 Sonnet User s Guide 4 If the Use default properties checkbox is selected click on it to disable it This enables all the settings and allows you to override the default settings for this EM Structure Conductor Properties Conductor Material Mesh Options Meshing Density Sonnet ptions O Low O Normal O High _ Diagonal Fill O No variable mesh Conformal Mesh
49. and BRIDGE LAYER statements in the preference file see The Preference File page 286 for more detail Special features of Selected gt Geo The Selected Geo menu item is designed to aid designers in inserting electromagnetic models into a design A user selects the particular part of the design to simulate and pull down the Selected Geo menu item The design is changed by this command so the user might want to have two versions a circuit theory design and an electromagnetic design Selected Geo creates a sub design from the selected portion of the layout and schematic called design name em 7 where is equal to 1 2 N depending on the number of electromagnetic sub designs created from this design Selected Geo then translates the layout of the sub design creating a project called lt subdesign gt son Selected gt Geo then creates a schematic for the sub design Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface which references the correct SNP data file lt sub design gt sNp sNN for number of ports greater than 9 wires up the ports and saves the new sub design The modified top level design is not saved so that the previous state can be recovered in case of a mistake The user then checks the project by running Launch xgeom and analyzes the file If any adjustments are made to the sub design layout after the first translation use the Rep Geo menu item with the sub design in the layout window to recreate the project w
50. available on Sonnet s website at www sonnetsoftware com Search for References James C Rautio Accurate and Efficient Analysis of Large Spiral Inductors with Thick Metal and Narrow Gaps Using Space Mapping IEEE MTT S International Microwave Symposium Workshop Notes amp Short Courses WFD 7 6 11 June 2004 James C Rautio In Defense of Uselessness IEEE Microwave Magazine Vol 5 No 1 March 2004 pp 100 102 James C Rautio A Conformal Mesh for Efficient Planar Electromagnetic Analysis IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques Vol 52 No 1 January 2004 pp 257 264 419 Sonnet User s Guide 420 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 David I Sanderson James C Rautio Robert A Groves and Sanjay Raman Accurate Modeling of Monolithic Inductors Using Conformal Meshing for Reduced Computation Microwave Magazine Vol 4 No 4 December 2003 pp 87 96 James C Rautio Testing Limits of Algorithms Associated with High Frequency Planar Electromagnetic Analysis European Microwave Conference Digest Munich October 2003 pp 463 466 Rautio James C Generating Spectrally Rich Data Sets Using Adaptive Band Synthesis Interpolation Workshop WFA IEEE MTT Symposium Digest Philadelphia June 8 13 2003 James C Rautio Conformal Subsections for Accurate EM Analysis Microwave Journal Vol 46 No 6 June 2003
51. checks to make sure that there is no metal directly beneath the auto grounded port If metal is found em prints an error message and stops Edge of Metal Polygon is Lossless Auto grounded ports can attach to the edge of any metal polygon in the interior of a circuit There are no restrictions on the loss parameters of the metal used in the polygon However along the edge ofthe metal polygon where the port is attached em does force the cells to be lossless For most circuits this should have little or no effect on the results If however the port is attached to a highly lossy metal polygon such as a thin film resistor the edge cell s of that polygon will be made lossless and the output results may be affected Require Short Distance to Ground Auto grounded ports require a short distance to the groundplane The distance between the auto grounded port and the substrate groundplane should be less than 1 8 wavelength Auto Grounded Ports on Box Wall Auto grounded ports are designed to be used in the interior of a circuit If an auto grounded port is placed on a box wall it is treated as if it were a standard box wall port Adding Auto grounded Ports 1 To add an auto grounded port proceed as you would to add a standard port as described on page 101 2 Click on the port to select it This will enable the Modify menu option 114 Chapter 6 Ports 3 Select Modify Port Properties to open the Port Attributes dialog box
52. current density data 153 de embedding 152 multiple box resonances 151 optional files 153 ripple in S Parameters 153 transmission line parameters 152 find maximum 149 find minimum 149 limitations 352 analysis controls 25 analysis frequencies Microwave Office Interface 237 Analysis Setup dialog box 145 anchored parameters 157 anchor point 157 reference point 157 Angle Axis 354 anisotropic dielectric bricks 332 antennas 343 350 surface wave 351 e wire 351 E er a APPID 275 resolution l arc conversion angle 274 running an adaptive sweep 143 arcs 274 viewing the response 154 att 189 199 adaptive sweep 143 add ports auto grounded 114 standard 101 via ports 112 adding parameters 188 att_cascade son 189 attenuator 196 ATTRIBUTES 275 auto grounded ports 112 113 194 AWR Interface see Microwave Office Interface axis Z 352 429 Sonnet User s Guide B Bad instances 285 balanced ports 103 379 380 batch file 415 benchmark 401 406 accuracy 401 residual error 404 blocks 275 BOT 289 boundaries 179 Box parameters 283 box resonance 151 391 box wall ports 101 bricks see dielectric bricks BRIDGE LAYER 284 285 291 C caching 39 43 45 CAE software 28 calculate 351 calculate memory usage option 408 calibration lengths 107 108 109 CAP LAYER 284 285 291 capacitors 184 333 cartesian plot 343 351 354 cascading data files 183 189 cell size 48 52 298 334 413 accuracy 21 determining error
53. current on this metal will be proportional to the E field 399 Sonnet User s Guide 400 If you view the current density on level 0 you should see the values in the red area are about 0 001 Amps meter You can click on the circuit and see the value of the current in the status bar at the bottom of the window Then simply use the equation based on Ohms law E JX where E Electric field in Volts meter J Current density in Amps meter 0 001 A m X X gc value of the metal in ohms sg 1 0E6 This gives E 1000 V m This is assuming a voltage at port 1 of 1 0 Volts default setting Chapter 26 Accuracy Benchmarking Chapter 26 Accuracy Benchmarking Electromagnetic analyses are often described as providing what is called Good Agreement Between Measured And Calculated GABMAC However in the past there has been little effort to decide just what good means The more useful result is the Difference Between Measured And Calculated DMAC In this chapter we describe a precise benchmark based on 21 22 and 24 which allows the evaluation of DMAC for any 2 5 D or 3 D electromagnetic analysis down to the 1 x 105 level of accuracy There is an example of a coupled stripline benchmark available in online help under Applications 401 Sonnet User s Guide An Exact Benchmark What we need to calculate DMAC is an exact benchmark One source of an exact benchmark is stripline The characte
54. data is calculated in em with a metal box the metal box 1s removed in the far field viewer calculations The modeling considerations discussed earlier in the chapter are important however for the accuracy of the far field viewer data relies on the accuracy of the em simulation By default the far field viewer analyzes the first frequency in the current density data stored in the project at a default set of angles and port excitations when the file is opened To obtain the antenna pattern for other than the first frequency you must select Graph Calculate from the far field viewer main menu The Calculate dialog box allows you to set up all the parameters for the data you desire to calculate The far field viewer calculates the fields radiated by the current that is stored in the 351 Sonnet User s Guide 352 project The analysis is performed in an open environment with a substrate of infinite extent For details on the Calculate dialog box please refer to the online help in the far field viewer program Please refer to A Two Dimensional Far Field Viewer Tutorial page 145 in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials for a tutorial on using the far field viewer Analysis Limitations The analysis of the far field viewer has the following limitations e The plotted antenna patterns do not represent de embedded data Therefore the effect of the port discontinuity is still included even If you specify de embedding when running em
55. display 149 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Select Parameter Sweep from the Analysis Control drop list The dialog box is updated to allow you to specify the parameter sweep Analysis Setup steps son Ja Compute Current Densit pi x 3 Click on the Add button to the right of the Parameter Sweep list box The Parameter Sweep Entry dialog box appears on your display The default frequency specification is a linear sweep Parameter Sweep Entry steps son 150 Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS 4 Click on the Perform Adaptive Sweep ABS checkbox to select an adaptive frequency sweep The dialog box changes so that there are only Start and Stop text entry boxes 5 Enter the frequency band for the ABS in the Start and Stop text entry boxes Frequency Specification Iv Perform Adaptive Sweep ABS Start GHz Stop GHz fo 25 0 Cell Size 10 0 mils Y Cell Size 10 0 mils Sweep Start Stop Step Nominal Iv Width 30 50 10 40 0 Cancel Help This completes setting up an ABS freguency sweep for the parameter sweep You would also need to select the parameters which you want to use in the parameter sweep and enter their data ranges before closing this dialog box Analysis Issues There are several issues you should be aware of before using the ABS technigue These are covered below Multiple Box Resonances You should be aware that circuits with multiple box resonances make it difficu
56. done to insure high accuracy in the Q Factor result when ABS is used The Q Factor is defined as follows imag Y realY The result is higher accuracy from the ABS sweep but this accuracy comes at the cost of requiring more discrete frequencies to be analyzed before conversion 1s reached Running an Adaptive Sweep To run an analysis using the Adaptive Band Synthesis technique you do the following 1 Open your project in the project editor 143 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Select Analysis Setup from the main menu of the project editor The Analysis Setup dialog box appears on your display with an adaptive sweep already selected since Adaptive Sweep is the default for analysis control Analysis Setup steps son 2 x r Options Compute Current Density Speed Memory I Memory Save Advanced r Analysis Control Adaptive Sweep ABS v Start Stop GHz GHz 10 25 0 Cancel Help 3 Select Adaptive Sweep ABS from the Analysis Control drop list if necessary This selects the ABS technique for the analysis 4 Enter the desired frequency band in the Start and Stop text entry boxes This defines the frequency band on which you wish to perform the ABS analysis The step size is automatically set by em during the analysis See page 142 for a description of how the ABS resolution is determined 5 Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the changes 6 Sa
57. edit the parameters below Erel The relative dielectric constant The ratio g e where g is the real part of the permittivity ofthe dielectric layer material and is the permittiv ity of free space The ratio is dimensionless Dielectric Loss Tan The dielectric loss tangent The ratio 2 2 where amp g je and s is the complex permittivity of the dielectric layer material The ratio is dimensionless Diel Cond The dielectric conductivity c where o is the bulk conductivity in siemens per meter Mrel The relative magnetic permeability u of the dielectric layer material Magnetic Loss Tan The magnetic loss tangent of the dielectric layer material One last parameter that may be specified for a dielectric layer is the Z Partitioning This value may be changed in the Z Partitions dialog box which is opened when you click on the Z Parts button in the Dielectric Layers dialog box Z Partitions The z partitioning parameter is the setting which controls the number of partitions which the dielectric layer is divided into in the z direc tion for the dielectric layer While this parameter is specified in the dielectric layer window it only has an effect on the dielectric bricks on that layer Changing this value for a particular layer will have absolutely no affect on the analysis if there are no bricks on the layer If there are multiple bricks on the layer the Z subsectioning for all of those bricks will be id
58. ees 406 27 Time Required for Analysis ooo oon eee 407 The Wallis RE m ass Gitta Waid e E UE C un 410 Detailed Parameter Dependencies oss 411 Appendix I Em Command Line for Batch 415 Appendix II Sonnet References ccccec cece cece sc eee 119 15 Sonnet User s Guide 16 Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction The Sonnet Design Suite The suite of Sonnet analysis tools is shown on page 20 Using these tools Sonnet provides an open environment to many other design and layout programs The following is a brief description of all ofthe Sonnet tools Check with your system administrator to find out 1f you are licensed for these products Project The project editor is a user friendly graphical interface that enables you to input Editor your circuit geometry or circuit netlist for subsequent em analysis If you have purchased the DXF and or the GDSII translator the translator interface is found in the project editor You also set up analysis controls for your project in the project editor Program module xgeom 17 Sonnet User s Guide Analysis Engine Analysis Monitor Response Viewer Current Density Viewer Far Field Viewer 18 Em is the electromagnetic analysis engine It uses a modified method of moments analysis based on Maxwell s equations to perform a true three dimensional current analysis of predominantly planar structures Em comp
59. electromagnetic coupling on and between each dielectric surface This provides em with its several orders of magnitude of speed increase over volume meshing and other non FFT based surface meshing techniques Em is a complete electromagnetic analysis all electromagnetic effects such as dispersion loss stray coupling etc are included There are only two approximations used by em First the finite numerical precision inherent in digital computers Second em subdivides the metalization into small subsections made up of cells The cell size is an important factor in determining the accuracy By using a smaller cell size metal edges can be more accurately defined and the current distribution Is better represented The trade off is increased execution time A quantitative description of accuracy versus cell size is given in Chapter 26 Accuracy Benchmarking on page 401 The trade off between execution time and accuracy increases the degrees of freedom available to the design engineer 21 Sonnet User s Guide A Simple Outline of the Theory Em performs an electromagnetic analysis of a microstrip stripline coplanar waveguide or any other 3 D planar circuit by solving for the current distribution on the circuit metalization using the Method of Moments The metalization is modeled as zero thickness metal between dielectric layers Em analyzes planar structures inside a shielding box Port connections are usually made at the box
60. em analysis of your circuit do the following to create a Broadband Spice model 1 Open your project in the response viewer 2 Select Output Broadband Model File from the main menu of the response viewer If you have more than one project open in the response viewer a window appears which allows you to select the desired project 3 Select the desired project from the project drop list You may only create a Broadband Spice Model for one project at a time 4 Click on the OK button to select the project and close the dialog box The Output Broadband Model File dialog box appears on your display You may access online help by clicking on the Help button or use context sensitive help for an explanation of a particular control or entry 5 Select the file format of the Broadband Model PSpice or Spectre from the Format drop list PSpice and Spectre are the two formats of Spice file supported A PSpice file uses the extension lib and a Spectre file uses the extension scs 371 Sonnet User s Guide 372 Enter the desired name for the Spice model file in the Model File text entry box A default filename is provided which places the Broadband Spice model file in the same directory as your source project If you have selected multiple parameter combinations a file is produced for each combination If you wish to use another name or save the file in another location you may edit the text entry box Enter the desired error
61. example illustrates the format of the de embedded data is output in the analysis monitor and saved as part of your project If you wish to also have a separate file containing 127 Sonnet User s Guide your response data you may specify that one be output from an analysis using the Analysis gt Output Files command in the project editor See Analysis Output Files in the project editor s online help for details on specifying a file Run 1 Wed Oct 11 18 38 10 2000 Frequency Sweep Frequency 10 GHz De embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 10 0000000 1 000000 72 59 6 414e 4 17 050 6 414e 4 17 050 1 000000 73 31 Pl F 10 0 Eeff 6 45562325 0 0 Z0 51 7880826 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 04163932 P2 F 10 0 Eeff 6 47619184 0 0 Z0 51 8822385 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 04165009 Analysis successfully completed Example showing format of results obtained when de embedding is enabled in em You should notice the following about the results in above e The line which starts with De embedded is a comment line which describes the analysis results on the line below In this example the results are de embedded 50 ohm S parameters in Touchstone magnitude angle format e The second line gives the analysis results e The remaining two lines give de embedding information for each port in the circuit The various fields are defined as follows Pg Port number F Frequency in units defined earlier
62. exciting both X directed and Y directed modes To excite Z directed modes connect a via to the end of the probe Make sure you don t place the probe precisely in the middle of the box wall You want to make sure you excite both even and odd modes 390 Chapter 24 Package Resonances Then create another probe on an adjoining box wall We do this in order to measure the coupling between the two probes During a resonant situation the coupling will increase Sweep the frequency in fine steps and look for resonances When the box resonates there should be stronger coupling between your two probes This can easily be seen by plotting the magnitude of S21 Box Resonances mcocoe 35umnuz dB Frequency GHZ The peaks represent box resonances The Box Resonance Estimator The best way to understand the box resonance situation within your package is to use the Box Resonance Estimator BEFORE running an analysis It is recommended that this tool be routinely used to prevent wasted simulation time Itis an extremely useful tool because it allows the user to make modifications to 391 Sonnet User s Guide 392 the structure and gauge its impact on box resonances It can also be used after a simulation is complete to help determine which characteristics of a complex data curve are related to box resonances As with the runtime warning message these are theoretical values based on an empty Sonnet box The specif
63. how a layout is to be processed to form a Sonnet project They are not required to perform a translation but they add an extra level of control over the translation process NUM X GRIDS Syntax NUM X GRIDS lt ncells gt This statements sets the total number of cells across X dimension The default is ncells 256 NUM Y GRIDS Syntax NUM Y GRIDS lt ncells gt This statements sets the total number of cells across Y dimension The default is ncells 256 EXT Syntax EXT n This parameter is used in determining box size X Y referred to as Substrate Area by the project editor A single number following this keyword sets the multiplier for the substrate height used to add extensions to each side of the circuit dimensions to determine the area of the project editor box De embedding reference planes and additional lines are added to extend the port S parameters in to the original circuit dimensions This parameter insures that the circuit elements are kept sufficiently far away from the box sidewalls in the em analysis The use of this parameter is explained further in Box Settings page 283 If not specified the EXT parameter defaults to 3 287 Sonnet User s Guide 288 LAYER Syntax 1 LAYER n1 n2 n3 VIA NO PORT Syntax 2 LAYER n1 IGNORE This parameter is used to determine the mapping of Agilent layers to project editor layers and metalization codes Most layer information is determined at ru
64. impedance for each port The normalizing impedance is represented by four numbers First is the real part in ohms Next comes the reactive part in ohms Third is the inductive part in nanohenries nH The last number is the capacitive part in picofarads pF The inductive and capacitive part modify only the reactive portion ofthe load they are included so you do not have to manually re calculate the reactive part at each frequency The resistance reactance and inductance are all connected in series when the specific normalizing impedance is calculated at each frequency of analysis as illustrated below The capacitance is connected in parallel with the result and then the final normalizing impedance at the freguency of analysis is calculated R jX L Equivalent circuit of an em port 105 Sonnet User s Guide NOTE The normalizing impedances are ignored if Y or Z parameters are specified for output Y and Z parameters are always normalized to one ohm This capability should be used only by the most advanced users If the above discussion is not clear seek assistance Under no circumstances should this capability be used on data which is to be incorporated in a circuit in a standard circuit theory program other than Sonnet Many such programs assume S parameters normalized to exactly 50 ohms For example the 50 ohm S parameters of a microstrip step junction look like a very small shunt capacitance and a very small series ind
65. issues several different warning messages to alert the user to certain assumptions being made due to unavailable data These are descriptive and can be handled by simply correcting the problem However if you ever receive an Agilent system error when performing a translation you probably have a configuration problem Error While Creating Hierarchy When the Selected Geo option is used the Agilent interface creates two hierarchical references by instantiating both the layout and the schematic The names chosen for these instances are automatically generated by the Agilent interface If there is a design of the same name resident in memory it will cause an error This should not occur in normal use but if it does remove the offending designs from memory and try again Remember to reopen your top level design to recover your original starting position Port Instances Do Not Translate In order for a port to be located and translated by the Agilent interface it must be directly connected to a translated polygon If a port is connected to the circuit by awire in the layout window it will not be translated by the Agilent interface Make sure all ports are collocated with their connected pins prior to translation Chapter 17 Using Diagonal Fill Chapter 17 Using Diagonal Fill This chapter discusses the use of the diagonal fill option for a metal polygon When a polygon is first added to a circuit the default fill type 1s staircase The
66. memory and processing time since the number of subsections needed to model the non rectangular shapes is significantly higher than the number of subsections required for a rectangular polygon Conformal meshing is a technique which can dramatically reduce the memory and time required for analysis of a circuit with diagonal or curved polygon edges This technique groups together strings of cells following diagonal and curved metal contours Whereas staircase fill results in numerous small X and Y directed subsections conformal mesh results in a few long conformal subsections Fewer subsections yields faster processing times with lower memory requirements for your analysis 169 Sonnet User s Guide In older meshing techniques large non rectangular subsections did not include the high concentration of current on the edge of the lines required by Maxwell s equations The results could significantly under estimate loss and inductance In contrast the Sonnet conformal meshing automatically includes the high edge current in each conformal section In conformal meshing Sonnet can achieve the speed of using large subsections and at the same time enjoy the accuracy of using small cells This patented Sonnet capability is unique Pictured above is a typical circuit which would be appropriate for Conformal Meshing The left picture shows the rectangular subsections created by using staircase fill This results in approximately 800 subsections un
67. menu does not appear or is corrupted 295 Error in Processing the Layout osuen 296 Error While Creating Hierarchy oss 296 Port Instances Do Not Translate oss 296 17 Using Diagonal Fill sie a s nr Rer cc 297 A Coupled Open Miter with Diagonal Fill suus 299 18 Vias and 3 D Structures ccc cee cece cece ccc e se JUL Introduction RR VANKI INAN ES Pee RES 301 Restrictions on VIas i ois pees te ew odie wa ee eee a PRESS 302 Creating the Vias i eR eR EE eae aed e 302 Mia Directi n zs ey er WERDE CE TER EN ERU ds 302 Via PY Pes seis reU ERN UC I 303 Via Posts o cio Sheba SORE REALE Ee LEE ROR Ge 305 Adding a Via to Ground sossun nn eee 306 Multi layer ViaS 6 nn nee 308 Deleting Vias x vanta TA TA AS eee 310 NAA LOSS so cin ect an CU eue CONDE UC HV V Wer 311 Via Ports JK k to ESO A EE JAA ALT so ae ts Eoo 312 Simple Via Example sossun nn KN 314 A Conical Nadya sos sas Osa glow a STN TA UNPENSUUETOS 314 12 Table of Contents 19 Thick Metal kv RI 4 wx eel c esee IZ Thick Metal Type eiu eR eme reete Ra SR ASS 317 Creating a Thick Metal Polygon 2 0 00 0 nn 319 Viewing Thick Metal in the Project Editor 322 Restrictions with Thick Metal Polygons ss 324 Modeling an Arbitrary Cross Section osuus 324 Thick Metal in the Current Density Viewer 327 20 Dielectric Bricks
68. microns wide is probably less than the manufacturing tolerances However there are circuits which have very fine geometries combined with very large overall structures The fine geometry determines the cell size requiring the overall circuit to use a large number of cells To address this problem you may specify a minimum and maximum subsection size in terms of cells for each polygon You use the parameters X Min Y Min X Max and Y Max to do this Chapter 4 Subsectioning discusses this in more detail A third way to reduce the number of subsections is to cut the circuit into pieces and analyze each piece separately For example instead of analyzing an entire bandpass filter analyze half of it Then if both halves are identical just use the em circuit network capability or a circuit theory program to cascade the half filter analysis with itself Removing Parallel Subsections A transmission line connected to a port is subsectioned with both x and y directed subsections included in order to determine both x and y directed currents However in most cases a majority of the current flows in the longitudinal direction and there is very little current flowing in the transverse direction 49 Sonnet User s Guide 50 For example in a horizontal x directed transmission line most of the current is flowing in the x direction There is very little transverse y directed current flowing Without parallel subsection removal a
69. name for the metal type in the Name text entry box The Metal Editor dialog box should appear similar to the picture below Metal Editor thick metal son 12 x Select metal from library Name Gold Pattern Type Thick Metal Model E Conductivity 10900000 0 Sim Thickness 5o mils Num Sheets B Thickness is simulated at the expense of analysis time Cancel Help 320 6 10 Chapter 19 Thick Metal Click on the OK button to close the Metal Editor dialog box and apply the changes The Metal Types dialog box is updated with the new metal type Metal Types thick metal son L2 x ES masa Metal for New mn Polygons Gold Cnd 4 09e7 T 50 NS 2 Losstess Edit Remove Library Apply Cancel Help Click on the OK button to close the Metal Types dialog box The thick metal is now available to use in your project Enter the desired polygon then double click on the polygon to open the Metalization Properties dialog box Select the thick metal model metal type from the Metal drop list in the Metalization Properties dialog box This will apply the metal type which uses thick metal to the selected polygon The thick metal extends upwards from the level on which the polygon was drawn Click on the OK button to close the Metalization Properties dialog box and apply the changes The fill pattern of the polygon changes to the fill pattern used by the thick metal If
70. not on that level make the level visible in the Levels dialog box which appears in response to selecting View Metalization Levels Then you can see how different levels of metalization line up You may also use the Levels dialog box to turn off the visibility of any given level By default the project editor starts with all levels visible Adding a Via to Ground 306 A via to ground can be added from any metalization level To add a via to ground go to the level from which you wish the via to extend downwards and perform the following Select Tools Add Via Down to Ground from the project editor menu Any vias subsequently added to your circuit will extend from the level to which they are added down through all intervening levels to ground Select Tools gt Add Via Via Type to add the desired type of via The command places you in an add via mode the type of via is dependent on the command you selected Draw the desired via The via you input is drawn on the present level and vias are drawn on each level below up to and including the ground plane at the bottom ofthe box If you wanted to add an edge via you would Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures first have had to drawn a metal polygon to which to attach the edge via An example of a via polygon going from level 0 to ground in a two level circuit 1s pictured below The via polygon metalization is shown on Level 0 Note that the arrows are pointing down indic
71. of a metal polygon This is not the case with auto grounded ports You simply place auto grounded ports anywhere a grounded port is needed Em automatically detects the presence of auto grounded ports in the circuit and connects the port terminals appropriately Auto grounded ports connect directly through all dielectric layers to the ground plane Via ports allow the flexibility of connecting between any two adjacent dielectric layers Auto grounded ports are de embedded when the de embedding option is used while via ports are not Reference planes may be set with auto grounded ports but cannot be set for via ports Special Considerations for Auto Grounded Ports Metal Under Auto Grounded Ports You cannot have metal directly beneath an auto grounded port in a multi layer circuit Auto grounded ports are two terminal devices with one terminal connected to an edge of a metal polygon and the second terminal connected to the 113 Sonnet User s Guide ground plane When em detects the presence of an auto grounded port it automatically connects the two terminals in this manner This includes circuits which have multiple dielectric layers between the polygon and the ground plane However in order for em to accomplish this there must be a direct path from the edge of the metal polygon to the ground plane When an auto grounded port is used in a circuit where there is more than one dielectric layer between the port and the ground plane em
72. of the first frequency in a run em prints out the amount of time spent on various portions ofthe analysis Ifthe time spent in any particular section of the analysis is less than one second it is not printed out Sections which are timed include the waveguide mode calculation prior to matrix fill the matrix fill and the matrix inversion Parameters which have no effect on analysis time include the substrate thickness cover height and number of ports Each of these parameters is unlimited and have no impact on speed while still maintaining complete accuracy Including metalization loss increases the matrix solve time only And this is only if the rest of the structure is lossless If there is any dielectric loss or ground plane or top cover loss there is virtually no additional impact from also including metalization loss the whole calculation is already fully complex The matrix solution time is increased by about a factor of four if it becomes complex Metalization loss has no impact on any other segment of the analysis Including dielectric loss or ground plane or top cover loss makes the entire calculation complex The matrix solve time is increased by about a factor of four while the matrix fill time is increased by about a factor of two In calculating the values for the matrix elements during the matrix fill several two dimensional Fourier Transforms must be calculated The size of the Fourier Transforms is the same size as t
73. on box walls as in the figure or in the interior of the metal box see Chapter 6 for a description of port types available in em Typically transmission lines are necessary to connect the ports to the DUT When de embedding is enabled em performs the following sequence of steps 1 Calculates port discontinuities 119 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Removes effects of port discontinuities from analysis results 3 Optionally shifts reference planes removes effects of feed transmission lines from analysis results 4 Calculates transmission line parameters Ep and Zy Metal Box Walls Port Transmission Line Transmission Line General layout of a circuit to be analyzed with em Upon completion of the de embedding process em outputs de embedded S parameter results transmission line parameters and the calculated port discontinuities An abbreviated summary of the de embedding algorithm used is presented in reference 70 and the complete theory is presented in reference 71 in Appendix II Sonnet References on page 419 120 Chapter 7 De embedding Enabling the De embedding Algorithm NOTE Transmission To demonstrate de embedding with em we will analyze the filter shown below This is an example of a hairpin filter with a passband of approximately 4 0 to 4 15 GHz This circuit consists of eight sections making up the filter metalization two ports and two transmission li
74. opened when you select Analysis gt Output Files from the project editor menu The analysis control needs only one frequency specified If two frequencies are specified two RLGC matrix sets are generated and so on Your project must be an N coupled line with ports 1 through N as input and ports N 1 through 2N as output The input of line M should be port M and its output should be port M N The software does not check for this condition but issues a Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis warning message if the number of ports is not an even number This restriction does not apply to generating PI Models only generating N Coupled Line Model Spice files There is no limit on N An example where N 4 is shown below The results are per unit length where a unit length is the length of the N coupled line The length must be short compared to the wavelength at the frequency of analysis Broadband SPICE Model NOTE The Broadband Spice Extractor feature is only available if you have purchased a Broadband Spice Extractor license from Sonnet Please see your system administrator if you are unsure of the availability of this feature In order to create a Spice model which is valid across a broad band the Sonnet broadband SPICE Extractor feature finds a rational polynomial which fits the S Parameter data This polynomial is used to generate the equivalent lumped element circuits in either PSpice or Spectre format Since the S Param
75. pp 116 120 James C Rautio and Veysel Demir Microstrip Conductor Loss Models for Electromagnetic Analysis IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques Vol 51 No 3 March 2003 pp 915 921 James C Rautio Electromagnetic Analysis Speeds RFID Design Microwaves amp RF Vol 42 No 2 February 2003 pp 55 62 James C Rautio EM Approach Sets New Speed Records Microwaves amp RF Vol 41 No 5 May 2002 pp 81 96 James C Rautio Shawn Carpenter et al CAD EDA virtual panel discussion Microwave Engineering May 2002 pp 15 25 Shawn Carpenter Analysis and Optimization of a Compact CPW Filter Using Planar EM Software MIcrowave Product Digest October 2001 pp 10 14 28 50 James C Rautio Making Practical High Frequency Electromagnetic Simulators Past Present and Future IEICE Transactions on Electronics Vol E84 c No 7 July 2001 pp 855 860 J C Rautio An Investigation of Microstrip Conductor Loss IEEE Microwave Magazine Volume 1 Number 4 December 2000 pp 60 67 Shawn Carpenter Break and Interpolate Technique A Strategy for Fast EM Simulation of Planar Filters Microwave Project Digest October 2000 pp 18 27 56 58 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Appendix II Sonnet References James C Rautio The Impact on Education of Widely Available Commercial 3 D Planar Electromagnetic So
76. project editor Therefore if an EM Structure is translated into Sonnet these values are deleted for the port and the termination definition is used Sonnet does provide port excitation in both the current density viewer and the far field viewer For details see online help for either program Off Grid Placement Microwave Office s resolution between points on the grid is 1 20 of a cell Sonnet uses a much finer resolution therefore 1f you change the position of an off grid polygon the placement may appear slightly different when you bring the EM Structure back into Microwave Office Coordinate System Microwave Office and Sonnet use different coordinate systems The origin 0 0 in Sonnet is the lower left hand corner of the substrate while the origin in Microwave Office is the upper left hand corner of the substrate which Microwave Office refers to as the ground plane 3D Viewer Scaling Microwave Office s 3D viewer has a scale setting for the dielectric layers which allows you to display a dielectric layer larger than it is relative to the other dielectric layers If you open the EM Structure in Sonnet in Native Editor mode there exists no way to specify the 3D viewer scaling Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Meshing Current Density Plots and Far Field Plots When you use Sonnet as your analysis engine you may not view meshing current density plots or far field radiation plots in Microwave Office The Animation menu in
77. provides a considerable reduction in processing time Using the input frequency band em first performs a full analysis of the circuit at the beginning and end frequencies Em continues solving at discrete points storing the full analysis data for each point This process continues until enough internal or cache data is generated to synthesize a fine resolution response 141 Sonnet User s Guide Once the frequency band response is synthesized em outputs approximately 300 data points for the frequency band These data points are a combination of the discrete analysis points and synthesized points This combined data is referred to as adaptive data Em dedicates the bulk of the analysis time for an ABS analysis in calculating the response data at the discrete data points Once the adaptive band synthesis is complete calculating the adaptive data for the entire band uses a relatively small percentage of the processing time ABS Resolution 142 The ABS resolution is the value in frequency units between adaptive data points in your response output from an adaptive sweep Normally the resolution in an adaptive sweep is provided by em such that around 300 data points are output for a frequency band It is possible for you to override this setting and use a coarser or finer resolution for your frequency band Entering a manual value to be used for ABS is done in the Advanced Options dialog box which is opened when you click on the Advanc
78. required subsections and speed up your analysis Conversely if you have an area of your circuit at which you desire greater accu racy using the Divide Edit Divide Polygons command at the point of interest to create two polygons forces the analysis to use smaller subsections in order to model the edge singularities X Min and Y Min with Edge Mesh Off Having the edge mesh option on is the default state for Sonnet projects however examining the case where edge mesh is off first makes understanding the concept easier This part ofthe discussion only applies to Manhattan polygons which is a polygon that has no diagonal edges Turning edge mesh off for non manhattan polygons has no effect On occasion you may wish to change the default subsectioning for a given polygon You can do this using the subsectioning parameters X Min Y Min X Max and Y Max For Manhattan polygons with edge mesh off X Min and Y Min set the size of the edge subsections By default X Min and Y Min are 1 This means the edge subsections are 1 cell wide When X Min is set to 2 the subsections along vertical edges are now 2 cells wide in the X direction see the figure on page 61 This Chapter 4 Subsectioning reduces the number of subsections and reduces the matrix size for a faster analysis However accuracy may also be reduced due to the coarser modeling ofthe current density near the structure edge or a discontinuity 2 Cells Wide X Mi
79. reset this menu open the command line window by selecting Option Command line from the main menu of ADS The command line dialog box appears on your display In the command line text entry box enter the following reload ebridge This will reload the software and reset the menu again Note that this removes any entries in the command window user menu If you wish to load the Ebridge menu along with another user menu enter reload ebridge nc in the command window This will add the ebridge menu selections to any existing selections These procedures can be used in a start up macro as well If many users start up Libra or Touchstone within a project we recommend that a system wide macro be implemented to include the reload ebridge command Change in Agilent Configuration File Another problem that could be preventing the ebridge menu from appearing is the setting in the de cfg file added during the configuration for the Agilent Interface If you are running Sonnet on a PC follow the instructions in Setting up the Agilent Environment page 63 in the Windows Installation Manual substituting USER AEL for SITE AEL If you are running Sonnet on a UNIX workstation follow the instructions in Setting up the Agilent Environment page 62 in the UNIX amp Linux Installation Manual substituting USER AEL for SITE AEL 295 Sonnet User s Guide 296 Error in Processing the Layout The Agilent interface
80. resistors and mutual inductors This information is then formatted and saved in one of two SPICE formats PSpice or Spectre The PI model Spice generation capabilities are intended for any circuit which is small with respect to the wavelength at the highest frequency of excitation Typically 1 20th wavelength is an appropriate limit If a circuit is too large you can often split it into two or more circuits and analyze each separately This limitation is due to the circuit theory limitations of modeling a circuit with just a few lumped elements The Sonnet electromagnetic analysis is not intrinsically limited in this fashion The model generated by the analysis includes any lumped elements including mutual inductors between any ports of the circuit layout Lumped elements from any port to ground are also included The synthesis capability does not allow internal nodes nodes which are not connected to a port in the layout with the single exception of the internal node required to specify a resistor in series with an inductor Any circuit which requires internal nodes for an accurate model should be split into several parts so that the required points become nodes Internal ports without ground reference give incorrect results Any internal ports should be carefully specified and checked for reasonable results Using The PI Model Spice Option The PI Model synthesis needs electromagnetic results for at least two frequencies to accomplish i
81. resulting project One because all layers in the DXF file or in the Layer Mapping dialog box were marked as OFF and the second because there were no polygons in the layers that were marked as ON 273 Sonnet User s Guide In either case it is most likely you can edit the Layer Mapping using the Layer Mapping dialog box and turn the appropriate layer s back ON See section DXF Layer Mapping on page 267 for details on the layer mapping Another possibility is the AutoCad version of your DXF file is not compatible with Sonnet If you are having trouble importing a DXF file into Sonnet try saving your DXF file from your drafting tool as an earlier Autocad version This is usually possible from most tools Capabilities and Limitations of DXF Translation 274 The DXF translator can handle most methods of describing a circuit that is supported by the DXF file format The DXF translator does not handle any parts of the DXF format that is not meaningful to a description of metallization of a substrate such as text dimension lines and 3D structures The DXF translator handles four basic methods of circuit description All of these methods can be used within a single DXF file Closed zero width polylines whose interiors define the metalliza tion areas These polylines are closed by the DXF translator even if they are not marked as closed in the DXF file Arcs inserted into these polylines are supported Closed or open pol
82. shown below Standard box Adding Standard Ports 1 To add a standard port to a circuit click on the Add Port button in the tool box or select Tools gt Add Port from the main menu of the project editor 2 Then click on the polygon edge at the desired position for a port A small box with a number in the center will appear on your circuit indi cating the position of the port Ports are numbered automatically in the order in which they are added to your circuit starting at the number one You may later choose to change a port number see Changing Port Numbering page 103 for details 101 Sonnet User s Guide Special Port Numbering 102 All ports are assigned a number at the time they are created in the project editor There is no limit on the number of ports and the number of ports has absolutely no impact on analysis time By default the ports are numbered by the order in which they are created 1 e first port created is assigned the number 1 second port created 1s assigned the number 2 etc With this default method all ports are positive and unique However there are some applications that require the ports to have duplicate or even negative numbers Ports with Duplicate Numbers All ports with the same number as pictured below are electrically connected together As many physical ports as desired may be given the same numeric label Such ports are sometimes called even m
83. sidewalls T Subsectioning the Circuit The analysis starts by subdividing the circuit metalization into small rectangular subsections In an actual subsectioning see page 23 small subsections are used only where needed Otherwise larger subsections are used since the analysis time is directly related to the number of subsections Triangular subsections which can be larger without sacrificing accuracy can be used to fill in the diagonal staircase at the user s discretion 22 Chapter 1 Introduction Em evaluates the electric field everywhere due to the current in a single subsection Em then repeats the calculation for every subsection in the circuit one at a time In so doing em effectively calculates the coupling between each possible pair of subsections in the circuit Em calculates the tangential electric field on all subsections given current on one subsection This figure shows the actual subsectioning for an example circuit 23 Sonnet User s Guide Zero Voltage Across a Conductor Each subsection generates an electric field everywhere on the surface of the substrate but we know that the total tangential electric field must be zero on the surface of any lossless conductor This is the boundary condition no voltage allowed across a perfect conductor The problem is solved by assuming current on all subsections simultaneously Em adjusts these currents so that the total tangential electric fiel
84. smaller Keep going until the analysis is as long as you can tolerate and then let it run over a full range of frequencies perhaps overnight The main factor in analysis time is the number of subsections Em prints out the number of subsections if the Verbose option is used As you gain experience with em you will get a good feel for what can be tolerated For example on a Sun SPARCstation 1 with 16 Mbytes of memory up to 1700 subsections lossless or 1200 subsections with loss can be calculated in an hour or so At this point the computer runs out of memory and starts swapping to disk resulting in huge increases in time To avoid the frustrations of getting on the slow side of the wall start lossless with big subsections You may find that big subsections provide all the accuracy you need Detailed Parameter Dependencies How do changes in the various input parameters affect the analysis time First keep in mind that em has two stages in the analysis In the first stage em fills a large matrix The matrix has one row column for each subsection This is where em is calculating the coupling between every possible pair of subsections In the second stage em is solving the matrix Here em is performing matrix inversion like functions and is calculating the currents which allow all boundary conditions to be met The different parameters affect each stage of the analysis differently 411 Sonnet User s Guide 412 During analysis
85. subsection a line is to use subsections the same width as the line In Sonnet and in many other analyses this results in a uniform current distribution across the width of the line In reality the current distribution 1s singular at the edges of the line Since the current distribution is symmetrical about the center line using either one or two subsections across the width of the line gives the same amount of error We find that a one or two subsection wide line gives 5 to 6 error If there is not much stray coupling circuit theory can often give a better result When the line is 16 cells wide we see about 196 error much more reasonable We have found and you can verify that convergence is very strong Double the number of cells per line width and the error is cut in half When we vary the number of cells per wavelength along the length ofthe line we see an inverse square relationship Double the number of cells per wavelength along the length of the line and the percent error decreases by a factor of four An equation which expresses the error as a function of subsectioning is 2 Eple 420 w gt 3 N 2 16 TUN N W L where Chapter 26 Accuracy Benchmarking Nyy Number of cells per line width N Number of cells per wavelength along line length Er Total Error DMAC This equation estimates subsectioning error only For example any de embedding errors are added to the above error This error estimate s
86. the items not handled by the DXF translator Entities not handled include POINT TRACE SOLID TEXT SHAPE ATTRIBUTES 3DFACE VIEWPORT and DIMEN SION Tables not handled include APPID DIMSTYLE LTYPE STYLE UCS VIEW and VPORT The only header variables read are SEXTMIN SEXTMAX LIM MIN and LIMMAX All others are ignored In the layer table color line type and frozen and locked flags are ignored The name and on off flags are read The Z coordinate of all objects 1s ignored Only the layer is used to determine the Z position of the metal The color and line styles are always ignored Only the starting width of the first point in polylines are used the ending width and both widths of other points are ignored Polyline curve fit and spline fit are not handled No 3D structures are handled including polygon mesh polyface mesh and smooth surface 275 Sonnet User s Guide Error in Processing the GDSII File 276 You may receive an error message from the GDSII translator stating that the format of the GDSII file is incorrect The error message comes in many different forms An example is ERROR Encountered a record with the wrong data type This record has a data type of NO DATA The data type should be TWO BYTE INT Record type is HEADER Error encountered in record 3 The most common reason for this message 1s that the GDSII file was changed when transferring between computers This typically occu
87. the one on the right uses conformal subsections Note 172 Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh that the rectangular subsectioning uses a much higher number of subsections for the spiral inductor than does the conformal meshing Rectangular subsectioning was used for the feed lines in both cases Spiral inductor with rectangular Spiral inductor with conformal subsections Default subsections If you chose Conformal meshing then the subsectioning controls in the Metalization Properties dialog box Xmin Ymin XMax YMax and Edge Mesh are disabled and ignored Conformal Meshing Rules Since conformal meshing is a new feature in the analysis engine not all conditions which may affect accuracy or processing time are automatically identified in the project editor Below are some basic rules for using conformal meshing you may follow to prevent causing an error in the analysis engine em 173 Sonnet User s Guide 174 Rule 1 Polygon Overlap Polygons should be drawn or moved in your circuit such that there is no overlap between polygons if any one of the polygons is using conformal meshing It is possible for two polygons to overlap and not cause an error condition but the most conservative use would be no overlaps See the illustration below WSS O NNN N N N N The circuit on the left has three overlapping polygons and the polygon on the bottom is using conformal meshing This would cause em to issue an error message and
88. the process of moving EM projects between Microwave Office and Sonnet Program Module sonntawr This Sonnet plug in for the Cadence Virtuoso suite enables the RFIC designer to configure and run the EM analysis from a layout cell extract accurate electrical models and create a schematic symbol for Analog Artist and RFDE simulation Program Module sonntcds A new Broadband Spice extraction module is available that provides high order Spice models In order to create a Spice model which is valid across a broad band the Sonnet broadband SPICE Extractor feature finds a rational polynomial which fits the S Parameter data This polynomial is used to generate the equivalent lumped element circuits which may be used as an input to either PSpice or 19 Sonnet User s Guide Series IV ADS Files Cadence Virtuoso Files 20 Spectre Since the S Parameters are fitted over a wide frequency band the generated models can be used in circuit simulators for AC sweeps and transient simulations DXF Translator GDSII Translator Agilent Interface Microwave Office Interface gt Cadence Virtuoso Interface Translators Response Viewer Sonnet Software Professional Suite Project Editor Circuit Geometry or Netlist projects Plotting Tool Far Field Viewer Far Field Radiation Computation amp Display
89. the via polygon is drawn in your circuit The via consists ofa one cell wide wall of via subsections and is hollow in the middle Via polygons are hollow in the middle since all current moves on the surface of the via and modeling metal which is not used wastes processing resources If you wish to have metal in the center of a via polygon on a metalization level you may add a metal polygon on that level 303 Sonnet User s Guide 304 Examples of via polygons are shown below The shape drawn by the user appears in black The actual via metal is shown by the fill pattern which is the video reverse of the metal pattern Since current travels on the surface of a via the middle of the via is hollow filled with the dielectric material ofthe dielectric layer that the via traverses Tops of Vias ROLLE Rectangle Via Circle Via Polygon Via Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures The example shown below uses an edge via to connect two polygons on adjacent levels The up via symbol indicates that the via connects this level to the next level above The vias on the upper level are shown with a down via symbol which is a down triangle Via symbols were automatically created on the destination level when the via was added to the source level Lower level up triangles Upper level down triangles Via Posts With the metalization turned on default setting by setting View Cell Fi
90. threshold The lower the error threshold you set the more processing time is required to calculate the model The error threshold is the error present between the source data and the fitted curve and is defined as follows N where f the number of the frequency point N the total number of frequency points S f source the value of the S parameter at the frequency point f in the project source response S f Fi the value of the S parameter at the frequency point f in the fit curve data The calculation of the Broadband Spice model stops when this error threshold is reached or when it proves impossible to improve the error We recommend using the default value of 0 596 initially and not setting the threshold below 0 1 Select the Generate Predicted S Parameter data file if it is not already selected This option is selected by default When this option is selected the Predicted S Parameter data upon which the model is based is also output to a file The name of the file appears below the checkbox and may not be changed The file is created in the same directory in which your model file is created Once the creation of the 10 11 Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis model is completed you may use the response viewer to compare your original response data to the Predicted S Parameter data to evaluate the accuracy of the Broadband model Click on the Create button to create the Broadband Spice model A progress window appea
91. time and memory because of their smaller size but you can also analyze these smaller circuits at fewer frequency points Interpolating in the netlist file requires much less processing than calculating data for a frequency point in a geometry project Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision Shown below is an example showing the typical advantages of using this approach Large Circuit 30 minutes frequency X 25 frequencies 750 minutes total Netlist Subdivided Large Circuit Small Circuit Small Circuit Small Circuit 4 mins freq 3 mins freq 4 mins freq X 5 freq X 5 freq X 5 freq 20 minutes 15 minutes 20 minutes Netlist Total Analysis Time 55 minutes 14X faster When the netlist analysis is performed em will interpolate to provide simulation data at frequencies not specified in the subprojects Each subproject should be analyzed at the same minimum and maximum frequency as the overall analysis and at enough points in between to provide for reasonable interpolation of data at frequencies which fall between these values As you can see from the Smith chart below while you need many frequency points to obtain reasonable response data for the whole circuit you need far fewer frequency points to obtain accurate data for the smaller pieces of the whole circuit whose response data does not vary appreciably M Whole A i Q Circuit 203 Sonnet User s Guide Be aware however that in some c
92. to prevent interaction between the boxwalls and the discontinuity The use of feedlines are optional if you choose to add a feedline you may use the suggested length calculated by the software or input your own value By default the software creates feedlines using the suggested length When the subdivide is executed Sonnet creates a geometry subproject for each section of the circuit in which you placed the subdividers It also creates a master netlist that connects the geometry subprojects together to produce an equivalent circuit for the original geometry project that you subdivided Each of the geometry subprojects uses the properties of the original circuit cell size dielectric layers dielectric and metal materials analysis setup etc Therefore all the geometry subprojects contain the same analysis setup with the same analysis frequencies specified Analyzing Your Subdivided Circuit 218 To obtain the desired response data edit the analysis setup for the master netlist so that all of the desired analysis frequencies are specified Each of the geometry subprojects are set up with the coarser resolution of analysis frequencies When the netlist is analyzed em runs the geometry project analyses first to produce response data for each part ofthe network Then the analysis ofthe whole network is executed Em interpolates to produce data for frequency points in between those available from the analysis of the geometry subprojects
93. to the two outer conductors 3 Floating Coplanar Metal exists on the bottom of the substrate but 1t 1s not connected to the two outer conductors Thus the bottom metal is electrically floating at a different potential from the two outer conduc tors 4 Infinite Coplanar The two outer conductors are considered infinitely wide Usually there is no metal on the bottom of the substrate case 71 but any of the above three configurations can have finite or infinite outer conductors 5 Shielded Coplanar Outer conductors are shorted to side wall of a rect angular waveguide Thus all four sides of the waveguide are at the same 381 Sonnet User s Guide 382 ground potential as the coplanar outer conductors Waveguide dimen sions are part of the design Push pull ports can be used to simulate only some types of coplanar waveguide Since the two outer ports have the same port number they are electrically connected together Creating the two 1 ports now redefines port 1 such that the voltage on port 1 is now measured with respect to the two 1 ports Another way to think of this is that the positive terminal of the generator is connected to the center conductor port 1 and the negative terminal is connected to the two 1 ports You may also think of port 1 as your signal and the two 1 ports as your ground If you do not put ports on the two outer conductors the voltage of port 1 is measured with respect to the six sides of t
94. utilizes a preference file that contains information for customizing translation To edit the preference file select Ebridge Edit Preference File from the main menu of ADS The Agilent interface first looks for a file called design name gt prf located in the same project directory as the design If this file does not exist the file sonnet prf is used If neither or these two files is found a default will be copied into the directory and used The default preference file is shown below The preference file format consists of individual command lines statements each consisting of a keyword followed by a space and then space delimited keywords and or data The preference file can be created or modified with any suitable text editor An exclamation point indicates a comment anything appearing after it is ignored Blank lines are also ignored Copyrig default NUM X GRI NUM Y GRI NUM X G NUM Y G LAYER 13 comment EXT O EXT 3 use 377 TOP 377 Preference File for EBRIDGE example directory translation options grid for circuit 1 TOP or BOT set top cover or ground plane loss ht c 2001 Sonnet Software Inc All rights reserved gridding DS 256 DS 256 RIDS 465 RIDS 300 IGNORE out the EXT statement not used ohms square for free space 0 0 286 Default sonnet prf file Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface Translator preferences Translator preferences specify
95. very similar but not identical to the results for auto grounded ports The differences are primarily due to the change in the gap size between polygons at the points where lumped elements are inserted Frequency 200 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 200 000000 0 009217 68 496 0 500482 5 785 0 500482 5 785 0 009217 68 496 Frequency 300 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 300 000000 0 013510 70 114 0 500994 8 683 0 500994 8 683 0 013510 70 114 Frequency 400 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 400 000000 0 017788 69 364 0 501707 11 59 0 501707 11 59 0 017788 69 364 200 Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision Introduction Sonnet provides the capability to take a large circuit and split it into any number of smaller projects then connect the results in a netlist project to produce a response for the whole circuit This method can significantly reduce the required processing time and memory necessary to analyze the circuit while still obtaining an accurate answer The number of subsections in a circuit is one of the most important factors in determining processing time since the matrix solve time is proportional to N To illustrate how circuit subdivision reduces processing time consider two subprojects each with half as many subsections as the source project The total matrix solve time is n
96. which you would use conformal mesh it is more efficient to apply conformal meshing to these Manhattan polygons Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh Boundaries Should Be Vertical or Horizontal For the most efficient results the boundaries between polygons using conformal meshing and rectangular subsectioning should be vertical or horizontal as shown in the first picture below Diagonal boundaries as shown in the second picture make the analysis less efficient Polygon with rectangular subsections Polygon with conformal subsections Vertical Boundary Polygon with rectangular subsections Polygon with conformal subsections Diagonal Boundary Cell Size and Processing Time Care should be taken when choosing your cell size when using conformal mesh Many users especially experienced Sonnet users will estimate processing time based on the amount of memory reguired to analyze a circuit The amount of memory used for conformal mesh can be deceptive Using a smaller cell size in a circuit which uses conformal mesh may not increase the reguired memory but will have a noticeable effect on processing time The significant factor in determining processing time with conformal meshing is the number of metalized cells needed 179 Sonnet User s Guide to construct a conformal section The number of conformal mesh cells displayed as the result of the Estimate Memory command may be more reliably used as a guideline Current Density Viewin
97. 0 000000 0 013072 68 918 0 501160 8 647 0 501160 8 647 0 013072 68 918 Frequency 400 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 400 000000 0 017177 67 763 0 502055 11 54 0 502055 11 54 0 017177 67 763 193 Sonnet User s Guide Inserting Modeled Elements into a Geometry 194 Another very useful feature of the netlist project is the ability to insert modeled elements into a geometry project after an electromagnetic analysis has been performed on that circuit A modeled element is an ideal element such as a resistor inductor capacitor or transmission line which has a closed form solution No electromagnetic analyses are performed on modeled elements To demonstrate the use of modeled elements we will again analyze the T attenuator However instead of the attenuator being the result of connecting the results of electromagnetic analyses as shown previously in the chapter in this case the geometry project att lgeo son has the full attenuator with cutouts where the modeled elements need to be inserted The three resistors will not be analyzed as part of the geometry project but will be inserted as modeled elements in the netlist The figure below shows the circuit layout with the modeled resistor elements A geometry project for the transmission line structures are created first A netlist project will then be used to insert the three resistors and calculate two port S parameters for the overall circuit
98. 0 mils If NUM X GRIDS is set to 400 and NUM Y GRIDS is set to 240 the cell size will be 0 5 by 1 mil Reference planes will be extended to the edge of the original 100 by 140 mil circuit 283 Sonnet User s Guide 284 Special layers for special circuit elements Certain special circuit elements such as TFC MTFC and MRINDSBR require special layer structures to be implemented The Agilent interface determines this layer information by scanning the design for these instances The Agilent interface supports only one layer for each element type capacitor or inductor The Agilent interface sets the level parameters to the values calculated for the first instance of a particular type found in the design Layer structure differences in other elements will be ignored The Agilent interface also only supports these elements on the main top conductor metalization level of a substrate The TFC or MTFC instances add a dielectric layer over the top layer of the substrate according to the parameters of the instance The MRINDSBR instance adds a bridge layer over the capacitor dielectric layer These elements will be translated onto these layers and connected appropriately The Agilent interface also scans for the TFR element This sets the resistivity ohms per square for the TFR layer number 3 The first TFR element found sets the resistivity value for all the rest Special layers can also be implemented for other instances using the CAP LAYER
99. 19 69 443 0 501342 9 787 0 501342 9 787 0 015119 69 443 Using Ungrounded Internal Ports In the example presented above a pair of auto grounded ports was placed at each location in the em circuit layout where a modeled element would eventually be inserted It is also possible to perform the same analysis using ungrounded 197 Sonnet User s Guide 198 internal ports because each resistor in this example is a series modeled element without access to ground Any time access to ground is not required for a modeled element you can replace the pair of auto grounded ports with a single ungrounded internal port The figure below shows a geometry project for the T attenuator with ungrounded internal ports at each modeled element location Note that the gaps between polygons at these locations have been removed This is because you must attach ungrounded internal ports between two abutted polygons This slightly impacts the overall performance of the attenuator MINNI LNN K The geometry project att Igeo2 son uses ungrounded internal ports at locations where modeled elements will eventually be inserted Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis The network file shown below connects the desired resistors across the ungrounded internal ports of the network shown on page 198 Since ungrounded internal ports do not have access to ground only a single node is specified when connecting an element across them WARN
100. 2 Now the impedance values for any port can be changed by typing the desired values in the Resistance Reactance Inductance and Capaci tance fields in the row labeled with the desired port number lt TP Note that the impedance of multiple ports may be changed at the same time through the first method by selecting multiple ports before selecting Modify At tributes and by the second method by modifying all the desired port values while the Port Impedance dialog box is open Defining Reference Planes Calibration Lengths Reference Planes or Calibration Lengths which are mutually exclusive can be set for most types of ports but the method differs according to the port type Reference planes cannot be set for via ports since em cannot de embed them or for ungrounded internal ports since it would be uncertain which box wall was being referenced Detailed below are the methods for standard ports and auto grounded ports Standard Ports For standard ports which normally reside on the box wall the Reference Plane or Calibration Length refers to the distance to the box wall To set the Reference Planes Calibration lengths do the following 107 Sonnet User s Guide 108 1 Select Circuit Ref Planes Cal Lengths from the main menu This will open the Reference Planes Calibration Lengths dialog box Reference Planes Calibration Lengths x Box Wall Status Left Box Wall Reference Plane C Linked Link
101. 405 processing time 179 selecting 52 55 subsectioning 51 62 wavelength 52 changes in circuit 25 circles 274 circuit analyses 183 185 circuit description 274 430 Circuit elements MRINDSBR 284 MTFC 284 TFC 284 circuit properties 216 circuit subdivision 201 219 analysis 218 coarse frequency sweep 217 executing 218 illegal conditions for subdivision lines 215 main netlist 205 placement of subdivision lines 207 213 procedure 206 subdivision line orientation 214 using parameters 206 circuit theory simulators 27 410 circular dependencies 163 CKT 192 closed polygon 274 coarse frequency sweep 217 coaxial structures 351 combined circuit analyses 185 combining data files 183 command line 415 Commands reload ebridge 295 commands 265 conformal mesh 169 181 adjacent polygons 175 adjacent polygons with interior vertex 176 applying 171 cell size 179 current density viewer 180 current striping 180 figure eight polygons 175 Manhattan polygons 177 memory save 176 polygon boundaries 179 polygon overlap 174 processing time 179 rules of use 173 transmission lines 171 using effectively 177 conjugate gradient optimizer 166 consistency 25 convergence test dielectric bricks 333 coordinate system Microwave Office Interface 262 264 spherical 352 coplanar 103 351 coupling 202 208 cross talk 361 current density data 153 Microwave Office Interface 241 saving in Microwave Office Interface 244 current density file 351 curren
102. Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision If properly subdivided the results of the netlist analysis should provide an accurate solution for your difficult to handle circuit using fewer resources The use of circuit subdivision is demonstrated in Chapter 3 Circuit Subdivision Tutorial in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials 219 Sonnet User s Guide 220 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Chapter 14 Microwave Office NOTE Interface Sonnet s Microwave Office Interface MOI provides a completely integrated solver on request interface between AWR s Microwave Office 6 0 or higher and Sonnet software The interface allows you to stay completely in the Microwave Office environment using Sonnet as your EM analysis engine or you may choose to edit your circuits in the Sonnet environment before running the EM analysis Either way your results are easily integrated back into the Microwave Office environment A third option allows you to export and import Sonnet projects to be used as EM Structures in your Microwave Office project The Microwave Office Interface only supports geometry projects It is not possible to translate a netlist project from Sonnet 221 Sonnet User s Guide This manual assumes that you are familiar with the basics of using both Sonnet and Microwave Office If this 1s not true we recommend referring to the appropriate documentation for whichever program you need to learn If you are new to Sonnet we suggest per
103. I translators can also be used to convert a Sonnet project to a DXF or GDSII file but these files are limited to the information contained in the project See the File Export command in the project editor s Help for details Converting your files to Sonnet The DXF or GDSII translator inputs a DXF or GDSII format input file from a circuit layout program and converts it to a Sonnet project The translator is accessed through the project editor When you select File Import DXF or File Import GDSII from the project editor menu the following occurs 1 A Browse window opens which allows you to select the DXF or GDSII file you wish to import 2 Once you select a DXF or GDSII file for import the Import Control dia log box appears which allows you to assign the project to which you wish to import the file 3 If you are importing a GDSII file the Structure dialog box appears which allows you to select the structure in the GDSII file you wish to convert to Sonnet 4 Then the project editor reads in the layers from the DXF or GDSII file and once the layer mapping 1s complete the Import dialog box appears in which you select translation options if any and execute the file import Once the DXF or GDSII file has been imported you normally need to perform some minor adjustments using the project editor For a detailed example of a DXF or GDSII import see Chapter 6 GDSII and DXF Translator Tutorial in the Sonnet Suppleme
104. ING Ungrounded internal ports have one terminal connected to an edge of a polygon and the second terminal connected to an abutted edge of a second polygon Ungrounded internal ports do not have access to ground Therefore only 1 port elements or 1 port networks may be connected across ungrounded internal ports Resistors capacitors and inductors are technically one port elements and therefore may be inserted in place of an ungrounded internal port in a netlist The netlist for this circuit att lumped2 son is shown below Both the geometry project att 1geo2 son and this netlist are available in the Att example provided for this chapter Qee x sea 51 eir PRJ12345att Igeo2 son Hierarchy Sweep RES 3 R Z3 RES 4 R Z4 RES 5 R Z5 DEF2P 1 2 ATTEN Main Network Use buttons or menus to modify netlist Network None Line None An important feature to notice in this netlist is the use of parameters Three parameters Z3 Z4 and Z5 have been defined in the netlist project and their values used for the three resistor modeled elements Parameters are defined in a netlist by selecting Circuit gt Parameters from the main menu then entering the parameter name and nominal value in the Parameters dialog box which appears Z3 and Z4 are equal to 16 77 and Z5 is equal to 67 11 199 Sonnet User s Guide The listing below shows the S parameter results obtained from the analysis with ungrounded internal ports These results are
105. Log for matchnet Data set has 1246 points and 2 ports Model Options C Fit Error threshold 0 5 Error Threshold DE e Output predicted file C Program Files son ata File netNprojectWMnatchnet predict snp x ne Max order target 200 Warning Messages Model Results y S11 Order 203 Error 1 387911 WARNING Error threshold of 0 5 not achieved 12 Order 208 Error 2 984112 WARNING Error threshold of 0 5 not achieved WARNING Poor figure of merit on S12 parameter Visual inspection of predicted 12 recommended 22 Order 214 Error 1 833756 WARNING Error threshold of 0 5 not achieved WARNING Model prediction is not passive at 112 frequency points Error threshold may need to be decreased or input data may be non passive Model Summary for matchnet Maximum error was for S12 Error 2 98411 Total model time 25 minutes 43 seconds Model matchnet finished with no errors 5 warnings W Indicates that a fit was found for all S parameters but for some the error exceeded the error threshold Improving the Accuracy of the Broadband Spice Model If you need to increase the accuracy of your Broadband Spice model there are several strategies you may use e Ifthe Broadband model met your error threshold criteria but is still not acceptable you may decrease the error threshold to increase the accuracy of the model Be aware however that the processing time may be signi
106. Microwave Office is disabled when Sonnet is selected as your analysis engine For details on viewing this data in Sonnet see Response Data on page 248 Troubleshooting Unlocking Microwave Office When you open Sonnet s project editor from Microwave Office Microwave Office is locked until you close the project editor You may not make any changes or execute any commands in Microwave Office until it is unlocked when Sonnet is closed Communication between Sonnet and Microwave Office is done through the Sonnet program sonntawr When Sonnet closes sonntawr signals Microwave Office that it is unlocked If for some reason the Sonnet program is interrupted in such a way as to prevent a graceful shutdown such as a hung program or a program crash then Microwave Office is not unlocked If the project editor xgeom is no longer running but Microwave Office is still locked you may manually unlock it by selecting Admin gt MWOffice Interface gt Unlock MWOffice from the Sonnet task bar main menu To open the Sonnet task bar select Start Programs Sonnet Sonnet from the Windows desktop Start menu Project Editor does not open due to a licensing problem When you open the Native Editor from Microwave Office the project editor attempts to obtain a license before sending Microwave Office the lock message Ifthe project editor is not successful in obtaining a license then the lock message is not sent Microwave Office waits one minute
107. Most circuits require that your cell size be smaller than 1 20 of a wavelength Larger cell sizes usually result in unacceptable errors due to incorrect modeling of the distributed effects across the cell Cell sizes smaller than 4 20 may increase the accuracy slightly but usually increases the total number of subsections which increases the analysis time and memory requirements TIP When possible round off dimensions of your circuit so that they have a larger common multiple Since your circuit geometry is snapped to the nearest cell you must find a cell size such that all of the dimensions of the circuit are a multiple of this cell size For example if your circuit has dimensions of 30 microns 40 microns and 60 microns possible cell sizes are 10 microns 5 microns 2 5 microns 2 microns etc Large cell sizes result in more efficient analyses so choosing 10 microns is probably best TIP Calculate the X cell size and the Y cell size independently The X cell size and Y cell size do not have to be the same number Calculate the X cell size based on just your dimensions in the X direction and your Y cell size based on just your dimensions in the Y direction 53 Sonnet User s Guide 54 For example if you have a spiral inductor with widths of 3 microns and spacings of 8 microns modify the 3 microns to 4 microns You may now use 2 cells instead of 8 speeding up the analysis by several orders of magnitude with little impact on
108. None Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis The picture above shows the network represented by the netlist shown in the project editor below it The nodes are represented by the numbered black dots The geometry project steps son is connected between nodes 1 and 2 with node 1 corresponding to Port 1 in the geometry project and node 2 corresponding to Port 2 A resistor is connected between nodes 2 and 3 A capacitor is connected between node 3 and ground The project steps son is also connected between nodes 3 and 4 with Port 1 corresponding to node 4 and Port 2 corresponding to node 3 Port 1 of the network example net corresponds to node 1 and port 2 of the network corresponds to node 4 A netlist project is simply a list of these elements as you can see in the netlist pictured above Notice that the first number after the name of the element is the network node which corresponds to port 1 of the element the second number is the network node which corresponds to port 2 of the element and so on for all the ports in an element Netlist Project Analyses The sequence of steps for a netlist project analysis may be summarized as follows 1 You input the netlist using the project editor in netlist mode The project editor allows you to create and edit networks network elements project elements modeled elements and data file elements in your netlist You also input the analysis controls which may include defining parameters in the net
109. Plane to Polyqon gt C Fixed Specify Length S 0 0 mils None De embed Port Discontinuity Use fixed cal length 0 0 mils Apply _Cancel Help Select the side from which the reference plane or calibration length is to extend Top Left Right or Bottom in the box wall list Then select the type of reference plane Linked or Fixed from the radio buttons If you wish to define a calibration length click on the None radio button and then click on the Use fixed cal length check box If you select a linked reference plane click on the mouse button then select a point on a polygon in your circuit to which you wish to link the reference plane If you select a fixed reference plane either enter the length in the text entry box or click on the mouse button to set the dis tance in your circuit If you are defining a calibration length enter the desired length in the text entry box To remove a reference plane or calibration length click on the None radio button and do not check the Use fixed cal length The same refer ence plane or calibration length is used on all ports on all levels on that side of the box Chapter 6 Ports Auto ground Ports For autoground ports the reference plane or calibration length is defined as the distance from a particular port To set a reference plane or calibration length for an auto grounded port do the following 1 Click on the port to select it This will enable the Modify
110. Sonnet User s Guide Release 10 Cover James Clerk Maxwell 1831 1879 A professor at Cambridge University England Maxwell established the interdependence of elec tricity and magnetism In his classic treatise of 1873 he published the first unified theory of electricity and magnetism and founded the science of electromagnetism Sonnet User s Guide Printed November 2004 Release 10 Sonnet Software Inc 100 Elwood Davis Road North Syracuse NY 13212 Phone 315 453 3096 Fax 315 451 1694 Technical Support support Osonnetsoftware com Sales Information sales sonnetsoftware com www sonnetsoftware com O Copyright 1989 1991 1993 1995 2005 Sonnet Software Inc All Rights Reserved Registration numbers TX 2 723 907 TX 2 760 739 Copyright Notice Reproduction of this document in whole or in part without the prior express written authorization of Sonnet Software Inc is prohibited Documentation and all authorized copies of documentation must remain solely in the possession of the customer at all times and must remain at the software designated site The customer shall not under any circumstances provide the documentation to any third party without prior written approval from Sonnet Software Inc This publication 1s subject to change at any time and without notice Any suggestions for improvements in this publication or in the software it describes are welcome Trademarks The program names xgeom emstatus em
111. Sonnet Applications 0 0 0 0 0 cece tte tees 26 Em OTIQIMNS IN EUT SPORE SEE AOE ERS SRS 28 Sonnet User s Guide Layout 0 00 0 28 Describing Menu Bar Accesses 0 00 eee eee ences 29 Invoking Sonnet ve pn Gane wag ais Sods WERE 29 UNIX iun RH RARE ig E needs 29 Windowse ss be saatko Pale Mahle das sete wo sto D wa uu 30 2 What s New in Release 10 leere eee 33 Sonnet kiteeksi esu De dh t er ded ttd dor M Io ect 34 New Features 224 400 0608 258 eI YTIMI M t unes 34 Changes 3 225 561 Rohs bee tate AM eh eh eG te 36 3 Important Options and Concepts 220000 39 De embedding the Port Discontinuity sossun 40 Using Multi Frequency Caching 00 0 NN 43 Using Symmetry sa tenth i RA M RSS EAE REL NS 45 Using the Memory Save Option sossun cee ee eee eens 47 Adjusting the Subsectioning 0 0 cece nn 48 Removing Parallel Subsections los onnen 49 Sonnet User s Guide 4 Subsectioning eoo o abr EXE S ETERESER ERE oe SL Tips for Selecting A Good Cell Size eee ee nnen 52 Cell Size Calculators ti hig ill M EE e as 55 Viewing the Subsections 00 0c cece teens 55 Subsectioning and Simulation Error 0 0 00 ee eee 56 Changing the Subsectioning of a Polygon 04 57 Default Subsectioning of a Polygon 0005 57 X Min and Y Min with Edge Mesh Off
112. Sonnet project format and also launch sessions of Sonnet s project editor analysis engine and current density viewer After a translation from ADS a few minor adjustments are usually required using the project editor before you can analyze the circuit with em This chapter describes some advanced features of the project editor and assumes that the user is familiar with the Sonnet software suite as well as Agilent s ADS For instructions on how to install and configure this software refer to the Configuration Procedure for ebridge in the appropriate installation manual Translated files created by the Agilent Interface are compatible with Sonnet version 10 or higher 279 Sonnet User s Guide A tutorial on using the Agilent Interface may be found at Chapter 7 Agilent Interface Tutorial in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials Overview of the Agilent Interface The Agilent interface will load when a Touchstone or Libra project is opened When loaded the interface creates a special menu labeled Ebridge in the command window Any previous menu items in the user menu ofthis window will be removed If you have trouble getting this menu please see Troubleshooting page 294 A process flow diagram of the Agilent interface software is shown below Make changes to rF son file f Layout Schematic Representation Representation Geometry Data Substrate Data Analyz
113. Time Required for Analysis Em is a memory and computation intensive program Small circuits are analyzed quickly while large circuits can require a considerable amount of time In some cases it may be desirable to run the program in the background There is no simple rule for calculating the time required for a particular analysis although there are guidelines presented below which will afford you some measure of control over that time The amount of time required is closely related to the number of subsections which is shown in the analysis monitor during an analysis After a few trials you will have a good idea of whether an analysis is a few seconds a few hours or just totally hopeless by looking at the number of subsections 407 Sonnet User s Guide 408 The most important factor in the execution time required is the amount of memory required by em compared with the amount of memory you have This is also shown in the status in the analysis monitor If em says you need 36 Mbytes and you have 16 Mbytes installed then it is a good idea to kill the run quickly You can reduce the memory required by using the Memory Save option which makes the analysis single precision You can also try to reduce the area of metalization in the circuit Try to eliminate any metal that 1s not carrying current and make connecting lines as short as possible but not too short see Chapters 7 and 8 on de embedding Another approach if your memor
114. UNIX manuals for details on the ps command Chapter 27 Time Required for Analysis To check how much of your system s memory is actually available for your use select Help System Info from the project editor main menu The System Information dialog box appears on your display and contains the information on system memory use 409 Sonnet User s Guide The Wall When using circuit theory analysis an increase in circuit complexity gradually produces an increase in analysis time With an electromagnetic analysis the increase happens suddenly A mere doubling of circuit complexity say by using a smaller subsection size can result in one or even two orders of magnitude longer analysis We call this the Wall see the charts below Circuit Theory Time Complexity Electromagnetics Time Complexity 3 410 Chapter 27 Time Required for Analysis The Wall is frequently encountered when em runs out of real memory as described above and is forced to start swapping out to disk Execution time can quickly go from a few minutes to a few hours Either get more memory or modify the circuit so that there are fewer subsections To avoid the wall start with no loss metal or dielectric and use a large subsection size Perform the first analysis at a single frequency to evaluate how long an analysis takes Then provided you get fast results try adding loss or making the subsection size
115. Validation Example For validation we offer work performed by E Ongareau of Matra Defense Antennas amp Stealthness Dept France as presented at the 1993 EEsof User s Group meeting at HYPER in Paris Reprinted with permission The antenna is a triple patch structure with a top view shown below The antenna is a test realization intended only for validation It is not designed for optimum VSWR Top view of a triple patch antenna courtesy of Matra Defense The central patch is fed with a coaxial probe indicated by a down pointing triangle Each patch is resonant at a different frequency to increase the overall antenna bandwidth Good results are also regularly obtained on single microstrip patch antennas We cite this example as one of the more sophisticated antennas analyzed using the Open Waveguide Simulator technique In this antenna each patch has a slightly different resonant frequency resulting in an increased bandwidth The antenna is fed from below with a coax probe attached to the central patch The feed point is indicated with a triangle The substrate is 3 04 mm thick with a dielectric constant of 2 94 The drawing is to scale with substrate dimensions of 200 mm x 100 mm The top cover is 200 mm above the substrate surface Cell size is 0 78125 mm square A loss tangent of 0 001 is used in both air and substrate The small air loss helps terminate the propagating modes 349 Sonnet User s Guide The antenna pro
116. a Type lPspice M De Embedded v Model Options iv Include Comments iv Include Adaptive Data High Precision Sonnet Data File From emgraph Version 10 02 0 040 alpha From Emgraph Data br32 Data File Written 09 24 2004 11 38 50 lt HDATE 09 02 2004 17 46 48 MDATE 09 02 2004 17 46 48 Spice Data Limits C gt 0 01pF L 100 0nH R lt 1000 00hms K gt 0 01 Analysis frequencies 10 0 15 0 MHz subckt SonData 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 GND 14 4632pf 1 2 1 06465pf 1 9 0 044715pf 1 10 0 037854pf 1 11 0 03433pf 1 12 0 029809pf 1 13 0 022267pf 1 17 0 057935pf n Remember settings Print Close Help Select the desired file format from the Format drop list If you select Spectre as the Format PSpice is the default the contents of the output window is updated Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis To change the parameters for the SPICE data click on the Model Options button The PI Model Options dialog box appears on your display To reduce the number of lumped elements in the model open circuit limits can be specified here as shown below E PI Model Options steps Rmax Cmin Lmax Kmin ohms pF nH n 000 0 0 01 n 00 0 0 01 0 0 Separation 10 0 96 Remember settings Factory Defaults Cancel Help The values are defined as follows RMAX Maximum allowed resistance ohms The default value is 1000 0 ohms CMIN Minimu
117. a detailed discussion of these parameters see the loss model discussions in Dielectric Layer Parameters page 91 Enter the desired name for the dielectric material in the Name text entry box This optional name appears in the Dielectric Layers dialog box and is used to identify the dielectric material used in the layer in your circuit Enter the desired thickness for the dielectric layer in the Thickness text entry box This value may also be edited in the Dielectric Layers dialog box Click on the OK button to close the Dielectric Editor and add the new dielectric layer The new layer appears in the Dielectric Layers dialog box Click on the OK button in the Dielectric Layers dialog box to close it and apply the changes This completes entering a new dielectric layer Dielectric Libraries NOTE The dielectric libraries contain standard definitions of dielectric materials which may be used for your dielectric layers There are two types of dielectric libraries available in Sonnet global and local There is no real difference between the two libraries The names refer to the way in which they are used The Dielectric Libraries materials may not be used for dielectric bricks but only for dielectric layers The global library would usually be used as a group wide library of standard dielectrics for a group of designers There is a default global library supplied by Sonnet which contains definitions for dielectric materials T
118. a via port on a via polygon Lower level Upper level A via port on an edge via with both levels shown Lower level Upper level A via port on a via polygon with both levels TIP If you want to have a port from a polygon to ground consider using an auto grounded port For details about autogrounded ports see Automatic Grounded Ports page 112 313 Sonnet User s Guide Simple Via Example A simple via is stored in the example Via and is shown in the figure on page 314 For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button Note that the top end of the via shown below is a pad which is larger than the via itself There are no restrictions on the polygons at the top of a via Em s subsectioning algorithm handles the subsectioning accurately A simple via to ground On the left as it would appear in the project editor On the right a view in perspective A Conical Via 314 One may simulate a conical ground via with a staircase approximation Simply divide say a 100 uM GaAs substrate into four 25 uM substrates Then put vias at appropriate places to form a step approximation to the conical via sides For an example see Cvia in the Sonnet examples This circuit is a conical via to ground placed in the center of a through line the purpose being to measure the via inductance For directi
119. alysis The initial value of the parameter is the length that appears in your circuit This is the nominal value of the parameter If you change the nominal value then the circuit is redrawn with that length Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project There are two types of parameters anchored and symmetric An anchored parameter allows you to fix one end of a parameter then vary its length extending from that point A symmetric parameter allows you to fix the center point of a parameter and vary the distance it extends on each side The two parameter types are described in detail in the following sections So eae Nominal Value 120 mils Symmetric MM m g Nominal Value 40 mils Nominal Value 80 mils Anchored Parameters An anchored parameter is one which extends from a fixed point the anchor to a adjustable point set It is comprised of three things the anchor the reference point and the adjustable point set When defining your parameter you perform the following steps e You select the anchor first This is the fixed starting point for the parameter e You select the reference point The reference is the first point in the 157 Sonnet User s Guide 158 adjustable point set The distance from the anchor point to the reference point is the value of the parameter When the value of the parameter is changed the anchor retains the same position but the reference point mo
120. ame text entry box at the top of the dialog box This will identify the EM Structure in the Microwave Office project 227 Sonnet User s Guide The new EM Structure Click on the Create button to create the new EM Structure and close the dialog box The new structure will appear in the project browser and a blank substrate appears in the Microwave office window as shown below The new structure in this example is Demo Filter T lowpass emp Microwave Office File Edit View Draw Structure Project Simulate Help Dc Design Notes Project Options i1 Global Definitions D Data Files Circuit Schematics Annotations 3 Stage Low Pas Low Pass Fill S E EM Structures G2 Materials S Perfect Com CE Si pene titer O Enclosure D Information a Low Pass Filter B Enclosure Information Ee Output Equations gt lae Layer2 Layers fo S E Graph 1 Layer 1 Layer 2 f Layer 3 All Sources l g n n 5 p Proj Elem Layout Options Animate Tools Window LAH eae FE a BITES 88 Demo Filter Selecting Sonnet for an Existing EM Structure 228 To select Sonnet as the EM Simulator for an existing EM Structure in your Microwave Office project do the following Open your Microwave Office Project in Microwave Office The Microwave Office window with the project browser window on the left hand side appears on your display Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Right
121. ameters If you wish to add parameters to your netlist in order to perform parameter sweeps or optimizations you do so by selecting Circuit gt Parameters from the project editor main menu The Parameters dialog box appears which allows you to enter a parameter name and nominal value for each parameter you wish to create Once a parameter exists in your netlist project the parameter may be entered as the value of a parameter of a netlist element If you add parameters to a subproject in a netlist the parameters are not automat ically displayed in the netlist You must save the main netlist and re open it to dis play the parameters and make them available for editing 188 Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis Netlist Example Files All of the example files used in this chapter are available in the Att example in the Sonnet examples You should copy the entire folder into your working directory if you wish to execute the examples For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button Cascading S Y and Z Parameter Data Files A particularly useful feature provided by a netlist project is the ability to cascade multiple S Y and Z parameter data files There are no restrictions on the file formats which may be cascaded For example you can cascade em Z parameter data in Touchstone format with measured S parameter data in Super Compact forma
122. analysis of 3 D planar circuits in a completely enclosing shielding rectangular box the analysis of radiating structures is not an application which immediately comes to mind However em can be used to simulate infinite arrays using a waveguide simulator In this technique as shown in on page 345 a portion of the array is placed within a waveguide The waveguide tube is vertical connecting the radiating patches to the termination which is a matched load The images formed by the waveguide walls properly model the entire infinite array scanned to a specific angle The waveguide simulator inspired what we now call the Open Waveguide Simulator Technique described in the next section Modeling Infinite Arrays 344 The sidewalls ofthe shielding box in the em analysis easily represent the sidewalls of the waveguide in the infinite array waveguide simulator A side view is shown in the figure on page 345 Providing a termination for the end of the waveguide requires a little more thought Any waveguide mode can be perfectly terminated by making the top cover resistivity in em equal to the waveguide mode impedance This can be done in the project editor automatically at all frequencies and all modes by selecting WGLOAD from the metals in the Top Metal drop list in the Box Settings dialog box Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation Waveguide Walls NNN NN NN Waveguide Termination K Array Patches co Substrate
123. and auto grounded ports If you do not specify a reference plane for a particular port in the project editor em will assume a zero length reference plane for that port This means that de embedding will remove the discontinuity associated with that particular port but will not shift the reference plane for it As discussed in the next section em may generate bad de embedded results 1f you attempt to remove a very short but greater than zero reference plane However If you de embed without a reference plane em will not attempt to remove any length of transmission line at all As a result de embedding without a reference Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines plane does not lead to any error Therefore we recommend that you de embed without reference planes rather than specify very short non zero reference plane lengths Reference Plane Length Minimums Ifthe reference plane or calibration standard is very short relative to the substrate thickness or the width of the transmission line em may generate poor de embedded results This is due to one or both of the following reasons which are illustrated below Fringing fields from DUT interact with fringing fields from port First calibration standard is too short Port 1 interacts with port 2 Box Wall 4 4 amp Metal Box Poor de embedding results may be obtained when very short but non zero reference plane lengths are used e The port is too cl
124. ase 10 will periodically be updated with new material To access this help go to www sonnetsoftware com support and click on the Knowledge Base link for the most recent updates 33 Sonnet User s Guide Sonnet Lite If you are looking for what s new and changed in the Sonnet Lite release please refer to the What s New topic in online help in either the Sonnet task bar or the project editor For what s new in the full release see the sections below New Features NOTE 34 Below is a summation of the major new features in release 10 of Sonnet See below for more details For changes from release 9 refer to Changes page 36 Cadence Virtuoso Interface A completely new Sonnet plug in for the Cadence Virtuoso suite enables the RFIC designer to configure and run the EM analysis from a layout cell extract accurate electrical models and create a schematic symbol for Analog Artist and RFDE simulation For more information please refer to the Cadence Virtuoso Interface document included in PDF format in the Manuals interface You may access the Manuals interface by clicking on the Manuals button on the Sonnet task bar This is an optional feature for the Sonnet Professional Suite which must be purchased separately Available for SuSE Linux Platforms This release is available for the Linux operating system SuSE Professional 9 0 It does not support the SuSE Enterprise Server or its client SuSE Desktop 8 0 For installa
125. ases you may need the added precision of analyzing all the pieces at the same resolution ofthe frequency band Interpolation is best used when the response of a subproject varies little over the frequency band and the analysis time of the subproject is appreciable Circuit Subdivision in Sonnet Circuit subdivision in Sonnet allows you to insert subdivision lines in your geometry in the project editor These subdivision lines create the sections from which the subdivide command makes geometry subprojects When you select the 204 Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision subdivide command the software creates a main netlist file and the geometry subprojects The main netlist connects the subprojects so that the response data for the netlist may be substituted for the response data of the source project si s2 s3 1 ss Source Circuit with Subdivision Lines Added 2 N IK SISSON FI NNNNNNNNNNNN H m Rm BRST si s2 s3 Generated Subprojects T simple subdivide net son PRJ 1 3 4 simple subdivide net s1 son Hierarchy Sweep PRJ5634 simple subdivide net s2 son Hierarchy Sweep PRJ256 simple subdivide net s3 son Hierarchy Sweep DEF2P 12 simple subdivide net Main Network Use buttons or menus to modify netlist Network simple subdivide net Line 22 Generated Main Netlist You should also be aware that if your main circuit contains any parameters or dimensions they are removed during the subdivision process After t
126. ata But what if your package is well defined physically and you can t simply take the cover off In this situation Sonnet can be an invaluable tool It allows the user to make changes to the structure and evaluate the impact on box resonances As noted earlier the Box Resonance Estimator is a great tool to judge almost in real time the effect of the package size From this the user can gain an understanding of which dimension controls any one resonance type TE or TM and may provide some insight as to the solution Some of the techniques used to mitigate box resonances include Adding grounded metal geometries to your structure In many cases ground vias or groundplanes will help prevent box resonance modes from forming In simple terms they have the effect of dividing the structure into smaller compartments thus pushing the box resonances higher in frequency The use of a via fence or CPW type transmission line can help channelize the circuit preventing unwanted coupling between traces and reducing unwanted box resonance effects All of these features can be included in the Sonnet model Adding an absorptive material to the model Another approach which is normally used once all other package design features have been optimized is to add an absorbing material in the housing cavity The material is normally iron or carbon loaded so it can provide a fairly high magnetic or electric loss tangent It comes in various forms suc
127. ating the direction of the via The center of the via does not contain metalization but is filled with the dielectric of the dielectric layer The ground level is completely metallized the outline of the via polygon is drawn on ground level simply as a reference with up arrows indicating that there is a via polygon in the level above Ground Level Metalization Via Post ER Level 0 The lower part of the figure depicts a via going from the single metalization level to ground The same via is shown in the top of the figure as it appears in the project editor The rectangular via is subsectioned into via posts which are rectangular cylinders of current extending between level 0 and the ground plane A via post has a horizontal cross sectional area equal to one cell and a height equal to the thickness of the dielectric layer The via polygon is made up of a single cell wide fence which forms the border of the polygon The center of the via polygon does not contain metal it is filled with the dielectric material used in the dielectric layer If you change the cell size then the via is resubsectioned into via posts with the new cell size 307 Sonnet User s Guide If the via to ground is added when there are multiple intervening metal levels between the present level and ground the via polygon can be seen on each level The intervening levels have via arrows pointing in both directions to indicate
128. ation and Dielectric Loss This chapter is composed of two parts metalization loss and dielectric layer loss For information on dielectric brick loss see Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks on page 331 Both the theoretical aspect of how Sonnet models loss and the practical how to s of assigning loss in your circuit are covered including the use of metal and dielectric material libraries The discussion of metalization loss begins below For the discussion of dielectric loss see Dielectric Layer Parameters on page 91 There is also a paper available by the president and founder of Sonnet Software Dr James Rautio which contains a detailed discussion of metal losses You may find this paper at www sonnetsoftware com support publications asp 73 Sonnet User s Guide Metalization Loss 74 Metalization loss is specified in the project editor in the Metal Types dialog box which is opened by selecting Circuit gt Metal Types Losses may be assigned to circuit metal top cover and ground plane Sidewalls are always assumed to be perfect conductors A common misconception is that only one type of metalization is allowed on any given level In fact different metalizations 1 e different losses can be mixed together on any and all levels For example it is possible to have a thin film resistor next to a gold trace on the same level Sonnet allows you to use pre defined metals such as gold and copper using the global library The
129. ative terminals on the left or bottom side of the port depending on how the port is oriented Ungrounded internal ports can be de embedded by em however you may not set a reference plane or calibration length a In part a of the figure the ungrounded internal port is attached between two polygons which have equal widths This is not a necessary condition for ungrounded internal ports These ports can also be attached between polygons which are abutted but have unequal widths as shown in part b The only difference between the two conditions is that de embedding requires the use of more standards and therefore more time when the polygons have unequal widths Ports on the edge of a single polygon are not allowed extreme care should be taken in interpreting the results since the port has no access to ground You add an ungrounded internal port in the same manner that you add a standard box wall port for details see page 101 Chapter 6 Ports Via Ports A via port has one terminal connected to a polygon on a given circuit level and the other terminal connected to a second polygon on a circuit level above the first polygon For more details on vias Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures Thus when ports are desired on the interior ofa circuit capture a via between two layers and add a port to the via polygon or edge via An example of this port type on an edge via is shown below Upper Polygon
130. ave Office Interface 221 264 analysis frequencies 237 coordinate system 264 coordinate system translation 262 current density data 241 current density viewer 241 editing in MWOffice 230 executing the analysis 247 fill type 232 grid placement 262 install 222 licensing 223 metal type 258 new EM structure 226 overview 223 port mapping 260 response data 248 saving current density data 244 selecting Sonnet s EM Simulator 226 Sonnet features not available 256 Sonnet options property pages 239 subsectioning 236 system requirements 222 435 Sonnet User s Guide translation issues 255 uninstall 223 viewing the subsectioning 245 minima 168 minimum response 149 modeled elements 184 adding 187 inserting 194 inserting in a geometry 194 modeling assumptions 351 modes higher order 139 TEM 139 modify attributes ports 106 109 115 MSUB 282 multi frequency caching 39 43 45 multi sweep plus Stop Restart caching 145 N native editor in Microwave Office 249 netlist adding data file elements 187 adding network elements 187 adding networks 186 creating 186 including response data 187 invoking an analysis of a subproject 191 modeled elements 187 parameters 188 project elements 188 netlist editor 183 netlist project 24 183 analysis 185 network elements adding 187 networks 184 436 adding 186 new features 33 nl error code 134 nominal value 156 157 fixed 163 non Manhattan polygons 177 NOPORT 288 normalization
131. ave Office project Viewing the Subsectioning It is possible to view the subsectioning or meshing used by Sonnet when analyzing your circuit before you run a complete analysis To do so perform the following 1 Right click on the desired EM Structure and select Options from the pop up menu which appears The Options property pages appear on your display 245 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Click on the Sonnet Options tab in the property pages This displays the Sonnet options as pictured below Options General Frequencies Layout Drawing Mesh Sonnet Options SONNET ew Subsections Current Density Compute Current Density Em View Subsections button Adaptive Sweep Settings O Ful Band O Select Band Start 5 Stop 35 GHz Sonnet Task Bar 3 Click on the View Subsections button This launches Sonnet s subsection viewer which functions in a manner very similar to the current density viewer The subsectioning for a circuit is pictured below Note that the red indicates metalization and the black outlines are the subsections Color has been changed in diagram for clarity 246 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Executing the Analysis When you select Simulate Analyze from the main menu of the Microwave Office window the Sonnet will be launched to analyze the EM Structure A progress window detailing the Sonnet analysis appears on your display Simulating Low Pa
132. ay 311 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Select the desired metal type from the Via Metal drop list Via Properties multi layer son r Via Levels Via Metal From Level o E Lossless Lossless Via Metal C Up Cooper drop list Aluminum E Level Down s To Level 3 v Cancel Help Via Ports Vias may also be ports This is a special case of the internal port described in Ungrounded Internal Ports page 110 The port is inserted between two levels You are only allowed to add one port to a via polygon or edge via The port is always added on the bottom level of the via and only appears on the bottom level of the via If you observe the via on another level of your circuit the port does not appear Therefore if you add a port to a via polygon on a level which is not the bottom of the via polygon it will seem as if your action had no result You must go to the bottom of the via to see the added port drawn in the project editor A via port is useful since it can use metal on one level as ground and metal on a higher level as the source 312 Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures An example of a via port on a edge via is shown below The example Dual patch included with your example files has an example ofusing a via port For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button Also shown at the bottom is
133. ayers will be added above this layer thickness Thickness in length units Epsilon R Optional dielectric constant If not specified Er 1 Mu R Optional relative permeability If not specified Mu R 1 Tand Optional dielectric loss tangent If not specified Tand 0 Tandm Optional magnetic loss tangent If not specified Tanm 0 SIZE X CELL SIZE Y CELL Syntax SIZE X CELL value SIZE Y CELL value This statement defines a default cell size for the translation by defining the cell size as a number of length units The SIZE X CELL statement defines the length of the cell in the x direction and the SIZE Y CELL statement defines the length of the cell in the Y direction If these statements are present they will override the NUM X GRID or NUM Y GRID statements PORT FILTER Syntax PORT FILTER lt list gt This statement controls which port instances get recognized as ports by the translation procedure If this statement is present only the port instance names listed after the keyword will be translated If not present all instances will be translated list Any combination of the following keywords PORT EMPORT ORPHAN NPPORT ORPHAN indicates orphaned nodes nodes that are connected to only one pin Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface The following statements may be added to your preference file to add custom layers When one or more of the statements exists the appropriate layer s is added to the project An
134. be taken with reference planes when parameterizing your circuit If a reference plane is linked to a point on your circuit and that point is selected as part of an adjustable point set the reference plane changes length in response to changes in the parameter length 163 Sonnet User s Guide Parameter Sweep 164 Once you have parameterized your circuit you may use the parameters to perform a parameter sweep A parameter sweep allows you to run through a set of analyses with different parameter values all in one step This allows you to see how changes in your circuit affect the response of your circuit Setting up a parameter sweep consists of three parts specifying analysis frequencies choosing which parameters to vary and specifying data ranges for the chosen parameters The analysis frequencies for a parameter sweep are defined as a linear sweep consisting of a starting frequency an ending frequency and the interval between analysis frequencies This frequency set is used for each parameter value You may select one or multiple parameters when running a parameter sweep For each parameter that you select you must specify a starting value an ending value and the interval between parameter values You set up the parameter sweep in the Analysis Setup dialog box in the project editor To access this dialog box select Analysis gt Setup from the main menu of the project editor For details on using this dialog box please refer t
135. be valid for the second analysis your Advanced Subsectioning controls must be set such that the 147 Sonnet User s Guide 148 subsectioning frequency is the same for both runs If the subsectioning frequency remains the same the second analysis will not require any re analysis and the results should be provided very quickly Frequency band of 1st ABS analysis 10 GHz 30 GHz 15 GHz Frequency band of 2nd ABS analysis 25 GHz Extending the Band You are running an ABS analysis which overlaps a previous ABS analysis of the project pictured in the diagram below The caching data for the overlap between the two analyses will be reused although some calculation may need to be done in the extension of the frequency band where it does not overlap with a previous analysis In order for the caching data to be valid for the second analysis your Advanced Subsectioning controls must be set such that the subsectioning frequency is the same for both runs Frequency band of 1st ABS analysis lt a 30 50 GHz e Overlap 40 60 GHz Frequency band of 2nd ABS analysis Accuracy Assurance If you wish to check a particular data point in an ABS analysis and wish to ensure that a full calculation is done at a particular frequency point you should select a Linear Sweep This analysis will calculate caching data 1f Multi sweep is selected for ABS caching data but will not use the caching data in producin
136. before timing out on waiting for the lock message and is unresponsive during this time 263 Sonnet User s Guide Coordinate System Microwave Office and Sonnet use different coordinate systems The origin 0 0 in Sonnet is the lower left hand corner of the substrate while the origin in Microwave Office is the upper left hand corner of the substrate which Microwave Office refers to as the ground plane This fact is important to remember if you receive error messages which specify a grid position Error messages from Sonnet are based on Sonnet coordinates and may need to be converted to Microwave Office coordinates to effectively diagnose the source of the error 264 Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII NOTE Translators The DXF and GDSII translators allow you to convert a DXF or GDSII file respectively to a Sonnet project compatible file Once you have converted your DXF or GDSII file to a Sonnet project you then need to tweak it using the project editor before you can analyze the circuit with em This chapter discusses some advanced features of the project editor and assumes that the user is very familiar with the project editor The DXF and or GDSII translator is only available if you have purchased a DXF and or GDSII translator license from Sonnet Please See your system administrator if you are unsure of the availability of these programs 265 Sonnet User s Guide The DXF and GDSI
137. box Analysis gt Setup in Sonnet s project editor is MWOffice Full Band ABS Select Band Select this radio button when you wish to perform an ABS sweep over a different frequency band that the one required by Microwave Office This may be part of the full band overlap the full band or be an entirely different band This radio button is only enabled when the Use Adaptive Band Synthesis checkbox is selected When this checkbox is selected then the Analysis Control in the Analysis Setup dialog box Analysis Setup in Sonnet s project editor is Adaptive Sweep ABS and the frequency band is the one entered in this dialog box Note that 1f Microwave Office has requested frequencies out of this select band for which data does not already exist em will have to run a full analysis at each requested data point which lies outside the select band This may significantly increase processing time in the EM simulation Start Enter the lowest frequency of the desired frequency band here These dialog boxes are only enabled when a Select Band Adaptive Band Synthesis is selected If a Full Band synthesis is selected the lowest frequency requested from Microwave Office appears here but may not be changed The units being used appear to the right Stop Enter the highest frequency of the desired frequency band here These dialog boxes are only enabled when a Select Band Adaptive Band Synthesis is selected If a Full Band synthesis is selected the high
138. bsection count is to reduce the amount of metal to be analyzed Any metal which is unlikely to carry significant current should be removed Distant ground plane regions in coplanar waveguide for example Also long unneeded lengths of connecting transmission line provide no additional information in an analysis and should be removed A second way to reduce subsection count is to simply use a larger cell size It can be surprising how little a larger cell size changes results on many circuits Sonnet provides a Cell Size calculator in the project editor which calculates the optimal cell size based on the critical dimensions of your circuit which you specify The Cell Size Calculator is accessed in the Box Settings dialog box which is opened when you select Circuit Box from the project editor main menu Chapter 3 Important Options and Concepts Be careful not to reject viable options because of the dimensions being used For example if you want to analyze a line 7 0 microns wide the obvious potential cell dimensions are 1 micron for a seven cell wide line and 7 microns for a one cell wide line There are other options also For example the cell size can be specified to be 7 3 2 33333 microns resulting in a three cell wide line Next use your engineering judgement in determining the dimensions of a structure If a 7 1 micron wide line is called for and you use a 7 micron cell size the residual error introduced by making the line 7
139. by selecting Analysis gt Advanced Subsectioning from the main menu of the project editor TIP The most efficient way to obtain response data for your circuit is to run a single ABS sweep over the entire desired freguency band The analysis engine em uses the subsectioning freguency to calculate the wavelength which is used in setting the Maximum subsection size The default setting used to determine the subsectioning freguency is to use the highest freguency from the present analysis job If you perform multiple sweeps over different freguency bands then the cache data from one run will be invalid for the next since the subsectioning freguency would be different In order to avoid this you should select the Previous Analysis Only option which will use the highest freguency from all previous analysis jobs run on the project In this case you should analyze the freguency band with the highest upper limit first and take care Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS to ensure that the subsectioning frequency being used provides accurate subsectioning for your circuit For details on subsectioning see Chapter 4 Subsectioning Another way to keep the subsectioning freguency consistent is to select the Use Fixed Freguency option for the subsectioning freguency and enter the desired freguency This ensures that all analysis runs on the project will use the same subsectioning freguency Again care should be taken that the subsectioning fr
140. cation 1s sent back to Microwave Office to be stored as part of the Microwave Office project If an analysis has been run the results are also stored along with the Sonnet project 249 Sonnet User s Guide NOTE NOTE 250 If you wish to store current density data from a Sonnet analysis as part of your project you must select the Currents checkbox in the General tab in the Options dialog box in Microwave Office See Saving the Current Density Data page 244 To choose the Native Editor option and edit the EM Structure in Sonnet s project editor right click on the EM Structure and select Open in Native Editor from the pop up menu which appears on your display This launches a session of Sonnet s graphical editor Once the EM Structure is opened in Sonnet the Microwave Office project is locked until the Sonnet project editor is closed If a crash or other unexpected interruption happens to the project editor the program may terminate without unlocking MWOffice In those cases it may be necessary to manually unlock MWOffice which will appear to be hung For instructions on unlocking MWOffice see Unlocking Microwave Office page 263 WARNING When you close the Sonnet project editor after making changes to your EM Structure if you are asked if you wish to make Sonnet your default editor answer Yes to this question Doing so ensures that any changes you make while in the Sonnet project editor are not lost
141. ch is opened by selecting Circuit gt Box The analysis solves for the current on each subsection Since multiple cells are combined together into a single subsection the number of subsections is usually considerably smaller than the number of cells This is important because the analysis solves an N x N matrix where N is the number of subsections A small reduction in the value of N results in a large reduction in analysis time and memory Care must be taken in combining the cells into subsections so that accuracy 1s not sacrificed Em automatically places small subsections in critical areas where current density is changing rapidly but allows larger subsections in less critical areas where current density is smooth or changing slowly 51 Sonnet User s Guide However in some cases you may wish to modify the automatic algorithm because you want a faster less accurate solution or a slower more accurate solution than is provided by the automatic algorithm Also in some cases you may have knowledge about your circuit that the software does not For example you may know that there is very little current on a certain area of your metal Or you may have chosen a small cell size because you have a small dimension in your circuit but do not need the accuracy of a small cell size in larger structures within your circuit In these cases you can change the method by which em combines cells into subsections This chapter explains how em combine
142. choice as to where you will edit the EM Structure in Microwave Office or in what Microwave Office refers to as the Native Editor which in this case is Sonnet s project editor This next section discusses editing your structure in the Native Editor Sonnet s project editor WARNING If you choose to change the editor from Native Editor to Microwave Office Editor any Sonnet specific changes in your geometry will be permanently deleted If you once again choose Native Editor you will have to re enter those geometry changes You edit your EM Structure in Sonnet s project editor when you wish to take advantage of features unique to Sonnet such as thick metal dielectric bricks or autogrounded ports For a complete list of features available only in Sonnet see Translation Issues on page 255 Editing your EM Structure in Sonnet s project editor requires that you are already conversant with Sonnet software or you will have to use Sonnet documentation to gain familiarity with the Sonnet environment When you choose to use the Native Editor Sonnet s project editor the Sonnet project which contains the circuit specification is stored as part of the Microwave Office project file emp When you open the EM Structure in the project editor or when you request an analysis the geometry specification for the EM Structure Is passed to Sonnet When you have completed making changes to the circuit saved the changes and exited Sonnet the circuit specifi
143. chored Parameters 0 0 0 0 0000 cece eee eens 157 Table of Contents Symmetrical Parameters 0 cee eee eese 159 Dependent Parameters 00 00 c eee eee eee eee 161 Circular Dependencies 0000 eee eee ee 163 Reference Planes gt 3 1e yds etic edt ad es 163 Parameter Sweep ccu e re eee eee RS CERE Ye 164 Optimizations 33 no vac Saltire whee Pee ee Lebo UPS es 166 1 Conformal Mesh uu seos nn nnn ng gn n ens 169 Introduction 5 2 eru D n Reb RR OE a 169 Use Conformal Meshing for Transmission Lines Not Patches 171 Applying Conformal Meshing sssusa nnen 171 Conformal Meshing Rules n on sossun 000 cece eee eens 173 Memory Save Option 0000 cece eee 176 Using Conformal Meshing Effectively 0 04 177 Use Conformal Meshing for Non Manhattan Polygons 177 Boundaries Should Be Vertical or Horizontal 179 Cell Size and Processing Time osuneen 179 Current Density Viewing esee re 180 12 Netlist Project Analysis ccc eee cece cece ees 183 Networks siin isiin obs ee tongue t Mm led peewee Pek 184 Netlist Project Analyses 2 0 0 cece eee ees 185 Creating a Netlist desiere ia een eh a ee ae es 186 Adding Networks recet rme ote e cece eee 186 Adding Network Elements 0 00 eee eee eee 187 Adding Modeled Elements 0 0000 e ee eee 187 Adding Data File Elements
144. click on the desired EM Structure in the project browser and select Set Simulator from the pop up menu which appears The Select a Simulator dialog box appears on your display T lowpass emp Microwave Office File Edit View Draw Structure Project Simulate Options Animate Tools Window Help oem Design Notes Project Options i1 Global Definitions D Data Files Circuit Schematics Annotations 5 3 Stage Low Pas a Low Pass Fill ei EM Structures a amp Materials Sa Perfect Com Demo Filter B Enclosure D Information M gt Layer 3 N Endo Options 3 Infor pet Output Equati a Graphs Open in Native Editor 38 69 Graph 1 Delete EM Structure allsa Rename EM Structure feet Export EM Structure EL M Toggle Enable Proj N Elem J Layout Force ReSimulation Collapse All Expand All 229 Sonnet User s Guide 3 Select the Sonnet 3D Planar Electromagnetic Simulator checkbox Select a Simulator Available Simulators Im AWA EMSight Simulator In Process C OEA NETAN Sonnet 3D Planar Electromagnetic Simulator Description S Allows for electromagnetic simulation of 2 5D structures 4 Click on the OK button to apply the changes and close the dialog box This completes selecting Sonnet as the EM Simulator Editing in Microwave Office When you select Sonnet as your anal
145. command line thereby overriding the settings in the project file ParamFile filename where filename is the name of a file which contains the value s which you wish to use for parameter s in the circuit being analyzed These values override the value contained in the geometry project for the analysis but do not change the contents of the geometry project The syntax for the parameter file is lt parname gt fnum where lt parname gt is the name of the parameter and fnum is a floating point number which defines the value of the parameter for the analysis lt project name gt is the name of the project which you wish to analyze If there is no extension then the extension son is assumed This field is required external frequency file is the name of an optional external frequency control file whose extension is eff This extension must be included when specifying the control file You may create an external frequency control file in the project editor For details see Frequency Sweep Combinations in online help in the project editor The frequencies in this file override the frequencies in the project For example if you wish to analyze the project steps son in a batch file using the v option the command line would be em v steps son An example of a batch file which runs multiple analyses is shown below em v steps son em v filter son filter eff em v airbridge son filter eff em v airbridg
146. cture in Microwave Office when the Native Editor is selected you may not make changes to the structure the circuit is opened in Read Only mode 251 Sonnet User s Guide You may analyze the circuit in Sonnet before returning to Microwave Office or the analysis can be run from Microwave Office But be aware if you run the analysis from Sonnet then you must still analyze in Microwave Office The analysis of the EM Structure will be very fast since the results are already available but the analyze command in Microwave Office will trigger the delivery of the desired response data from Sonnet lt TP If your Microwave Office project has multiple EM Structures it is easier to exe cute the simulations in Microwave Office to avoid executing multiple analyze commands in Sonnet and still having to analyze the complete circuit in Microwave Office You should also be aware of translation issues in going from the Microwave Office software to Sonnet software and vice versa These translation issues are discussed in Translation Issues page 255 Working Outside Microwave Office When you edit your circuit by using the Sonnet Native Editor from Microwave Office then Microwave Office is locked while Sonnet s project editor is open This does not present a problem for relatively small EM Structures which do not require long processing times however for a large circuit with significant processing time the lockout of Microwave Office may pres
147. curved metal contours to form long subsections along those contours Whereas staircase fill results in numerous small X and Y directed subsections conformal mesh results in a few long conformal subsections The illustration below shows the actual metalization of a conformal section in close up alongside the same section using staircase fill Conformal section Staircase Fill 69 Sonnet User s Guide 70 Conformal sections like standard subsections are comprised of cells so that the actual metalization still shows a jagged edge when the polygon has a smooth edge However the sections can be much larger due to conformal meshing These larger sections yield faster processing times with lower memory requirements for your analysis Standard subsectioning requires a lot of subsections to model the correct current distribution across the width of the line Conformal subsections have this distribution built into the subsection Sonnet conformal meshing automatically includes the high edge current in each conformal section This patented Sonnet capability is unique U S Patent No 6 163 762 issued December 19 2000 An example of a circuit using both standard subsectioning and conformal mesh is shown below The circuit shown at the left is displayed using standard subsectioning staircase fill Conformal meshing for the curved part of the circuit is shown on the right Note that for the curved part of the geometry conformal mesh uses s
148. cy at which the pre computed data is valid and is used as a cutoff frequency Above the cutoff frequency it is not usually possible to compute frequency independent data If your frequency analysis band is entirely below lt f gt em runs with MFC enabled over your entire band If your band is above lt f ng gt em disables MFC for the entire simulation If your band has frequencies both above and below f 57 em automatically uses MFC up to lt finfe gt and disables MFC for all frequencies greater than fag Using Symmetry The microstrip circuit in steps son see the circuit on page 41 is symmetric about the horizontal center line Em can take advantage of this provided all ports are also on the center line or have an exact reflection This second condition is important If there is a port off the center line em creates the port s image on the other side of the center line and shorts the two together 45 Sonnet User s Guide 46 If you want to short two symmetrical ports together you should identically number the ports above and below the line of symmetry Ports with the same number are electrically connected together This may be useful for designers interested in the even mode of a pair of coupled lines as shown below This circuit cannot be run This circuit may be run with using symmetry symmetry because the ports above and below the line of symmetry are the same number
149. d which 1s the sum of all the individual electric fields just calculated goes to zero everywhere that there is a conductor The currents that do this form the current distribution on the metalization Once we have the currents the S parameters or Y or Z follow immediately Ifthere is metalization loss we modify the boundary condition Rather than zero tangential electric field zero voltage we make the tangential electric field the voltage on each subsection proportional to the current in the subsection The constant of proportionality is the metalization surface resistivity in Ohms square In short Ohm s Law The Sonnet Project 24 Each circuit whether a netlist or a circuit geometry is contained in a project This project contains the specification of the circuit geometry or netlist the analysis controls and the analysis output data What types of analysis data contained in the project depends on the types of analyses run on the project Each program in the Sonnet suite uses the same project You open a new project in the project editor The project editor supplies a graphical interface to define a circuit geometry or a netlist editor to input a netlist which is able to reference other projects If you have purchased a license for one ofthe Sonnet translators Agilent DXF or GDSII you may input these files into the project editor and save the translated file as a Sonnet project Chapter 1 Introduction Once the ci
150. de appears on your display L5 lowpass emp Microwave Office File Edit View Project Simulate Options Tools Window Help 0 Su exoa SOR mE EISIG t Design Notes Project Options i1 Global Definitions D Data Files amp 8 Circuit Schematics Annotations 3 Stage Low Pass Fil Low Pass Filter Eac P roj e ct G Materia New EM Structure Browser Link To EM Structure Window Import EM Structure Be Output Equ Graphs Collapse All mE Graphi Expand A All Sources All Sources DB KA Optimizer Goals E Yield Goals E Output Files 8 6 Wizards Proj Elem Layout j Options 226 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Right click on EM Structures in the project browser and select New EM Structure from the pop up window which appears The New EM Structure dialog box appears on your display New EM Structure Enter a name for the EM Structure EM Structure 1 Select a simulator Available Simulators t2 AWR EMSight Simulator In Process DEA NET AN C Sonnet 3D Planar Electromagnetic Simulator ya Sonnet Checkbox Description Sa Be we aa N Allows for electromagnetic simulation of 2 5D structures Click on the Sonnet 3D Planar Electromagnetic Simulator checkbox This select Sonnet s em as your analysis engine for electromagnetic simulations within Microwave Office Enter the desired name for the new EM Structure in the N
151. default name for a new metal library is metal library txt If you wish to name the library file something else edit the filename entry Once the desired location is specified click on the OK button in the browse window The browse window is closed and a new metal library file with no entries is created at the location you Just specified Use the rest of the edit controls in the Metal Libraries dialog box to create entries for this metal library For details on editing a metal library see Editing a Metal Library page 86 The loss of a via is accomplished in much the same way as a metal polygon The only difference is that a via is a 3D object and a polygon is only two dimensional Therefore the Sonnet via loss model is only an approximation In general edge vias use the loss of the polygon they are attached to and via polygons have their own loss properties To assign loss to a via polygon select the via polygon and choose Modify Via Properties In the Via Properties dialog box select a metal type in the Via Loss drop list for the via polygon For extremely precise loss analysis of vias you should use the same measurement approach as discussed earlier for polygon loss Setting Losses for the Box Top and Bottom Ground Plane You set the loss for the box top or bottom by assigning a metal type to the box top or bottom The box top and bottom use the same metal types which are used for the metalization in your circuit i e th
152. ditor Optimization 166 You may also use parameters to perform an optimization on your circuit An optimization allows you to specify goals the desired response of your circuit and the data range for the parameter s over which you seek the response The software using a conjugate gradient method iterates through multiple parameter values searching for the best set which meets your desired goals The conjugate gradient optimizer begins by analyzing the circuit at the nominal parameter values It then perturbs each parameter individually while holding the others fixed at their nominal values to determine the gradient of the error function for that parameter Once it has perturbed each parameter it then performs a line search in the direction of decreasing error function for all parameters After some iterations on the line search the optimizer again calculates the gradients for all parameters by perturbing them from their present best values Following this a new line search is performed This continues until one of three conditions are met 1 the error goes to zero 2 the error after the present line search is no better than the error from the previous line search 3 the maximum number of iterations 1s reached When one of these three conditions is met the optimizer halts Setting up an optimization consists of five parts e Specifying optimization frequencies e Specifying your goals e Choosing which parameters to vary e Spec
153. dvanced Options dialog box which appears click on the Box Resonance Info check box Click on the OK button to close the Advanced Options dialog box Click on the OK button to close the Analysis Setup dialog box The warning symbol shown to the left appears in the analysis monitor when a box resonance is detected If you click on the Errors Warning button on the analysis monitor you can view all of the warning messages associated with that particular analysis Below is an example of the first type of box resonance warning message When this message appears there is a box resonance detected in the primary structure Sonnet Warning EG2680 Circuit has potential box resonances Filename C Program Files sonnet project package9 son Primary structure First few ideal resonant frequencies are 30 0866 GHz TE Mode 0 1 1 31 7587 GHz TE Mode 0 1 2 Note that the warning message is describing box resonances which appear in the primary structure The term primary refers to the actual structure being analyzed By ideal resonant freguency we mean a theoretical value based on an empty Sonnet box The specified dielectric stackup is considered but the effect of any circuit metallization and loss parameters are not 387 Sonnet User s Guide 388 Below is an example ofthe second type of box resonance warning message When this message appears there is a box resonance detected in a calibration standard Sonnet Warning
154. e box sidewall without ports This is because the error introduced by trun cating the outer conductors can be partially compensated for by allow ing the current that should have traveled on the outside edge of the outer conductor to travel through the box sidewalls 5 Shielded Coplanar waveguide In this case create the Sonnet box to be the same dimensions of your coplanar waveguide box Do not use push pull ports Instead connect the ground conductors to the box sidewall without ports In cases 1 4 the outer conductors do not get connected to the two walls running parallel to the line In case 5 the conductors typically get connected to the walls 383 Sonnet User s Guide 384 Chapter 24 Package Resonances Chapter 24 Package Resonances Simply stated the Sonnet analysis is a solution of Maxwell s equations These general equations are not limited to a purely TEM or Quasi TEM analysis For a given structure ifa higher order mode TE or TM can propagate or an evanescent mode can exist it will be included in the results The strongest evidence of the presence of a waveguide mode occurs when the 6 conducting sides of the Sonnet box create a resonant cavity As most microwave designers can attest to these box resonances occur in practice as well The designer can use Sonnet to predict unwanted box resonances in the package or module housing the circuit In this chapter we will outline several ways to detect package resonance
155. e fixed middle point is defined as the midpoint between the two reference points 159 Sonnet User s Guide when the parameter is defined the user does not define an anchor point for a symmetric parameter When defining your parameter you perform the following steps e Select the first reference point e Select the adjustable point set that moves with the first reference point e Select the second reference point The value of the parameter is the distance between the two reference points e Select the adjustable point set that moves with the second reference point When the value is changed each point set moves one half the distance of the difference between the present value and the previous value out from the middle point Note that the parameter is always defined as the distance between the reference points in either the X direction or the Y direction never as a diagonal distance between them 160 Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project Two examples of symmetric parameters each at two different nominal values are illustrated below Reference bin RIN Reference Point 1 HER N K Point 2 Ss N RASS justable BS N justable stre m e ee Width nominal value 40 mils Width nominal value 80 mils Notice that although the top and bottom examples have identical reference points and starting and ending nominal values that the resulting polygon on the top differs from that on the bo
156. e however that the response data is imported only when an analysis is executed in Microwave Office Translation Issues There are features in both Microwave Office and Sonnet which do not translate and several translation issues you should be aware of before using the Microwave Office Interface These are all discussed in the sections following 255 Sonnet User s Guide Sonnet Features Not Available in Microwave Office These features are handled differently depending whether you are using Microwave Office to edit your EM Structure or Sonnet s project editor Native Editor The table below lists the Sonnet features not available in Microwave Office and how the feature is handled with each editor A WARNING When a conversion or deletion occurs when you are editing in Microwave Office the change is permanent and is not restored if you open the EM Structure in the project editor Sonnet Feature Edit in Microwave Office Edit in Sonnet s Project Editor Thick Metal metal type Converted to thin metal Kept in circuit but displayed as thin metal in Microwave Office Dimensions Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Subdividers Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Parameters Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Parallel Subsections Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but no
157. e window The browse window is closed and a new dielectric library file with no entries is created at the location you just specified Use the rest of the edit controls in the Dielectric Libraries dialog box to create entries for this dielectric library For details on editing a dielectric library see Editing a Metal Library page 86 Chapter 6 Ports Chapter 6 Ports This chapter describes the four different types of ports used in Sonnet how they are modeled and how to place or delete them in your circuit The four types of ports used in Sonnet are the standard box wall port the ungrounded internal port the via port and the auto grounded port Port Types All ports in Sonnet are two terminal devices What distinguishes the port types is where the terminals are connected The most common type of port used is the standard box wall port in which the first terminal is attached to a metal polygon and the second terminal is attached to the box wall ground This type of port can be de embedded by em 99 Sonnet User s Guide 100 Occasionally however it is useful to attach the two terminals of a port between two adjacent polygons This is the ungrounded internal port This type of port cannot be de embedded by em When analyzing multi port circuits to find S Y or Z parameters all ofthe ports in the circuit should be grounded An ungrounded port can have a different ground reference from other ports in the circuit wh
158. e 57 Controlling the Analysis Frequencies You may control the range of analysis frequencies as well as the type of frequency sweep used for your Sonnet analysis from the Options property pages in Microwave Office You are limited to either analyzing at the points requested by Microwave Office or performing an Adaptive Band Sweep on a full or partial band Sonnet s Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS performs a fine resolution analysis of a specified frequency band Em analyzes the circuit at the beginning and end frequencies Using an iterative process em then analyzes at other discrete frequencies and determines a rational polynomial fit to the S parameter data within the frequency band Once a rational polynomial fit is achieved with an acceptable error the frequency response across the specified bandwidth is 237 Sonnet User s Guide 238 calculated If your Microwave Office simulation requires more than 4 or 5 frequency points an Adaptive Sweep using ABS is the most efficient way to obtain the desired results TIP When using an ABS sweep em produces the simulation data for 300 points in ap proximately the same amount of time as 10 data points You will usually want to avoid using the Local frequency controls in Microwave Office especially when the local controls request fewer data points than the Global Frequencies Microwave Office uses the data obtained in the Local Frequencies to interpolate the Global frequency data Since an
159. e Circuit Rep Geo or Selected Geo on selected portion of Layout son file Response data stored in son preference file Launch Project Editor View Data View Current Density Basic Program flow for the Agilent interface 280 Rep Geo Selected Geo Edit Preference File Launch xgeom Launch Sonnet Find Translated Files Launch user window Launch Runwin Sonnet Info Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface The menu options are listed as follows Translate Entire layout into Sonnet 9 format son project Translate selected portion of layout into Sonnet 9 format son project Opens an editing session of the Agilent Translator preference file For details about the preference file please refer to The Preference File page 286 Launch Sonnet project editor session Launch Sonnet session The Sonnet task bar appears on your display Find the desired Sonnet project and opens the design of the same name For UNIX launch command window in present directory For Windows a session of the Sonnet Run Window is launched in the Sonnet project directory Displays information about ebridge and how to contact Sonnet Software In order to translate a circuit from layout to Sonnet 9 format open your design in the layout window Choose the Rep Geo item in order to translate the entire design into the S
160. e Numbers 0 0 00 eee eee 102 Ports with Negative Numbers esee 102 Changing Port Numbering 20 0 e ee eee eee 103 Port Normalizing Impedances 2 00 e eee eee eee 104 Changing Port Impedance 00 0c cece eee 106 Defining Reference Planes Calibration Lengths 107 Standard Ports isete Ta e Ree ee eM ESA 107 Auto ground Ports oossoo onnen 109 Del ting Ports 2 50 ssa Re hed oy Seay eee ERR RIA 109 Ungrounded Internal Ports eeess 110 N14 Ports sep IRR RR RR ER EEG en 111 Adding Vi Ports ssa aa da Mi ES RPP RE s 112 Automatic Grounded Ports sossun eee ee eens 112 Special Considerations for Auto Grounded Ports 113 Adding Auto grounded Ports 0 0 c eee eee eee 114 Creating Auto grounded Ports An Example 115 T D emheddlibs ues eee e eh ri scare ei ees mere ADD Enabling the De embedding Algorithm 121 De embedding Port Discontinuities 55 sos 122 Box Wall Ports 2 eee Eee en 123 Shifting Reference Planes 0 0 nn 124 single Feed Eines 4 4 2 sakea aa oe des T y KES PEN 125 Coupled Transmission Lines 0 0000 eee eee 126 De embedding Results sossun nn tees 127 De embedding Error Codes olosi 129 Sonnet User s Guide 8 De embedding Guidelines eee ee eee 131 Calibration Standards oossoo nanna nn 131 D
161. e Radiation from triangular subsections i e diagonal fill is not included e The far field viewer patterns are for a substrate which extends to infinity in the lateral dimensions Spherical Coordinate System You view your antenna plot using the spherical coordinate system which is described below To view an antenna plot the far field viewer uses the spherical coordinate system shown below The X Y and Z coordinates are those used in the analysis engine and the project editor The XY plane is the plane of your project editor window with the Z axis pointing toward the top of the box The spherical coordinate system uses theta 0 and phi 6 as shown in the figure below Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation Z Toward Lossy Top This edge is the left side of the project editor window This edge is the top of tl Mu c project editor window The far field viewer allows values for theta from 0 to 180 degrees However values of theta greater than 90 degrees are below the horizon and are only useful for antennas without infinite ground planes To view just the top hemisphere sweep theta from 0 to 90 degrees and sweep phi from 180 to 180 degrees The X and Y axes in the figure above correspond to the X and Y axes in the project editor The origin is always in the lower left corner of the project editor window To look at an E plane cut or an H plane cut set phi p to 0 or 90 degrees and sweep theta 0 from 0
162. e data We recommend that you run a convergence test by doubling or halving the number of your Z partitions re analyzing your circuit and comparing the two results to ensure that you are using a sufficient number of Z partitions For more information on Z partitioning see Z Partitioning on page 339 Applications of Dielectric Bricks The use of dielectric bricks is appropriate for applications where the effects of dielectric discontinuities or anisotropic dielectric materials are important Examples of such applications include dielectric resonators dielectric overlays airbridges microstrip to stripline transitions dielectric bridges and crossovers microslab transmission lines capacitors and module walls Guidelines for Using Dielectric Bricks Subsectioning Dielectric Bricks A dielectric brick simulates a volume of dielectric material Because a brick simulates a volume it must be subsectioned in the X Y and Z dimensions The more subsections finer resolution used in each dimension the more accurate the analysis X Y subsectioning of dielectric bricks is identical to X Y subsectioning of metal polygons You can control the X Y subsectioning of both through your choice of grid size XMIN YMIN XMAX YMAX and subsections per wavelength See Chapter 4 Subsectioning for details 333 Sonnet User s Guide Z subsectioning of dielectric bricks is controlled by the number of Z partitions parameter This parameter speci
163. e dialog box The Metal Editor text entry boxes now contain the name and loss parameters for the library metal type you selected Please note that any changes to these parameters does not affect the parameters of the metal library only of the metal type you are creating 7 Ifdesired you may change the display pattern for this metal type by clicking on the Up or Down arrows in the Pattern field If the default field assigned to the metal is acceptable to you you may skip this step 8 Click on the OK button in the Metal Editor dialog box The Metal Editor dialog box 1s closed and an entry for the metal type just selected from the library appears in the list in the Metal Types dialog box 9 Click on the OK button in the Metal Types dialog box to close the box and apply the changes This completes adding a metal from the metal libraries Editing a Metal Library You use the Metal Library dialog box to add edit or delete entries from your metal library To edit a metal library do the following 86 Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Select Circuit Metal Types from the main menu of the project editor The Metal Types dialog box is opened on your display This dialog box allows you to add edit and delete metal types for your project Click on the Library button to edit your metal libraries This opens the Metal Library dialog box which allows you to create metal libraries and to edit them Select My Library or Global L
164. e following Select Circuit Metal Types from the main menu of the project editor The Metal Types dialog box is opened on your display This dialog box allows you to add edit and delete metal types for your project Click on the Add button to add a metal type to your project This opens the Metal Editor dialog box which allows you to define a metal type or input a metal type from your library TIP Clicking on the Library button in the Metal Types dialog box allows you edit the contents of your metal libraries but does not allow you to add metal types from the library to your project This must be done in the Metal Editor dialog box Click on the Select Metal from Library button in the Metal Editor dialog box The Metal Library dialog box appears on your display 85 Sonnet User s Guide 4 Select My Library or Global Library by clicking on the appropriate radio button in the Metal Library dialog box If you wish to select a new library file click on the Specify button to the right of the radio button which opens a browse window which allows you to select a file For instructions on setting up a library see Setting Up a Metal Library page 88 Once a library 1s selected a list of metal types in the library should appear in the dialog box 5 Click on the desired metal type s entry to select it The entry is highlighted in blue 6 Click on OK in the Metal Library dialog box This selects the metal type and closes th
165. e layer has little influence on the original fields An intuitive analogy is to view a sense layer like inserting a sheet of paper very high reactance into the fields Because the reactance of the sense layer is high the currents are very small The sheet of paper does not change the fields But even though they are small what are the currents The current density is proportional to the tangential electric fields over the area of the sense layer This Is just a two dimensional version of Ohms Law Current is proportional to Voltage Chapter 25 Viewing Tangential Electric Fields An example is shown below in the current density viewer You may use the Manual Examples list in the Examples PDF documents to get a copy of this project Tane For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help gt Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button tane son JXY Magnitude at 1 GHz Aisle eje wo Amps Meter 5 02e 4 4 46e 4 3 90e 4 3 35e 4 2 79e 4 2 23e 4 1 67e 4 1 12e 4 5 58e 5 0 00000 Click or drag mouse to readout data values 2 Bx Pointer The tangential electric fields just above a gap discontinuity The input voltage comes from the left Strong fields are present across the gap especially at the corners This analysis was performed at 1 GHz Tane is a good example showing tangential E field This circuit uses sense metal set to Xa 1 0e6 ohms square So any
166. e metal loss or the information must be input by the user For this class of circuits it 1s difficult for the user to know an exact value ofthe current ratio without obtaining measured data on the circuit For these cases assuming all the current flows on one side of the conductor gives a worst case loss result This tends to compensate for the best case loss caused by ignoring the other aspects of loss metal porosity etc mentioned earlier Determining Good Input Values The best method to determine proper loss values is to build and measure a simple structure of the desired metalization The structure should be sensitive enough to loss so that measurement errors do not significantly affect the results Then analyze the same structure on Sonnet and adjust the loss values until the calculated loss matches the measured loss This may take several iterations before success but then you can use these values for similar circuits You are now effectively using measured values for the loss parameters Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Creating Metal Types NOTE To assign loss to a polygon in Sonnet you first define a metal type by inputting its loss parameters and then assign that metal type to the polygon drawn in your circuit The previous section s described how to determine values for the Sonnet loss model This section provides instructions for creating a metal type and discusses the loss models used in the Metal Edi
167. e of the structure and a second sheet represents the bottom surface of the structure Vias are placed 317 Sonnet User s Guide automatically around the perimeter to represent the side surfaces of the structure If you use more than two sheets the interior sheets only supply a ring of current on the edge of the structure as shown in the illustration below Four Sheet Thick Metal Top Sheet Interior Sheet Interior Sheet Bottom Sheet This is a cross section of thick metal modeled using four sheets the vias are not shown for clarity Note that the interior sheets are only a ring of metal on the edge of the thick metal structure This saves on metalization which makes the model more efficient As you increase the number of sheets the accuracy of your answer is improved However there is a trade off since an increased number of sheets also demands more processing time and memory use The recommended default of 2 sheets should prove to be adequate for the majority of circuits If you use the Thick Metal on conductors in extremely close proximity you should increase the number of sheets in order to account for the side to side coupling between the conductors If the metal thickness is greater than the gap between conductors more than 2 sheets should be used Enough sheets should be used so that the spacing between sheets is less than the gap between conductors 318 Chapter 19 Thick Metal This model assumes that cu
168. e polygons and via polygons In addition there are two special metal types available in Sonnet for the Top and Bottom metals Free Space and Waveguide Load See Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation for a discussion of how and why you would use these types 9 Sonnet User s Guide To assign a metal type to the Box Top or Bottom metal select Circuit Box Settings from the project editor main menu In the Box Settings dialog box which appears on your display select the desired metal type for the top metal from the Top Metal drop list and the desired metal type for the bottom metal from the Bottom Metal drop list Dielectric Loss 90 The dielectric loss calculations in Sonnet are virtually exact given the substrate really has a frequency independent conductivity and or loss tangent Our web site has a lossy conductivity benchmark you can perform on any electromagnetic solver or measurement system See Benchmarking on the Products section of our web site www sonnetsoftware com The dielectric loss is calculated in Sonnet at the beginning stages of the analysis The method Sonnet uses starts with the calculation of a sum of waveguide modes The exact solution requires an infinite sum of modes but Sonnet truncates this sum to some reasonable value the truncation has never been a source of error So for each mode if there is a lossy dielectric the calculation involves complex numbers instead of just real numbers This is NOT a discr
169. e son 417 Sonnet User s Guide 418 To execute a batch file on the PC you should create a text file containing the command lines with a bat extension Then open a DOS prompt window and type the filename at the prompt and press return To execute a batch file on UNIX create a text file containing the command lines The filename does not need any extension Then change the permissions mode of the file to allow you to execute it For example chmod a x filename where filename is the name of the batch file you wish to execute Then type the name of the file at the UNIX prompt and press return On UNIX systems there are several additions to the command line which are useful to know Placing nice before the command runs it at lower priority Placing amp at the end of the command runs it in background so you get your cursor back Entering nohup before the command line allows you to log off while the em job s keep running If you are using the amp or the nohup you might want to consider redirecting the output using gt outfile See your system administrator for details on any of these options Appendix II Sonnet References Appendix II Sonnet References 1 2 3 This appendix contains articles written by Sonnet authors or articles which directly impacted the analysis theory used by Sonnet An extensive list of articles in which Sonnet was used as the analysis tool is
170. e subdivision inherit their properties from the source project Such properties as cell size metal types properties of the dielectric layers dielectric bricks metal levels etc are all used in the resultant subprojects When you place a subdivider in your circuit a line representing the subdivider appears in the horizontal or vertical plane running through the point at which you clicked The resultant sections of the circuit are automatically labeled Subdivision sections are labeled from left to right or top to bottom depending upon orientation These labels are always sequential and are non editable Once a subdivider has been added to your circuit you may edit the subdivider as you would any other object in your geometry You may click on the subdivider and move it You may also control the display and selection of the subdivider lines and labels in the Object Visibility dialog box and the Selection Filter dialog box The following are illegal conditions for subdivision lines e May not be off grid e Should not be placed where there is coupling across the subdivision line e May not be colinear with polygon edges e May not split a diagonal polygon edge e May not split a port e May not be below the line of symmetry e May not split a polygon at a box wall See the picture below 215 Sonnet User s Guide Illegal Subdivision Lines si 2 Legal At PISIN s3 Mg s4 sb
171. e used In practice however there are many aspects of metal loss that cannot easily be accounted for For example surface roughness metal purity metal porosity etc cannot easily be measured and included in an all encompassing loss model In addition most software programs Sonnet included do not allow you to enter all of the parameters that determine metal loss Many users like to use the ideal values as a 75 Sonnet User s Guide 76 starting point and add a little of their own real world loss But how much should be added to the ideal models This question is not easily answered but is addressed in the next section An additional loss problem exists with planar EM analysis tools such as Sonnet The problem stems from the fact that planar EM tools treat the metal conductor as zero thickness This means that there is no difference between the top of the conductor and the bottom ofthe conductor In some circuits stripline for example the current is symmetrical with half of the current flowing on the top of the conductor and half flowing on the bottom of the conductor The zero thickness model works well in these cases In other circuits such as microstrip the current can be unequally distributed resulting in higher loss than the equivalent stripline circuit If you know the ratio between the top and the bottom currents you can obtain a better loss model All planar solvers must either estimate this value in order to calculat
172. ed button in the Analysis Setup dialog box The Analysis Setup dialog box is opened when you select Analysis Setup from the project editor menu You enter the resolution by clicking on the Manual radio button in the ABS Resolution section of the Advanced Options dialog box and entering the desired resolution in the adjacent text entry box For details on these dialog boxes please refer to online help for the project editor There are several things to be aware of when using the manual setting for the ABS resolution Coarse resolution does not speed things up Once a rational polynomial is found to fit the solution calculating the adaptive data uses very little processing time A really coarse resolution could produce bad results by not allowing the ABS algorithm to analyze at the needed discrete frequencies Fine resolution does not slow down the analysis unless the number of frequency points in the band 1s above approximately 1000 3000 points A step size resulting in at least 50 points and less than 2000 points is recommended Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS Q Factor Accuracy There is a Q Factor analysis run option available in the Advanced Options dialog box in the project editor Select Analysis gt Setup then click on the Advanced button in the Analysis Setup dialog box Selecting this option forces a higher accuracy for ABS convergence by including the Q factor of your analysis as a criterion for convergence This 1s
173. efining Reference Planes oon nnen 132 De embedding Without Reference Planes 132 Reference Plane Length Minimums 4 133 Reference Plane Lengths at Multiples of a Half Wavelength 134 Reference Plane Lengths Greater than One Wavelength 134 Non Physical S Parameters soon nnen 135 Box Resonances pose ssa mus Urb sia saadaa EI RIVS 138 Higher Order Transmission Line Modes 2 040 139 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS 4d ABS Resolution soon nn eee eee neen 142 Q Factor Accuracy eoe eie eo okena E Cehe eae hn 143 Running an Adaptive Sweep sssusa eee 143 ABS Caching Level erus ER e IRR Ern 145 Multiple ABS Sweeps and Subsectioning 146 Multi Sweep Caching Scenarios 0 0 eee eee 147 Find Minimum and Find Maximum 000005 149 Parameter Sweep cece cee ee ee en ee hern 149 Analysis Issues c r po redo rh gb 151 Multiple Box Resonances 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 151 De embedding 0 0 KKK cee eens 152 Transmission Line Parameters 0 0000 eeeeee 152 Current Density Data 00 leise eee 153 Ripple in ABS S Parameters ooo 153 Output Files 5 Led eS LLL 153 Viewing the Adaptive Response 00 00 e ce eee eee 154 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project 155 Parameters m exe hee ea ee dae oed UN ie We deed P ue 156 An
174. eguency entered provides the desired accuracy Multi Sweep Caching Scenarios The analysis engine always attempts to use any existing data in the project which Is consistent with the present analysis Described below are some common scenarios describing ABS analyses when the ABS caching level is set to Multi Sweep with Stop Restart and how data consistency is maintained Higher or Lower Resolution over the Same Frequency Band You are running an ABS analysis over the same band as a previous ABS analysis but with higher or lower resolution an example is shown below In order for the caching data to be valid for the second analysis your Advanced Subsectioning controls must be set such that the subsectioning frequency is the same for both runs If the subsectioning frequency remains the same the second analysis will usually not require any re analysis and the results should be provided very quickly The only exception would be if the difference between the resolutions is unusually high Frequency Band 10 40 GHz Ist ABS analysis 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 39 8 39 9 40 2nd ABS analysis 10 10 05 10 1 10 15 10 2 39 85 39 9 39 95 40 Zoom In You are running an ABS analysis over a narrower band than the previous ABS analysis of the project as shown in the diagram below This provides higher resolution over the narrower band since the ABS analysis defaults to approximately 300 data points In order for the caching data to
175. eld viewer help References 1 Simon Ramo John R Whinnery and Theodore Van Duzer Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics John Wiley amp Sons Inc 1994 pg 601 2 Ibid pg 600 357 Sonnet User s Guide 358 Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis Sonnet s analysis engine em provides a frequency domain solution in the form of S Y and Z parameters Many time domain simulators such as traditional SPICE engines do not have the capability to import frequency domain data or have problems with efficiency stability or accuracy when using frequency domain data To address these problems Sonnet provides the capability to output your frequency domain data into a SPICE compatible file You may choose from three different models depending on your needs This chapter discusses three solutions provided by Sonnet e PI Lumped Element Spice Model e N Coupled Line Transmission Line Spice Model e Broadband Spice Model using rational polynomial fit requires a 359 Sonnet User s Guide 360 separate Broadband Spice Extractor license The first model is a lumped element fit to the S parameter data For this type of model the circuit often resembles the symbol r therefore this type of model is referred to as a PI Model Sonnet creates this type of model when you specify a PI Model output file in the PSpice or Spectre format Analysis gt Output Files in the project edi
176. electric brick has been created in the project editor it is possible to see the brick from both the circuit layer where the base of the brick is located and the circuit layer where the top of the brick is located On both levels you will see a polygon which defines the cross sectional shape of the dielectric brick The brightness of the polygon however will vary When you are on the top level you will see a dim polygon on the base level you will see a bright polygon 335 Sonnet User s Guide 336 Only the outline of the dielectric brick is visible from levels other than the origination and termination of the dielectric brick Note that while it is possible to see a brick from two different circuit levels selecting a brick for cutting copying moving changing attributes etc can only be done from the circuit level where the base of the brick is located if you are in Single layer edit mode The polygon can be selected on either level 1f you are in multilayer select Finally it is possible to turn the display of dielectric bricks on or off in the project editor You select View Object Visibility from the main menu of the project editor which opens the Object Visibility dialog box shown below Visibilty L2 x Make Visible C All Objects Only Objects Checked Below Iv Metalization L j Iv Ports W Parallel Subsections Iv Vias W Reference Planes M Dimensions W Parameters Iv S
177. emove parts of the circuit not being analyzed 3 Decide on a proper size substrate and cell size Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators Change polygons to have the proper fill Align the circuit to grid points 4 5 6 Move points around as needed 7 Add vias 8 Add ports and reference planes Depending on your circuit all of these steps may not be needed However it is recommended that you try to follow the steps in the order given The GDSII and DXF Translator Tutorial in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials uses an example to describe each of these steps in detail Specifying Units for a DXF Translation The DXF translator assumes that the circuit was input using inches as the units The Import Options dialog box allows you to specify the units Select the desired Unit from the Units drop list in the Import Options dialog box The Import Options dialog box is opened by pressing the Options button in the Import window For more details see the DXF translator in the project editor Help Error in Processing the DXF File You may receive an error message from the DXF translator stating that the format ofthe DXF file is incorrect The error message comes in many different forms An example is dxfgeo ERROR illegal dxf type number at line 205 SDIMALT Most error messages stop the conversion however there are two error messages that do not stop the conversion They both tell you that there will not be any polygons in the
178. ency work surface reactance reaches significant levels A superconductive effect known as kinetic inductance slows the velocity of the electrons with no loss of energy This can be modeled as a surface inductance The effect of surface inductance is to make larger or the velocity of propagation slower For normal conductors g can never be larger than Ee In a superconductor this is no longer true This unusual effect becomes significant for very thin substrates Surface inductance L is specified in the project editor in the Metal Types dialog box accessed by selecting Circuits gt Metal Types This parameter takes into account the surface reactance at higher frequencies There are three recommended approaches to obtaining a value for Ls A first order approximation is to assume the metal is a perfect conductor This model works well for moderate frequencies less then 150 GHz and moderate circuit dimensions which are much greater than the London depth of penetration The second approach is a model which is still valid at moderate frequencies but includes effects due to kinetic inductance The kinetic inductance is a function of temperature and can be approximated in the following manner Rpc 0 Rr 0 L WALD 81 Sonnet User s Guide where Ug 4n 10 7 H m MAT Ag J1 T7 2 London depth of penetration at temp Xo London depth at T 0 meters T Critical Transition Temperature in degrees Kelvi
179. ension is specified by the pertinent substrate instance MCOV SSUB etc The box gridding parameters are set by the NUM X GRIDS and NUM Y GRIDS preference parameters Extension lines and reference planes will always be added in order to provide de embedded S parameters to the original circuit dimensions Exact control of the substrate size of your circuit is often desirable in order to control the cell size This can be accomplished by drawing a rectangle around the circuit layout and then setting the EXT preference parameter to zero This rectangle will set the circuit bounding box because it 1s the furthest extent of the circuit to its dimensions as long as none of the circuit extends beyond it It should be drawn on an unused layer and this layer should be identified in the preference file as being ignored see The Preference File page 286 This procedure is demonstrated in Using a drawn bounding box page 143 in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials For example A circuit is 100 by 140 mils in total extent on a 10 mil substrate If EXT is set to 3 the final substrate size would be 160 by 200 mils If NUM X GRIDS is set to 160 and NUM Y GRIDS was set to 200 the cell size will be 1 by 1 mil Reference planes will be extended to the edge of the original 100 by 140 mil circuit Conversely a rectangle can be drawn on the layout see above of dimensions 200 by 240 mils EXT can be set to zero resulting in a final box size of 200 by 24
180. ent Density View Subsections Adaptive Sweep Settings Use Adaptive Band Synthesis O Ful Band Statt 5 Stop 35 GHz Sonnet Task Bar Click on the Compute Current Density checkbox When the Sonnet analysis is executed current density data will be calculated for all discrete data points Click on OK to close the dialog box and apply the changes Viewing the Current Density Data 242 Once the analysis is complete and current density data is available the View Currents button is enabled Clicking on this button opens Sonnet s current density viewer which allows you to view the current density data and animate the view as a function of time or freguency To view the current density data do the following Right click on the desired EM Structure for which current density data has been created and select Options from the pop up menu which appears The Options property pages appear on your display Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface 2 Click on the Sonnet Options tab in the property pages This displays the Sonnet options as pictured below Options General Frequencies Layout Drawing Mesh Sonnet Options SONNET Current Density Compute Current Density Adaptive Sweep Settings O Ful Band Select Band Start 5 GHz View Subsections Sonnet Task Bar View Currents button 243 Sonnet User s Guide 244 Click on the View Currents butt
181. ent a problem and exporting your EM Structure allows you to run a Sonnet analysis at the same time that you are using the Microwave Office framework However there is considerably more overhead in the translation and in keeping the EM Structure in Microwave Office synchronized with the Sonnet project Exporting Your EM Structure to Sonnet The first way to work outside of the Microwave Office framework is to export your EM Structure to a Sonnet project by doing the following 252 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface 1 Open your EM Structure in the Native Editor Your EM Structure is opened in Sonnet s project editor Microwave Office is locked until the project editor is closed 2 Select File gt MWOffice Save As Sonnet Project from the main menu of the Sonnet project editor A browse window appears 3 Selecta name and location for the Sonnet project you are creating from your EM Structure Your EM Structure is saved as a Sonnet project at the specified location 4 Exitthe project editor by selecting File Exit from the main menu This closed the project editor and unlocks Microwave Office You would then edit and analyze your circuit in Sonnet until the circuit satisfies your design criteria Once this is completed you would import the Sonnet project to an EM Structure in Microwave Office by using the Load Sonnet Project command in the project editor For details see Importing a Sonnet Project on page 254 Analyzi
182. ent density view of coplanar structures may show high current on the outside edge of the ground strip This 1s caused from the fact that the infinite ground of an ideal coplanar line is truncated to a finite ground strip Using a wider polygon to represent the ground strip will reduce this effect however analysis times will increase Generally if the width of the ground strip is 3 or 4 times the gap size current on the outside edges has only a small effect on the results Note that the use of symmetry in the CPW short circuit provided the same results in less time than analyzing without symmetry When a circuit is symmetric em does not subsection any part of the circuit below the center line But notice that the 1 port below the center line is the same distance from that center line as the other 1 port above the center line As long as there are ports identical in every way i e impedance number etc equidistant from the center line you may use symmetry for a circuit Different Types of Coplanar Waveguide Any transmission line with three coplanar conductors where the center conductor is fed 180 degrees out of phase with the two outer conductors can be considered a coplanar waveguide line The following is a list of some of the more popular configurations 1 Ungrounded Coplanar No metal on the bottom of the substrate 2 Grounded Coplanar The bottom of the substrate has a metal ground plane which is electrically connected
183. ental Verification of an Electromagnetic Analysis of Microstrip Circuits Trans of The Society for Computer Simulation Vol 4 No 2 pp 125 156 Apr 1987 J C Rautio A Time Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis of Shielded Microstrip Circuits Ph D Dissertation Syracuse University Syracuse NY 1986 J C Rautio Preliminary Results of a Time Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis of Shielded Microstrip Circuits ARFTG Conference Digest Baltimore pp 121 134 June 1986 Voted best paper at the conference J C Rautio Techniques for Correcting Scattering Parameter Data of an Imperfectly Terminated Multiport When Measured with a Two Port Network Analyzer IEEE Trans Microwave Theory Tech Vol MTT 31 May 1983 pp 407 412 R Horton B Easter A Gopinath Variation of Microstrip Losses with Thickness of Strip Electronics Letters 26th August 1971 Vol 7 No 17 pp 490 481 Appendix II Sonnet References 86 R F Harrington Time Harmonic Electromagnetic Fields New York McGraw Hill 1961 section 8 11 pg 8 427 Sonnet User s Guide 428 Index Index A additional response files 26 j I 175 1 ABS caching level 145 adjacent po ygons pe M adjustable point set 159 160 subsectioning 146 Agilent Interface 24 ABS see adaptive band synthesis E air bridges 301 absolute power 356 analysis accuracy cell size 21 adaptive band synthesis 141 154 ABS caching level 145 analysis issues 151 154
184. entical The more partitions better resolution used in the Z dimension the more ac curate the analysis however analysis time and memory requirements also in crease dramatically 91 Sonnet User s Guide 92 Dielectric Layer Loss Em uses the above parameters to calculate the total effective tan for the dielectric material as follows tan Loss Tan Diel Cond o Erel e where o is the radian frequency 2nf where f is frequency in hertz Note that tan has both a frequency dependent term and a frequency independent term The above equation for tan can also be expressed in terms of conductivity as follows Total Effective Cond Loss Tan o Erel e Diel Cond Both equations are equivalent Each describes how em uses the input dielectric parameters to compute loss in the dielectric material See Circuit gt Dielectric Layers in the project editor s online help for information on setting these parameters How to Create a New Dielectric Layer To create a new dielectric layer do the following Select Circuit Dielectric Layers from the main menu of the project editor The Dielectric Layers dialog box appears on your display Click on one of the Add buttons either Above or Below in the Dielectric Layers dialog box The Dielectric Editor dialog box appears on your display Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Enter the dielectric parameters in the appropriate text entry boxes For
185. er 17 Using Diagonal Fill on page 297 For conformal mesh see Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh on page 169 This chapter deals exclusively with staircase subsections 57 Sonnet User s Guide This fill type is referred to as staircase because when using small rectangular subsections to approximate a diagonal edge the actual metalization takes on the appearance of a staircase as in the example shown below The black outline represents the polygon input by the user The patterned sections represent the actual metalization analyzed by em Staircase edge The default values for the subsectioning parameters are X Min 1 Y Min 1 X Max 100 and Y Max 100 These numbers specify the smallest and largest allowed dimensions of the subsections in a polygon With X Min 1 the smallest subsection in the X dimension is one cell With X Max 100 subsections are not allowed to go over 100 cells in length The illustration below shows how these default subsectioning parameters are used Notice in the corner the subsection size is just one cell The current density changes most rapidly here thus the smallest possible subsection size is used 58 Chapter 4 Subsectioning Subsection size is 1 cell by 1 cell on corner Subsection size is 1 cell p wide along edge Interior subsections are wide and long Cell Size A portion of circuit metal showing how em combines cells into subsections I
186. er Names to Sonnet Level Numbers and Material Names After you enter the correct data for your specific needs you have the option of saving the settings to a lay file for use in future conversions Layer Mapping L2 x DXF Xgeom Layer Name Map Object Type Level Material PAD_CENTERS 7 Metal pr wem J pupGES m Mem jj JBRDG MASKS m Meta z Layer External Layer File Add Delete Load Save Loa Delete _Load _ Unknown m E Unknown m gt Unknown m E i Cancel Help The first column refers to the incoming DXF file The last three columns are the choices to be used in the Sonnet project for the DXF layer identified in the first column DXF Layer Name The layer name defined in your circuit layout program Note that the layer name has no relationship to the project editor s dielectric layer number or metallization level number This field can be used to map a single DXF stream to multiple project editor levels By using the Add button you can have multiple entries for the same stream layer which are mapped to different levels in the Sonnet project Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators Map Use this checkbox to select which layers in the DXF file you wish to map to the Sonnet project If this checkbox is off the DXF layer is not mapped to the Sonnet project If the checkbox is on then the DXF layer is mapped to the level speci
187. erence file 291 Sonnet User s Guide 292 UPPER LAYER Syntax UPPER LAYER lt T gt Er Ur Tand Tanm Add a dielectric layer above the main CAP LAYER and BRIDGE LAYER layers See CAP LAYER for the definition of each parameter Any number of UPPER LAYER statements may be included in a preference file Each statement adds an additional layer in the order stated in the file to the top of the structure For example if two UPPER LAYER statements exist the layer from the first statement is placed above the layer from the second statement LOWER LAYER Syntax LOWER LAYER lt T gt Er Ur Tand Tanm Add a dielectric layer below all other layers See CAP LAYER for the definition of each parameter Any number of LOWER LAYER statements may be included in a preference file Each statement adds an additional layer in the order stated in the file to the bottom of the structure For example if two LOWER LAYER statements exist the layer from the first statement is placed above the layer from the second statement FREQS Syntax FREQS lt Frequency lines gt END FREQS This statement block defines a default set of analysis frequencies for the translation The Syntax for the frequency lines is as follows SWEEP lt start gt stop step Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface This is a Linear Sweep which specifies one or more analysis frequencies evenly spaced in ascending order start is the beginning freque
188. ers making it necessary to analyze the project again 393 Sonnet User s Guide 394 Below is the resulting S parameter S21 curve with the top cover set to free space Please note that while the resonance is still evident its level has been greatly attenuated Again the data is from a simulation of the example project package son package notop son ssa Pes COU ESN I E G Cartesian Plot Z0 50 0 0 Left Axis 54 package_notop M 104 DB S221 4 154 g 204 Right Axis n 25 4 empty 1 304 t 35 4 u 404 d 454 e 504 55 4 dB 60 65 4 70 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 Sonnet Software Inc Frequency GHz Click mouse to readout data values Pointer The package resonances disappear when the top cover is removed Taking the top cover off works provided the sidewalls of the box are large enough to form a propagating waveguide up to the top cover or you can place the top cover close enough to the substrate surface to catch the fields in the box mode High order box modes tend to be confined primarily to the substrate and can be difficult to remove in this manner As you make the box bigger by increasing the substrate surface area the modes loosen up so that they can propagate to the top cover and become absorbed Chapter 24 Package Resonances The Capability to Ask What if In the preceding section we mentioned some simple techniques for removing box resonances from simulated d
189. ers to values within the specified bounds You specify the number of iterations For each iteration em selects a value for each of the parameters included in the optimization then analyzes the circuit at each frequency specified in the goals Depending on the complexity ofthe circuit the number of analysis frequencies and the number of parameter combinations an 167 Sonnet User s Guide 168 optimization may take a significant amount of processing time The number of iterations provides a measure of control over the process Note that the number of Iterations is a maximum An optimization can stop after fewer iterations if the optimization goal is achieved or it finds a minima finds no improvement in the error in further iterations Once the optimization is complete the user has a choice of accepting the optimal values for the parameters resulting from the em analysis Note that if the results of the optimization are accepted used as the nominal values for the parameters the actual metalization in the project editor 1s the closest approximation which fits the present grid settings As a matter of fact em analyzes snapped circuits and interpolates to produce responses for circuits which do not exactly fit the grid For more information about the grid see Chapter 4 Subsectioning Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh Introduction Analyzing circuits which have non rectangular polygons can require extensive
190. esis ABS optimization and conformal mesh Chapter 12 explains the use ofthe netlist editor Chapter 13 explains the use of the circuit subdivision commands Chapter 14 through Chapter 16 discusses the various Sonnet translators This is followed by Chapter 17 through Chapter 27 in which advanced design topics are discussed Appendix I discusses the use of the em command line for batch files Appendix II provides a list of articles written by Sonnet authors on the theory and use of Sonnet Describing Menu Bar Accesses In this manual we describe accessing the menu bars of Sonnet programs using a pointer description to illustrate selecting the desired menu buttons For instance File Print means to click on File in the menu bar and then select Print in the pull down menu which appears Chapter 1 Introduction Invoking Sonnet You use the Sonnet task bar shown below to access all the modules in the Sonnet em Suite Opening the Sonnet task bar for both Windows and UNIX systems is detailed below UNIX 1 Openaterminal If you do not know how to do this please see your system administrator 2 Enter sonnet at the prompt The Sonnet task bar appears on your display Sonnet Sonnet Task Bar 10 0 29 Sonnet User s Guide Windows 1 Select Start Programs Sonnet Sonnet from the Windows desktop Start menu mE Programs EL Settings QJ Find gt MR MS DOS Prompt Help O Windows Explore
191. est frequency requested from Microwave Office appears here but may not be changed The units being used appear to the right Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Computing Current Density NOTE There is a run option available in a Sonnet analysis which allows you to compute current density data as part of the simulation Selecting the Compute Current Density checkbox turns on this run option Note that if you are running an Adaptive Band Sweep current density data is only calculated for the discrete data points not for all of the adaptive data NOTE The current density data produced by Sonnet must be viewed using Sonnet s current density viewer The current density data generated by the analysis engine em is not compatible with the Microwave Office framework All selections in the Animate menu in Microwave Office are disabled when Sonnet is selected as the simulator Selecting the Run Option To calculate current density data as part of your Sonnet analysis do the following Right click on the desired EM Structure for which Sonnet has been selected as the simulator and select Options from the pop up menu which appears The Options property pages appear on your display 241 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Click on the Sonnet Options tab in the property pages This displays the Sonnet options as pictured below Options General Frequencies Layout Drawing Mesh Sonnet Options SONNET Current Density Compute Curr
192. eters With the project open in the project editor do the following Right click on a parameter in your circuit The parameter name and its point set is highlighted and a pop up menu appears on your display Select Select Dependents from the pop up menu If any dependent parameters are present in your geometry the dependent parameter is highlighted Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project Circular Dependencies Care should be taken when adding parameters to your circuit that they do not form a circular dependency A circular dependency is formed when two parameters are dependent on each other This can happen for two parameters or multiple parameters In the case of multiple parameters the dependency extends from the first parameter through all the parameters until the first parameter is dependent upon the last Ifthe project editor detects a circular dependency all the involved parameters are shown in red and their nominal values are fixed An example of two parameters in a circular dependency is shown below A circular dependency is an error condition and must be corrected before you can analyze your circuit As long as the circular dependency exists you are not able to use a value for the parameter other than the nominal value which makes the parameter useless You need to redefine one of the parameters such that it is no longer dependent on the other Reference Planes Special care should
193. eters are fitted over a wide frequency band the generated models can be used in circuit simulators for AC sweeps and transient simulations To create a Broadband Spice file you open your project in the response viewer and select Output Broadband Model File from the main menu You may also create a Broadband Model by using the Analysis gt Output Files command in the project editor See online Help for Details This opens the Output Broadband 369 Sonnet User s Guide Model File window which allows you to calculate a broadband SPICE file based on the analysis data for your project You need a minimum of 50 frequency points in order to generate a Broadband Spice file therefore we highly recommend that you use an ABS sweep when analyzing your circuit to ensure the correct number of analysis frequencies If your circuit contains parameterization or optimization data and you select more than one parameter or iteration combination then you may choose to create one file which contains all the Broadband Spice Models or multiple files one for each specified combination Class of Problems NOTE 370 Be aware that there are several types of responses for which an accurate Broadband Spice Model may not be produced e f your response data contains a data point which sharply deviates from the data curve such as you would see for a box resonance or a narrow band spike the Broadband Spice model may not accu rately model that response
194. etized function it is a continuous function Therefore the dielectric loss calculation can be thought of as exact only limited to the precision of the machine A more reasonable source of error 1s in the assumption that the conductivity 1s constant with frequency All real dielectrics have frequency dependant loss some smaller than others Sonnet supplies you with two parameters Loss Tan and Diel Cond to control this frequency dependency The equation Sonnet uses to calculate the TOTAL loss is given in Dielectric Layer Loss page 92 There are some dielectrics with more complicated frequency dependencies but this equation works for most dielectrics Of course this requires that you know the frequency dependency of your dielectric If you have a method of measuring the loss as a function of frequency or published data which you can trust and if it 1s constant over your range of frequencies then dielectric loss is probably not a source of error Be careful however of published loss data Verify that the data is valid over your frequency range Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Dielectric Layer Parameters You can set the dielectric constant and loss of a dielectric layer by changing the following parameters in the project editor by selecting Circuits Dielectric Layers then clicking on the Above Below or Edit button in the Dielectric Layers dialog box This opens the Dielectric Editor dialog box which allows you to
195. etlist Project Analysis The netlist above instructs em to perform the following steps 1 Perform an electromagnetic analysis on the geometry file att 1geo son using the Frequency sweep and run options defined for this netlist Note that according to the PRJ line Ports 1 8 correspond to nodes 1 8 respec tively in the main network atten The node numbers are listed after the PRJ keyword in the order of ports in the circuit 2 Insert a 16 77 ohm resistor between nodes 3 and 4 which is the equiva lent of inserting the resistor between autogrounded ports 3 and 4 in the geometry project 3 Insert a 16 77 ohm resistor between nodes 5 and 6 4 Insert a 67 11 ohm resistor between nodes 7 and 8 5 Calculate an overall set of S parameters for the T attenuator The two projects att 1geo son and att lumped son are available in the Att example for this chapter The listing below is the analysis output as it appears in the analysis monitor Note that these results are similar to the results given above for distributed elements Frequency 200 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 200 000000 0 007889 66 619 0 500390 4 888 0 500390 4 888 0 007889 66 619 Frequency 300 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 300 000000 0 011495 69 396 0 500788 7 336 0 500788 7 336 0 011495 69 396 Frequency 400 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 400 000000 0 0151
196. ew if any propagating modes violating the First Condition There is an easily made mistake when modeling radiation from small discontinuities Discontinuities are usually small with respect to wavelength For a discontinuity analysis the sidewalls are usually placed one or two substrate thicknesses from the discontinuity In this case the substrate dimensions are unlikely to meet the First Condition If the sidewalls form below a cut off waveguide there is no radiation Second Condition Make sure the sidewalls are far enough from the radiating structure that the sidewalls have no affect Another way to look at this condition is to consider the image of the structure discontinuity or antenna created by the sidewall Position the sidewall so that the image it forms has no significant coupling with the desired structure Usually two to three wavelengths from the sidewall is sufficient for discontinuities For single patch antennas one to three wavelengths is suggested Requirements for specific structures can easily be greater than these guidelines If the First Condition requires a larger substrate dimension than the Second Condition it is very important that the larger dimension is used If you are using the far field viewer the larger the box the better The far field viewer assumes that S parameters from em are from a perfect open environment If some of the power is reflected due to a box that is too small the input power Chapte
197. f your analysis as a criterion for convergence For more information see Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS on page 141 Binary Boxes Composite Boxes In previous releases using a binary box where one or both dimensions of the substrate are 2N cells provided a faster FFT used during the matrix fill portion of the analysis and thereby reduced the amount of time it took to analyze a circuit In this release the FFT has been improved for composite box sizes A composite number is not a prime number nor does it contain any large prime factors For example 1000 is a composite number because its largest prime factor is 5 But 998 is not a composite number because its largest Chapter 2 What s New in Release 10 prime factor is 499 So a 998 by 998 box might take 2 to 3 times longer in the FFT calculation portion of the analysis than a 1000 by 1000 box The FFT portion of the analysis is usually a small percentage of the total analysis time unless you have a lot of layers or an especially large box If either of these conditions are true then it might be worthwhile to use a composite number in your box size New Output Menu in the Response Viewer Instead of using an export command in the response viewer you may now use the new Output menu to specify output files You may create output files of your S Y and Z parameters generate SPICE models and output data formatted for a spreadsheet For more details please see online help on the O
198. factor of two This has a significant effect if your problem is large enough to cause em to swap out to disk For these big problems use of single precision can result in an order of magnitude increase in speed 47 Sonnet User s Guide Unfortunately compilers on certain other computers perform single precision arithmetic by first converting to double precision performing the operation and then converting back to single precision If such a machine 1s not memory swapping in double precision there is no increase in speed in single precision It may even result in a slightly slower analysis In general use the memory saver option on large circuits It is not needed on small circuits On occasion the memory saver option can result in slightly different results At extremely low frequencies when the subsections size is on the order of 0 0001 wavelength or smaller single precision may not be enough to allow the matrix to be accurately inverted In this case em issues a warning as corrupted results may be generated If you are using the memory save option at very low frequencies and you notice non physical results eliminating the option and re analyzing may remove the problem Adjusting the Subsectioning 48 The most direct way to reduce analysis time is to reduce the number of subsections A reduction in number of subsections by half can result in one or even two orders of magnitude increase in speed The easiest way to reduce su
199. ffice oon 263 Project Editor does not open due to a licensing problem 263 Coordinate System cers res yana en R a a a es 264 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators eee 265 Converting your files to Sonnet eese 266 Layer Mapping oc REID IE E EE E HS ia 266 DXF Layer Mapping lesse 267 GDSII Layer Mapping 00 0 0 cee I 270 Using Your Layout Program to Replace the Project Editor 272 Tweaking the Circuit svncncexbevw RR CONTINUER RIBUS 272 Specifying Units fora DXF Translation 000 273 Error in Processing the DXF File 2 00 00 eee eee 273 Capabilities and Limitations of DXF Translation 274 Error in Processing the GDSII File 00 2005 276 Partial Circuit Conversion in a GDSII Import 277 11 Sonnet User s Guide 16 The Agilent Interface ccc cece eee ee eee 270 Overview of the Agilent Interface oss 280 Translation Procedure 0 eee eese 282 Substrate parameters ooo onnen 282 BOX S cttin Sia sites a MATIAS TAA TOKAN hIS WC S 283 Special layers for special circuit elements 284 Special features of Selected gt Geo 00 00 0000 284 New and user defined instances lees eun 285 The Preference Eiles sos aie soca Pasta Kod UI abe PED 286 Translator preferences osu esee 287 Troubleshooting sos skn cece E E tenes 294 Ebridge
200. ficantly increased by lowering the error threshold 377 Sonnet User s Guide 378 Typically values below 0 1 result in unacceptably long analysis times If there are more than 200 frequency points in your response data try decreasing the number of frequencies in your response data To do so use the Analysis gt Clean Data command in the project editor to remove the response data then run another Adaptive sweep ABS using a coarser resolution to produce less data points but still more than 50 data points You may change the resolution of an adaptive sweep in the Advanced Options dialog box in the project editor Select Analysis Setup then click on the Advanced button in the Analysis Setup dialog box which appears Increase the number of data points in the critical frequency band in which you are concerned and decrease the number of data points in frequency ranges which are not as important Chapter 23 Coplanar Waveguide and Balanced Ports Chapter 23 Coplanar Waveguide and Balanced Ports Sonnet can be used to model many different types of coplanar waveguide CPW lines but each type is modeled differently in Sonnet This chapter describes the different modeling techniques for the most common types of coplanar waveguide circuits 379 Sonnet User s Guide Ungrounded Coplanar 380 The most common type of CPW is called ungrounded coplanar where there is no metal under the substrate Two simple examples are s
201. fied in the Xgeom Level text entry box Xgeom Object Type This drop list allows you to select what type of object should be input to the Sonnet project Select Metal for metalization Brick for dielectric brick or Via for a via polygon from the drop list You select the metal type for Metal or Via or brick material from the Xgeom Material drop list This selection is used for the layer number entered for the DXF file in the same row Xgeom Level This specifies the level in the Sonnet project where you wish to place the object being input from the DXF file The top level is number 0 To put metal on the ground plane for via placement set the level number to gnd or GND Xgeom Material Select the material type you wish to use for the object in the Sonnet project The choices available depend on what type of object is selected in Xgeom Object type Metal or Brick and what materials are available in the template project This selection is used for the layer entered for the DXF file in the same row For example if you are importing a DXF file into a project with four defined types of metal you may choose from those four metal types for any object being translated in metal in the Sonnet project You may also enter a new type of material for which you enter the parameters later in the project editor External Layer File Once the mapping is specified you may wish to save the settings for subsequent imports of this DXF file Click on
202. fies the number of Z subsections for all dielectric bricks on a particular dielectric layer See the Z Partitions dialog box topic in the project editor s online help for information on setting this parameter Using Vias Inside a Dielectric Brick Vias through dielectric bricks are treated the same as vias through the standard dielectric layers Note that via ports inside dielectric bricks are not allowed Air Dielectric Bricks Dielectric bricks can be made of any dielectric material and can be placed in any circuit layer This allows for instance alumina bricks to be created in an air circuit layer However it is also possible to reverse this scenario Dielectric bricks made of air can also be created in alumina circuit layers This is an important consideration to remember Depending upon the circuit geometry for a given application this ability to reverse the dielectric characteristics may simplify the circuit and make it faster to analyze Limitations of Dielectric Bricks Diagonal Fill Diagonal fill is not allowed for dielectric bricks All dielectric bricks must use staircase fill Thus dielectric bricks with curved or rounded edges must be stairstep approximated Note that the error caused by such an approximation decreases as the X and Y cell sizes are decreased Thus it is possible to make this error arbitrarily small by choosing sufficiently small X and Y cell sizes Antennas and Radiation The far f
203. forming the tutorials in the Sonnet Tutorial manual available as part of the hardcopy manuals set or in PDF format through the Sonnet task bar System Requirements The interface is available for Windows 2000 Windows XP The interface may operate on Linux Red Hat Enterprise 3 0 systems but has not been tested for this platform For the AWR Microwave Office Interface AWR s Microwave Office 6 0 or above is required Installation NOTE 222 The Microwave Office Interface is automatically installed when you perform your Sonnet installation However ifthe installation of the Microwave Office Interface does not complete successfully you may install the Interface by doing the following Open the Sonnet task bar If you do not know how to open the Sonnet task bar please refer to Invoking Sonnet page 15 in the Sonnet Tutorial Select Admin MWOffice Interface Install from the main menu on the task bar The Microwave Office Interface is installed and this command is disabled If the Microwave Office Interface was successfully installed as part of the Sonnet installation this command is disabled Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Uninstall If you wish to uninstall the Microwave Office Interface without uninstalling all of Sonnet do the following 1 Open the Sonnet task bar If you do not know how to open the Sonnet task bar please refer to Invoking Sonnet page 15 in the Sonnet Tutorial 2 Select Ad
204. ftware Computer Applications in Engineering Education Vol 8 No 2 September 2000 pp 51 60 G L Matthaei J C Rautio and B A Willemsen Concerning the influence of housing dimensions on the response and design of microstrip filters with parallel line couplings IEEE MTT Transactions Vol 48 August 2000 pp 1361 1368 James C Rautio Tips and Tricks for Using Sonnet Lite Free EM software will radically change the way you do high frequency design Microwave Product Digest November 1999 pp 30 34 67 70 James C Rautio An Investigation of Microstrip Conductor Loss IEEE MTT Magazine December 2000 pp 60 67 This article is available in the Support Section of the Sonnet website www sonnetsoftware com Shawn Carpenter Break and Interpolate Technigue A Strategy for Fast EM Simulation of Planar Filters Microwave Project Digest October 2000 pp 18 27 56 58 James C Rautio The Impact on Education of Widely Available Commercial 3 D Planar Electromagnetic Software Computer Applications in Engineering Education Vol 8 No 2 September 2000 pp 51 60 James C Rautio Free EM Software Analyzes Spiral Inductor on Silicon Microwaves amp RF September 1999 pp 165 172 Takashi MIURA Hideki NAKANO Kohji KOSHIJI and Eimei SHU Reduction of time required for electromagnetic analysis by dividing circuit Faculty of Science and Technology Science University of Tokyo Japa
205. g You may view the current of circuits using conformal mesh just like any other circuit However the current density of conformal mesh polygons might show unusual striping These stripes do not represent real current but are a by product of the conformal meshing algorithm There are two types of current striping 1 A single stripe of current can appear on the junction between two con formal sections as shown below bh Current Stripe S Current stripe with section boundaries shown 2 Horizontal or vertical stripes may appear within a curved conformal sec tion producing a ripple effect as shown below 180 Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh Current stripes Fora tutorial on using conformal meshing please see Chapter 4 Conformal Mesh Tutorial in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials 181 Sonnet User s Guide 182 Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis Netlist projects provide you with a powerful circuit analysis tool Examples of ways in which the netlist may be used include Cascading Sonnet projects You can analyze and combine multiple projects using previously existing data for the subprojects if it is available This is par ticularly useful when analyzing large complex circuits which require circuit subdivision for an em analysis When analyzing a netlist project em will au tomatically interpolate between frequencies if there are differences between t
206. g analysis results Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS Find Minimum and Find Maximum Find Minimum determines the frequency where the circuit response reaches a minimum Find Maximum determines the frequency where the circuit response reaches a maximum You enter a starting and ending frequency in the Start and Stop text entry boxes respectively and select the parameter for which you wish to determine the minimum or maximum value Em performs an ABS analysis for the frequency band then uses the adaptive data to determine the frequency where the response reaches a minimum or a maximum The Find Minimum and Find Maximum commands are both available in the Frequency Sweep Combinations analysis controls For more details see the Frequency Sweep Combinations topic in online help in the project editor Parameter Sweep You may choose either a linear sweep or an adaptive sweep for a parameter sweep Selecting an adaptive sweep for a parameter sweep is done in the Parameter Sweep Entry dialog box For more information about parameter sweeps please see Parameter Sweep page 164 The following example assumes that you have already defined the parameter Width in your circuit For more information on inputting a parameter please refer to Parameters page 156 To select ABS for a parameter sweep do the following 1 Select Analysis Setup from the project editor main menu The Analysis Setup dialog box appears on your
207. g problems Displays all environment information relevant to licensing N Display number of subsections and estimated required memory Em then exits without running a full analysis fullsolve Use this option in conjunction with the N option above to provide accurate memory estimates when using Sonnet Lite LitePlus Level2 and Level3 suites test Run em on a test circuit Used to verify that em can get a license and run successfully v Display analysis information as the analysis is performed The analysis information is output to the command prompt window or terminal from which the batch was executed AbsCacheNone Disable ABS caching overrides setting in project file AbsCacheStopRestart Enable ABS stop restart caching overrides setting in project file AbsCacheMultiSweep Enable ABS multi sweep plus stop restart caching overrides project file AbsNoDiscrete Used when running ABS with pre existing cache data Tells the analysis engine not to do any more discrete frequencies If pre existing cache data is sufficient to get converged ABS solution then that solution is written to output Otherwise no processing is performed 416 Appendix I Em Command Line for Batch Option Meaning SubFreqHz value where value is the subsectioning frequency in Hz Note there is no space before the value field This option allows subsectioning frequency to be specified on the
208. generate a PI model from the response viewer The second method has the advantage of allowing you to perform the data check mentioned above before creating the SPICE data file To specify a PI Model Spice output file from the response viewer perform the following Analyze the circuit at the desired frequencies The analysis monitor appears on your display to show the progress of the analysis It is important to note that if your results contain more than two analysis frequencies then multiple Spice models one for each pair of frequencies will be created in one file When the analysis is complete click on the View Response button on the analysis monitor s tool bar The response viewer is invoked with a plot of your response data 363 Sonnet User s Guide 5 364 Click on the project name in the response viewer legend to select it An outline appears around the project name to indicate that it is presently selected If you have multiple projects open in the response viewer and have not selected a project before using the extraction command then a window appears which allows you to select the desired project Select Output PI Model File from the response viewer main menu The Output PI Model dialog box appears on your display The contents of the output window in the Output PI Model dialog box displays the Spice data for the PI Model in the PSpice format which is the default E Output PI Model br32 Format Dat
209. global library allows you to define your own metal types as well There is also a local metal library which can be created for an individual or to share between users Sonnet s Loss Model The Sonnet model of metal loss uses the concept of surface impedance measured in Ohms sq This concept allows planar EM Simulators such as Sonnet em to model real 3 dimensional metal in two dimensions Real Metal Modeled Zero Thickness Metal Substrate If you are unfamiliar with this concept please refer to any classic textbook such as Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics by Simon Ramo John R Whinnery and Theodore Van Duzer John Wiley amp Sons New York 1965 Itis important to note that this technique models the loss of the true 3 dimensional metal fairly accurately but does not model any change in field distribution due to the metal thickness This approximation is valid if the metal thickness 1s small with respect to the width of the line the separation between lines and the Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss thickness of the dielectric If the true 3 dimensional affect of the metal is important then you should consider using the Thick Metal Model metal type as discussed in Chapter 19 Thick Metal on page 317 Some electromagnetic analyses use a perturbational approach for loss This means that they assume the current flowing everywhere is the same as the lossless case This approximation
210. gons A circuit implementing the above transmission line is stored in Thkthru and an example of a thick step junction is stored in a project called Thkstep Copies of these projects can be obtained from the Sonnet examples For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button Chapter 19 Thick Metal Thick Metal in the Current Density Viewer The current density viewer allows you to view the current density distribution in your circuit When you select the Compute Current Density option in the Analysis Setup dialog box in the project editor em calculates current density data for all the metal levels in your circuit When you have thick metal in your circuit which ends in the interior of a dielectric layer then the current density viewer creates sublevels of metal in order to display all the current density data For instance you have a circuit with 3 mil thick metal using the default 2 sheets placed on metal level 1 below a 25 mil dielectric layer as pictured below The top of the thick metal structure is placed in the interior of the dielectric layer The 327 Sonnet User s Guide current density viewer displays levels 1b and 1a where 1b is the metal level on which the thick metal was drawn and 1a is the top of the thick metal structure embedded in the dielectric layer Z direction 50 mils Level 0 3 mils i E 25 mils Level 1
211. gth 133 reference point 157 first in symmetrical 160 second in symmetrical 160 references 357 release 7 0 new features 33 remove top cover 393 394 Rep gt Geo 281 RES index number 288 residual error 404 resistance 91 resistors 184 thin film 74 189 resonance box 391 response maximum 149 minimum 149 response data 25 187 response files 26 right click 162 ripple in S parameters 153 rotation 275 row column replication 275 run options edge mesh 65 memory save 47 S s100 403 s25 403 s2p 26 s50 403 scaling 275 second reference point 160 sections 204 select dependents 162 Selected Geo 282 selecting em Microwave Office Interface 226 sense layer 397 Set EM Filename 281 SHAPE 275 simulation 247 single precision 47 smooth surface 275 SNP 285 snp 26 SOLID 275 Sonnet suite 17 Sonnet Lite 34 Sonnet options property page 239 Sonnet project 24 S Parameters 27 generalized 104 ripple in 153 special cases another layout program 272 specifying units 272 Special layers BRIDGE LAYER 284 CAP LAYER 284 speed 47 Index spherical coordinate system 352 spiral inductors 301 SSSUB 282 SSUB 282 SSUBO 282 ste sym 46 step size 274 steps 41 45 185 steradian 356 Stop Restart caching 145 stream layer number 270 stripline benchmark 402 structure 277 STYLE 275 SUB 282 subdividing 218 subdivision 201 219 procedure 206 subdivision lines 204 coupling across 202 illegal conditions 215 orientation 214 placement 202
212. h formats are available Table 1 Optional Output Files Format Deval E Hs Descriptions Extension Touchstone S lt n gt p Touchstone response file s lt mm gt n number of ports lt 10 mm number of ports gt 10 Databank S n p Databank format frequency sorted response file s lt mm gt n number of ports lt 10 mm number of ports gt 10 SCompact flp SCompact format response file Spreadsheet CSV Comma separated value data for a spreadsheet such as Excel Spectre SCS Cadence format Spice file all models PSpice lib PSpice file all models Agilent MDF mdf Agilent s Microwave Data Interchange Format Sonnet Applications 26 Sonnet is appropriate for a wide range of 3 D planar structures The via capability allows analysis of airbridges wire bonds spiral inductors wafer probes and internal ports as well as for simple grounding Itis appropriate to use Sonnet for e Evaluation of specific discontinuities or groups of interacting Chapter 1 Introduction discontinuities to assist in the design of a 3 D planar circuit Em pro vides ultra precise S parameters for discontinuities allowing designers to work with confidence Em can also quickly synthesize an equivalent lumped model for discontinuities The lumped model can be used directly in circuit theory programs Design validation Using em for design validation effectively eliminates ex pensive design iterations i e tweak
213. h 275 polygon edges 208 polygon mesh 275 polygon overlap 174 polygon vias 269 271 polygons closed 274 polyline 274 275 port excitations 351 terminations 351 port discontinuity 39 Port Impedance dialog box 107 Port instances 296 port mapping Microwave Office Interface 260 PORT FILTER 290 ports 99 117 add auto grounded 114 standard 101 via ports 112 auto grounded 112 113 194 calibration lengths 109 reference planes 109 balanced 103 379 380 box wall 101 123 125 calibration length 107 437 Sonnet User s Guide discontinuities 122 139 impedance 106 107 internal 312 modify attributes 109 115 non sequential 103 normalizing impedances 104 numbering 101 103 push pull 103 380 reference planes 107 renumbering 102 standard calibration lengths 108 reference planes 108 ungrounded internal 110 194 197 via 111 via ports 312 power gain 356 precision single 47 Preference file sonnet prf 286 probes 301 processing time 179 Product Editor origin 353 project browser 228 project editor 17 24 menu bar 29 native editor 249 netlist editor 183 project elements adding 188 project files current density data 25 geometry 24 netlist 24 projects 24 properties circuit 216 438 property pages Sonnet option 239 PSpice file 26 push pull ports 103 380 R radiation 343 343 350 reactive surface impedance 75 reference planes 107 108 109 124 134 de embedding without 132 parameters 163 short len
214. h as liquid or sheet and is usually placed at a position such that it has a minimal effect on the circuit performance and a great effect on the box resonance The user can easily model this material in Sonnet by adding a dielectric layer to the stackup 395 Sonnet User s Guide 396 Chapter 25 Viewing Tangential Electric Fields Chapter 25 Viewing Tangential Electric Fields One reason em is so fast is that all of the electric and magnetic fields are solved for analytically with pencil paper and many equations The computer need only do an FFT and solve for the current distribution However on occasion you want to view the fields not the current You do this with what is called a sense layer The sense layer is a rectangular patch of conductor placed where you want to see the tangential electric field Actually describing the sense layer as a conductor is misleading This 1s because you set the surface reactance of the conductor to some large value say 1 000 000 ohms per square and the surface resistance to zero You may do this by selecting the Sense Metal definition when defining your metal type in the Metal Editor dialog box To access this dialog box select Circuit gt Metal Types from the main menu in the project editor then click on the Add button in the Metal Types dialog box which appears on your display 397 Sonnet User s Guide 398 You set the reactance to such a large value so that the sens
215. h away from the bends on the bottom that coupling between them is negligible The example on the right provides an inaccurate result because the coupling between two close transmission lines is eliminated by the subdivision n N sl 211 Sonnet User s Guide 212 The circuit shown below has coupled transmission lines on two different layers Once again it is correct to place a subdivision line perpendicular to the transmissions lines but not parallel to them Subdivision is valid for multi layer structures as long as the coupling across the subdivider is negligible sl s2 oT NNN KSSS Good Bad In the double stub circuit shown on the left the subdivision lines split the polygon perpendicular to the direction of current flow and far from any discontinuities The circuit on the right however shows the subdivision line splitting the bases of the two stubs which may be coupled Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision The subdivision line shown in the circuit on the right is wrong since the circuit is split in the middle of a via between layers In general subdivision lines should never be placed on top of discontinuities such as vias The subdivision line on the left is the correct placement Good Bad MG h The subdivision line shown in the circuit on the right splits a polygon at the box wall which is an illegal placement for a subdivision line It is illegal to subdivide polygons grounded to
216. h current can flow parallel to the X axis edges and parallel to the Y axis edges at the same time Conformal meshing can include only one of these currents Thus conformal meshing should only be used for transmission line geometries which have a line width that is small compared to wavelength Applying Conformal Meshing Conformal Meshing is applied as a property of a metal polygon To use conformal meshing for a polygon do the following 1 Select the desired polygon s by clicking or lassoing The selected polygons are highlighted 171 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Select Modify gt Metal Properties from the main menu The Metal Properties dialog box appears on your display Metalization Properties conformal son 2 x EN 1 8M Fill Type Conformal r Subsectioning Controls X Min pom Y Min en X Max o Y Max o 7 Edge Mesh Jon J Conformal Mesh Subsectioning Controls I Maximum Length mils 1 polygon selected Apply Cancel Help 3 Select Conformal in the Fill Type drop list 4 Click on the OK button to apply the changes and close the dialog box The polygon does not appear any different in the circuit To see the difference you need to use the Analysis gt Estimate Memory command When the Estimate Memory dialog box appears click on the View Subsections button Shown below is the subsectioning for the same spiral inductor The circuit on the left uses rectangular subsections and
217. h to re enter the settings Another reason that only part of your circuit is shown in the project editor may be that only part of the GDSII file was converted Every GDSII file contains structures structure may be referenced in another structure The GDSII file may even have multiple structures that have no relation to each other If a GDSII file contains multiple structures then you must select the structure you wish to convert If you select default then the conversion program must decide which structure to convert Typically most layout programs create the GDSII file with the first structure as the parent structure By default the GDSII translator converts the first structure in the GDSII file However your layout program may have created a GDSII file where the structure to convert is not the first structure In this case you must click on the Specify Structure option in the Structure dialog box then click on the Specify button When the list of available structures is opened select the desired structure then continue with the import 277 Sonnet User s Guide 278 Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface The Agilent interface constitutes an interface between Agilent s ADS circuit analysis program and Sonnet s suite of electromagnetic analysis tools You must have ADS version 1 3 or above to use the interface The software provides a menu driven package that can translate the layout of a design to the
218. h using previously generated data To demonstrate a netlist with a geometry project the two port T attenuator shown below will be analyzed Node 1 S parameter Node2 S parameter Node 3 43 3 43 3 l e file att res16 s2p file att res16 s2p 2 geometry project att_res67 son The two port T attenuator will be analyzed with em to demonstrate a combined electromagnetic circuit analysis 191 Sonnet User s Guide Pictured below is the geometry project att res67 son which is a 67 ohm thin film resistor This project is read by em and analyzed during the netlist analysis The results of the project analysis are used to compute the results for the netlist Transmission Line ER zm tete KX 28 o o e 2 3 XXX o tette A E T a d 5 Resistor EDT eS N ies o o Transmission Line The netlist project att combine son is shown below The project att combine son is available as part of the Att example for this chapter S2P 1 2 att res16 s2p S2P 2 3 att res16 s2p PRJ 2 0 att res67 son Hierarchy Sweep DEF2P 1 3 ATTEN Main Network Messages and Prompts Network None Line None The primary distinction between the netlist shown above and the previous netlist is that this netlist contains an instruction to perform a project analysis The PRJ keyword instructs em to run an electromagnetic analysis
219. h you enter the parameters later in the project editor External Layer File Once the mapping is specified you may wish to save the settings for subsequent imports of this GDSII file Click on the Save button to save your settings in a file It is recommended that you use a lay extension which is the default If you have an existing layer file with mapping settings for the GDSII file you are importing click on the Load button to select the layer file and load its contents in the dialog box Using Your Layout Program to Replace the Project Editor You may use any layout program that writes DXF or GDSII files as a replacement for the project editor When you do this you will probably want to convert the DXF or GDSII file without any translation in the coordinates Normally when either translator converts a file it moves the circuit to a convenient place for use in the project editor To convert a file without this translation select None from the Translation drop list in the Import Options dialog box The Import Options dialog box is opened by pressing the Options button in the Import window For more details see the DXF or GDSII translator in the project editor Help Tweaking the Circuit 272 Once the conversion is complete you need to tweak the circuit using the project editor Invoke the project editor and open the project with the converted DXF or GDSII file 1 Define metallization and dielectric layer parameters 2 R
220. he subprojects are created you may enter parameters in any of the geometries In fact it is possible to run optimizations on the main netlist project using a parameter in one of the subprojects 205 Sonnet User s Guide Performing circuit subdivision as a method of analysis should in general be done as follows 1 You should input as many of the circuit properties as possible before subdividing Dielectric layers dielectric brick and metal types grid size top cover height etc are inherited by the created geometry subprojects 2 Decide where to subdivide your circuit This step often requires exper tise and experience to avoid splitting the circuit at a junction where there is coupling across the subdivision line 3 Create the subdivision lines in the project editor These lines are used to create the subprojects A geometry project is created for each segment of your circuit These geometry projects contain significantly smaller geometries that may be analyzed faster using less memory 4 If you plan to take advantage of the netlist interpolation feature set up the analysis frequency controls as a coarse resolution of the entire desired frequency band in the project before subdividing Both the netlist and geometry subprojects all inherit these frequency specifica tions Entering these frequency controls now in the Analysis Setup dia log box saves having to enter them in each individual subproject 5 Subdivide the circuit in t
221. he X Max and Y Max parameters For example if X Max and Y Max are decreased to 1 then all subsections will be one cell This results in a much larger number of subsections and a very large matrix which are the cause of increased analysis time Thus this should be done only on small circuits where extremely high accuracy is required or you need a really smooth current density plot NOTE Chapter 4 Subsectioning If the maximum subsection size specified by X Max or Y Max is larger than the size calculated by the Max Subsection Size parameter the Max Subsection Size parameter takes priority The Max Subsection Size is discussed Setting the Maximum Subsection Size Parameter on page 68 Using the Speed Memory Control The Speed Memory Control allows you to control the memory usage for an analysis by controlling the subsectioning of your circuit The high memory settings produce a more accurate answer and usually increase processing time Conversely low memory settings run faster but do not yield as accurate an answer To access the Speed Memory Control follow the instructions below Select Analysis Setup from the project editor main menu In the Analysis Setup dialog box which appears click on the Speed Memory button In the Analysis Speed Memory Control dialog box which appears select the desired setting Analysis speed memory control dcblock son 2 x More Accurate Faster Analysis More Memory _ Less Memory J
222. he default location 93 Sonnet User s Guide 94 for the global library is in Sonnet Directory gt data library where Sonnet Directory gt is the directory in which your Sonnet software is installed You may choose to use this location or can save this library in another location The local library would usually be used as the user s own library of dielectric material definitions This library may be stored in a location of the user s choice You use the Dielectric Editor dialog box to add edit and delete entries to these libraries Using a Dielectric Material from a Dielectric Library To use a dielectric material from the metal library in your circuit do the following Select Circuit Dielectric Layers from the main menu of the project editor The Dielectric Layers dialog box is opened on your display This dialog box allows you to add edit and delete dielectric layers for your project Click on an existing dielectric layer to select it There are always two default dielectric layers in a new geometry project Click on the Above or Below button to add a dielectric layer to your project This opens the Dielectric Editor dialog box which allows you to define a dielectric layer or input a dielectric material from your library to use for the dielectric layer You could also have clicked on the Edit button which would open the presently selected layer in the Dielectric Editor dialog box The dielectric layer will be added abo
223. he first log is for a model which achieved the error threshold and the second log 375 Sonnet User s Guide is one in which the error threshold was not achieved on all the parameters A warning message is issued for all S parameters whose error is greater than the error threshold Generating files coup end lib and coup end predict snp Model Log for coup end Data set has 201 points and 4 ports Model Options Error threshold 0 5 Error Threshold Output predicted file C Program Files son N netWprojectNcoup end predict snp lt Curve Fit Data File Max order target 200 48 Maximum Order Model Results S11 Order 2 Error 0 03850722 S12 Order 2 Error 0 005954352 13 Order 2 Error 0 005379771 S14 Order 2 Error 0 02510101 22 Order 2 Error 0 001637623 Error values for S23 Order 2 Error 0 001033019 4 S parameters S24 Order 2 Error 0 005380005 533 Order 2 Error 0 001635971 534 Order 2 Error 0 005951772 44 Order 2 Error 0 03853657 Model Summary for coup end S parameter Maximum error was for 844 Error 0 038536 6 It greatest Total model time 0 391 seconds error Model coup end successful aw Indicates that the Error Threshold was achieved for all S parameters 376 Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis Generating files matchnet lib and matchnet predict snp Model
224. he frequency sweeps used in the subprojects It is also possible to impose the same frequency sweep on all the subprojects in a netlist For more informa tion about circuit subdivision see Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision Cascading S Y and Z parameter data files You can read and combine multiple sets of S Y and Z parameter data files This is particularly useful if you wish to combine results from another vendor s software for use in an 183 Sonnet User s Guide analysis by em When analyzing a netlist project em will automatically inter polate between frequencies ifthere are differences in the frequencies between the data files Inserting modeled elements into a circuit Modeled elements such as resis tors capacitors inductors and transmission lines can be combined with ge ometry subprojects and S Y and Z parameter data files Networks A netlist project contains a netlist which consists of one or more networks with elements connected together The netlist provides a map in which the ports of individual elements in the netlist are connected to the ports of other elements by the use of nodes Nodes represent a connection between netlist elements example net lt example net son TET olem x PRJ 1 2 steps son Hierarchy Sweep RES 23 R 25 0 CAP 3 C 02 PRJ 4 3 steps son Hierarchy Sweep DEF2P 1 4 example_net Main Network Use buttons or menus to modify netlist Network None Line
225. he metal box Ifthe sidewalls of the box are far away then this means port is measured with respect to the bottom of the box Therefore the method you use to simulate your coplanar line depends on how you are exciting it Each of the above cases should be simulated differently 1 Ungrounded Coplanar Add an extra air layer under the dielectric to move the bottom of the Sonnet box far enough away so it has no effect The sidewalls of the box should also be moved far away at least several line widths If the sidewalls and box bottom are far away using push pull ports should give the same answer as shorting the outer conductors to the box wall 2 Grounded Coplanar Do not use push pull ports Just connect the two outer conductors to the sidewall of the box the same sidewall to which the center conductor is connected This electrically connects them to the metal ground plane on the bottom of the substrate 3 Floating Coplanar Use push pull ports because the metal on the bottom of the substrate is not connected to the two outer conductors 4 Infinite Coplanar Since the two outer conductors are considered infi nitely wide this cannot be simulated with Sonnet However you can approximate this case by truncating the two outer conductors to a finite width Do not use push pull ports unless you have a floating coplanar Chapter 23 Coplanar Waveguide and Balanced Ports line as described in 3 Instead connect the ground conductors to th
226. he project editor to create the subprojects and netlist project which connects the individual subprojects in a network equivalent to the circuit as a whole Ports and reference planes are added to the subprojects as needed to connect to the larger circuit 6 Edit the subprojects to fine tune the geometries 1f needed Possible adjustments would include the use of a binary box adjusting the grid size setting z partitions for bricks changing the frequency sweep speci fication and adding parameters lt TP If you add parameters to a subproject in a netlist the parameters are not automat ically displayed in the netlist You must save the main netlist and re open it to dis play the parameters and make them available for editing 206 Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision 7 Set up the analysis controls in the netlist to use the complete set of desired analysis frequencies if the subprojects are already set to analyze the coarse frequency sweep When the analysis is performed on the master netlist project em interpolates between the frequency points in the subprojects saving processing time You may also use a Hierarchy Sweep in which the frequency band set up in the master netlist is imposed on the analyses of all the subprojects This is useful when additional accuracy is needed in the data and you do not wish to use interpolation This is accomplished by setting the Hier archy Sweep option in the Analysis Setup dialog box in the project ed
227. he substrate in terms of cells If a substrate is 128 x 64 cell each Fourier Transform is 128 x 64 elements Memory storage is required for only one Fourier Transform at a time and this is usually much smaller than the matrix being filled In this release the FFT has been improved for composite box sizes A composite number is not a prime number nor does it contain any large prime factors For example 1000 is a composite number because its largest prime factor 1s 5 But 998 is not a composite number because its largest prime factor is 499 So a 998 by 998 box might take 2 to 3 times longer in the FFT calculation portion of the analysis than a 1000 by 1000 box The FFT portion of the analysis is usually a small percentage of the total analysis time unless you have a lot of layers or an especially large box If either of these conditions are true then it might be worthwhile to use a composite number in your box size Chapter 27 Time Required for Analysis For all the above detail keep in mind that if the substrate is small less than 256x256 cells the Fourier Transform time 1s of little consequence Matrix fill time is proportional to the number of subsections squared for large circuits The number of subsections for a given cell size can be reduced by minimizing the number of vertices and the number of diagonal lines in the polygonal description of the circuit If the circuit is symmetric with no more than two ports with both ports on
228. her dielectric material including air For example dielectric bricks can be used to simulate structures such as an embedded capacitor in an air circuit layer or an air hole in a dielectric substrate circuit layer AN WARNING Misuse of dielectric bricks can lead to significantly inaccurate results It is highly recommended that you read this entire chapter before attempting to use dielectric bricks 331 Sonnet User s Guide Level 1 Level 0 Dielectric Brick Dielectric Layer Level 0 Metal Dielectric Layer Level 1 Metal gt Side View of Circuit shown above All realizable values for the dielectric constant loss tangent and bulk conductivity can be used Furthermore it is possible to set these parameters independently in each dimension to create anisotropic dielectric bricks Em is appropriate for simple structures using very localized dielectric bricks however when your design requires large areas of brick material you may need a full 3 D electromagnetic analysis tool 332 Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks You should also be aware that the use of dielectric bricks can dramatically increase the memory requirements and thus the simulation time for your circuit Bricks should only be used where strictly necessary for the accuracy of your simulation Care should be taken when using dielectric bricks since improper modeling of your dielectric brick can yield highly inaccurat
229. hkthru 326 3 D 301 timing 407 tool bar 109 306 tool box 101 TOP 289 top cover 393 394 resistive 401 top hemisphere 353 Touchstone 280 TRACE 275 transferring files 276 translation issues Microwave Office 255 Translation of entire design 281 selected portions of design 281 Translation procedures 282 Translator preferences 287 EXT 287 LAYER 288 NUM X GRIDS 287 NUM Y GRIDS 287 translators 24 Agilent 24 DXF 24 GDSII 24 transmission line parameters 152 transmission lines 184 structures 194 triangle subsection 299 300 triangular subsections 352 Tripat 350 troubleshooting DXF file error message 273 GDSII file error message 276 two port T attenuator 191 U UCS 275 ungrounded internal ports 194 197 uninstall Microwave Office Interface 223 units specifying 272 unlocking Microwave Office 263 UPPER LAYER 291 292 user interface 33 V Valid instances 285 291 variables EXTMAX 275 EXTMIN 275 LIMMAX 275 LIMMIN 275 Index header 275 vertical components 351 vertical orientation 214 via 314 via loss 89 via polygons 269 271 via ports 111 312 via posts 305 vias 269 271 301 conical 314 deleting 310 example 314 ground 314 inside dielectric bricks 334 loss 89 311 restrictions 302 subsections 305 symbol 305 to ground 306 via posts 305 VIEW 275 view metalization levels 306 VIEWPORT 275 VPORT 275 W The Wall 410 warnings 199 waveguide simulator 344 wavelength 52 what s new 33 wire an
230. hould be valid for any electromagnetic analysis which uses roof top subsectioning Notice that the quantities used for the error estimate are in terms of cells not subsections Cells are the smallest possible subsections size In Sonnet subsections in the corners of polygons are one cell on a side Subsections along the edge of polygons are one cell wide and can be many cells long Interior subsections can be many cells in both dimensions We have found that for most cases the cell size is the important parameter in determining error Or in other words the smallest subsection size is important For example the stripline benchmark geometry projects mentioned before are set to make the lines 16 cells wide even though those 16 cells may be merged into only 4 or 5 subsections It is the 16 cells which determine the level of error not the 4 or 5 subsections In performing this error evaluation we also found that the error in characteristic impedance due to Nyy is always high never low Also there is very little variation in the error for different impedance lines The above equation can be very accurate in evaluating error And finally for Nj above about 40 cells per wavelength all the error is in the characteristic impedance The error in velocity of propagation is essentially zero The above equation can be very accurate in evaluating error With this precise knowledge of the error we can now do something about it 405 Sonnet U
231. hown below and are available from the Sonnet examples amp RAAY ds oo 2 Lec ANS je un EID EET Ee QV TTI Se Fated ie EA et A nei i most tt 3 SSI N et OX pons PO PODOQUOOQ s WENN TE H Elo i L p A co planar waveguide short A co planar waveguide cross circuit Cosht_sy junction Cocross Notice that the ground ports have been labeled with a negative number e g 1 while the signal ports are labeled with positive numbers e g 1 This represents a balanced port Any number of ports can have the same positive or negative labels This is done in the project editor by selecting the ports in question and opening the Port Attributes dialog box by selecting Modify Port Properties Em sums the total current going into all the positive ports with the same port number and sets that equal to the total current going out of all the ports with that same negative port number Thus the name balanced or push pull port Note that we end the width of the ground lines just before they would have touched the sidewall If the side of the ground line touches the side wall it shorts out to the sidewall thus allowing ground current to return via the sidewall instead of through the ground line This defeats the purpose of the balanced port Be sure that your ground lines touch the sidewall only at the location of negative port numbers when using balanced ports Chapter 23 Coplanar Waveguide and Balanced Ports The curr
232. i tor 8 Analyze the netlist project The data response for the netlist project pro vides analysis results that may be used for the whole circuit 9 It is often a good idea after analyses are complete on the resultant sub projects to check the response data to verify that data was calculated for enough frequency points to provide accurate interpolated data Since it is possible for a netlist project to include a netlist subproject it is possible to use double subdivision After subdividing your initial circuit you then may use subdivision on one of the resulting geometry subprojects In this case you would need to change the name on the appropriate PRJ line from the old geometry subproject to the new netlist subproject Choosing Subdivision Line Placement As mentioned above the difficult part in using circuit subdivision is to decide where to place your subdivision lines to split the circuit The subdivision lines should be placed between polygons which have negligible coupling Places on the circuit where a high degree of coupling or rapidly varying currents are present should be kept within an individual subproject 207 Sonnet User s Guide The de embedding of the port discontinuity in Sonnet is done by essentially modeling infinitely long transmission lines at the port This allows transmission lines to be subdivided with very little loss of accuracy This includes microstrip lines stripline and coupled lines including c
233. ibrary by clicking on the appropriate radio button in the Metal Library dialog box If you wish to select a new library file click on the Specify button to the right of the radio button browse for the desired file For instructions on setting up a library see Setting Up a Metal Library page 88 Once a library is selected a list of metal types in the library should appear in the dialog box To add a metal type click on the Add button The Metal Editor dialog box 1s opened Enter the desired name and loss parameters in the Metal Editor dialog box then click on OK to add a new metal to the library This metal type is now available in the library to be used in any future projects If you wish to use the metal type in your present project you must add the library metal as a metal type to your project The thickness parameter is optional when defining a metal type in your library but is a required field if you add the metal type to your project to be used in your circuit To edit an existing metal click on its entry to select it then click on the Edit button The Metal Editor dialog box 1s opened with the present name and parameters for the metal type 87 Sonnet User s Guide 88 Make any desired changes then click on the OK button The Metal Editor dialog box is closed and any changes are updated in the metal type s entry line To delete a metal type from your metal library click on the Metal Type to select it a
234. ich in turn can corrupt the results The third type of port is the via port A via port has one terminal connected to a polygon on a given circuit level and the other terminal connected to a second polygon on a circuit level above the first polygon Em cannot de embed a via port A via port is most commonly used when you wish to attach a port between two adjacent levels in your circuit or when you want a port to go up to the box cover rather than down to ground The last type of port is the auto grounded port The auto grounded port is used in the interior of a circuit and has one terminal attached to the edge of a metal polygon and the other terminal attached to the ground plane through all intervening dielectric layers Em can de embed an auto grounded port For more details and the restrictions on using auto grounded ports see Automatic Grounded Ports page 112 Ports of any type are not allowed on diagonal lines and are not allowed to overlap each other just touching is permitted The analysis engine tests for these error conditions Each port type is described in more detail in the sections that follow as well as Issues pertaining to all port types such as port numbering and impedance Chapter 6 Ports Standard Box Wall Ports A standard box wall port is a grounded port with one terminal attached to a polygon edge coincident with a box wall and the second terminal attached to ground An example of a standard box wall port is
235. ide command will all inherit the analysis setup After subdividing you will need to enter the desired finer frequency step size in the master netlist project before analyzing it In addition you will need to turn off Hierarchy Sweep The figure below shows a Smith chart with a circuit analyzed at five frequency points next to the same circuit analyzed at only two points As you can see using only two data points would result in more interpolating error than using five data points Whether or not two data points is acceptable depends upon the proximity of points A and B If A and B are very close then two data points are sufficient If A and B are far away then five or more data points should be used KH SSS K AN It is always a good idea to check the Smith chart for the response data of your subprojects to ensure that you have chosen enough freguency points at which to calculate data so that any interpolated data is reasonably accurate 217 Sonnet User s Guide Subdividing Your Circuit The actual subdividing of your circuit into separate geometry subprojects and a master netlist project is performed by the software You enter the desired names for the master netlist and geometry subprojects You may also automatically add feedlines of lossless metal to any ports generated in the subprojects Feedlines should be added when discontinuities contained in sections of your source circuit need to be moved away from the boxwall
236. ied dielectric layers are considered but the effect of any circuit metallization and loss parameters are not To access the Box Resonance Estimator select Analysis Estimate Box Resonances from the project editor main menu The Box Resonances dialog box appears on your display An example is shown below Box Resonances package son x Box resonances estimated for package son Calculation based on lossless empty cavity Only lowest order modes considered 30 09 GHz TE Mode 0 1 2 31 76 GHz TE Mode 0 1 3 The Box Resonance Estimator displays not only the resonant freguencies contained in the simulation freguency range but also tells the user the particular mode type It is sophisticated enough to realize that when Symmetry is enabled for a circuit that Even Y modes will not exist NOTE Chapter 24 Package Resonances In this particular instance two Transverse Electric TE modes exist in or around the desired frequency range The Box Resonance Estimator will detect Transverse Magnetic TM modes as well For a complete description of propagation modes please refer to any classic field theory textbook The Box Resonance Estimator only checks the primary structure not the de embedding calibration standards Box Resonances Simple Removal In the preceding section we have described several ways to detect box resonances within a structure We would now like to offer some advice as to how to remove them when they are
237. ield radiation patterns in one of three formats Cartesian plot polar plot or surface plot Program module patvu GDSII Translator DXF Translator Agilent Interface Microwave Office Interface Cadence Virtuoso Interface Broadband Spice Extractor Chapter 1 Introduction The GDSII translator provides bidirectional translation of GDSII layout files to from the Sonnet project editor geometry format Program module gds The DXF translator provides bidirectional translation of DXF layout files such as from AutoCAD to from the Sonnet project editor geometry format Program module dxfgeo The Agilent Interface provides a seamless translation capability between Sonnet and Agilent EEsof Series IV and Agilent EEsof ADS From within the Series IV or ADS Layout package you can directly create Sonnet geometry files Em simulations can be invoked and the results incorporated into your design without leaving the Series IV or ADS environment Program module ebridge The Microwave Office Interface provides a seamless incorporation of Sonnet s world class EM simulation engine em into the Microwave Office environment using Microwave Office s EM Socket You can take advantage of Sonnet s accuracy without having to learn the Sonnet interface Although for advanced users who wish to take advantage of powerful advanced features not presently supported in the integrated environment the partnership of AWR and Sonnet has simplified
238. ield an intuitive understanding of a design Instead the Broadband Spice Extractor feature generates a model that can be used in Spice as a black box representing the broad band behavior of your circuit as shown below This type of model will be referred to as the Broadband Spice model filter olb This chapter describes how to use Sonnet to automatically synthesize PI Model N Coupled Line Model and Broadband Spice Model files The PI and N Coupled Line capabilities are useful for circuits which are small with respect to the wavelength at the highest frequency of interest This includes structures such as discontinuities like step tee and cross junctions Other applications include modeling cross talk and propagation delay in digital interconnect circuits and multiple spectrum circuits that combine digital analog and RF functions The Broadband Spice model is fitted over a wide frequency band and can be used in circuit simulators for AC sweeps and transient simulations Broadband Spice Extractor is only available if you have purchased a license from Sonnet which includes the Broadband Spice Extractor feature Please see your system administrator if you are unsure ofthe availability of this option 361 Sonnet User s Guide PI Spice Model 362 Specifying an optional PI Model Spice output file automatically takes the results of the electromagnetic analysis of a circuit and synthesizes a model using inductors capacitors
239. ield viewer does not support dielectric bricks Circuits containing dielectric bricks can be analyzed with the far field viewer but the radiation effects of the dielectric bricks are not accounted for in the analysis 334 Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks The Agilent Translator ebridge The Agilent translator does not create dielectric bricks Dielectric Brick Concepts Creating a Dielectric Brick To create a dielectric brick in the project editor do the following 1 Move to the circuit level where the base of the dielectric brick is to be located The dielectric brick that is created will rest on this circuit level and will extend upward to the next level Dielectric bricks can be placed on any level including the ground plane If a brick is placed on the highest circuit level level 0 it will extend up to the top cover of the metal box 2 Createa base polygon which defines the cross section of the brick This is done by selecting either Tools Add Dielectric Brick gt Draw Rectangle or Tools Add Dielectric Brick Draw Polygon from the project editor s main menu The first option allows the vertices of arbitrarily shaped base polygons to be entered on a point by point basis This option is used to create dielectric bricks with any cross sectional shape However if the cross section is rectangular in shape it is often quicker to create dielectric bricks using the second option Viewing Dielectric Bricks Once a di
240. iew c program files sonnet 9 0 project steps son Run 1 Sun Apr 27 21 08 57 2003 Frequency Sweep Combinations Em version 9 0 on GANDALF Windows local Frequency sweep 1 Frequency 1 GHz De embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format 511 21 S12 22 1 00000000 0 059597 95 41 0 998223 5 653 0 998223 5 653 0 059597 95 89 IC P1 F 1 0 Eeff 6 42019288 0 0 Z0 45 3289767 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 12080299 1 lt P2 F 1 0 Eeff 6 0501938 0 0 Z0 73 6308935 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 0451656 Frequency 1 1 GHz De embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format 511 S21 S12 22 1 10000000 0 065535 95 95 0 997850 6 218 0 997850 6 218 0 065535 96 48 IC P1 F 1 1 Eeff 6 42072925 0 0 Z0 45 3274146 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 12079654 IC P2 F 1 1 Eeff 6 0505092 0 0 Z0 73 6294597 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 04516343 Freguency sweep 2 Freguency 10 GHz De embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format 511 21 12 S22 10 0000000 0 513865 141 5 0 857871 53 90 0 857871 53 90 0 513865 146 3 K P1 F 10 0 Eeff f6 67630353 0 01 Z0 144 7336997 0 01 R 0 0 C 0 11775332 Log Type Response E 42 The de embedded results of a steps son analysis shown in the project log Chapter 3 Important Options and Concepts T Log View c program files sonnet 9 0 project steps son Run 1 Sun Apr 27 21 18 22 2003 Frequency Sweep Combinations Em version 9 0 on GANDALF Windows local Frequency sweep 1 Frequency 1 GHz The non de No
241. ifying data ranges for the chosen parameters e Specifying the maximum number of iterations Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project Care should be taken when setting the nominal values for the parameters to be optimized The optimizer starts at the nominal values and converges to the minima which is closest to those nominal values Thus it is highly recommended that you perform some pre analysis prior to doing the optimization to ensure that the nominal values are in the right value range when the optimizer is started Otherwise the optimizer may converge to a local minima for which the error is not the minimum achievable value as pictured below Error Function Local Minima Actual Minimum Parameter Values You specify a goal by identifying a particular measurement and what value you desire it to be For example S4 lt 20 dB Keep in mind that the goals you specify may not be possible to satisfy Em finds the solution with the least error You may also specify a goal by equating a measurement in one network to a measurement in another network or file For example you may set S for network Model equal to S4 for network Measured Likewise you may equate S j for network Model to S4 for data file meas s2p You may select one or multiple parameters to optimize For each parameter that you select you must specify minimum and maximum bounds The analysis limits the paramet
242. in the results file Eeff Effective dielectric constant of the transmission line connected to the port Z0 TEM equivalent characteristic impedance of the transmission line in ohms R Equivalent series resistance of port discontinuity in ohms C Equivalent series capacitance of port discontinuity in pF 128 Chapter 7 De embedding De embedding Error Codes Please see De embedding Error Codes in online help for explanations of the error code messages To access online help select Help Contents from any Sonnet application 129 Sonnet User s Guide 130 Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines The previous chapter describes the basics of de embedding what it is how it is enabled and what it does when enabled This chapter presents guidelines for obtaining good de embedded results Calibration Standards In order to determine the port discontinuity as described on page 122 Sonnet must electromagnetically analyze several calibration standards which include the same port discontinuity as the primary circuit For a single box wall port the calibration standards are two through lines which have the same geometry width dielectrics distance to box wall etc as the polygon which has the port attached to it Sonnet then builds and analyzes two through lines based on this geometry If there is more than one port on a box wall then the calibration standard is a multiple coupled line
243. inductance Ls always set to zero If you are using the Native Editor Sonnet s project editor the metal types retain their definition in the Sonnet project but when they are displayed in Microwave Office they will have their parameters converted to the three parameters Rdc Rrf and Xdc The parameters being used in Sonnet are not displayed The metal type appears using the same name in the Microwave Office project browser under Materials in the EM Structure folder and under metal types in Sonnet s project editor 258 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Shown below is the Metal Types dialog box in Sonnet with three additional metals defined and the same materials represented in Microwave Office Note that the three metals use the Normal model in Sonnet which is converted to the Rdc Rrf and Xdc parameters for Microwave Office iMetalTypes lowpassfilterson CR Types low pass filter son iMetalTypes lowpassfilterson CR Metal for New alee Lossless bd Add Silver Cnd 6 17e7 T 2 CR 0 Tantalum Cnd 6 45e6 T 2 CR 0 Edit W EM Structures amp Materials Aluminum Rdc 0 0134409 Rrf 3 25768e 007 S Perfect Conductor ED Silver Rdc 0 00810373 Rrf 2 52952e 007 E Tantalum Rde 0 0775194 Rrf 7 82348e 007 lt OK Apply Cancel Help X Information Loss If you define a metal type in Sonnet which is not l
244. ion in the Advanced Options dialog box in the project editor Note that this checkbox is disabled if an Adaptive Sweep ABS is selected in the Analysis Setup dialog box 43 Sonnet User s Guide 44 MFC pre computes frequency independent data and stores it on your hard disk This data is later recalled while the simulation is performed By storing and reusing the data in this manner MFC significantly reduces the required matrix fill time In standard em analyses matrix fill is completely re computed at each frequency Thus if you are analyzing at a large number of frequencies greater than four and if matrix fill time is appreciable for your circuit enabling MFC will speed up your analysis Since an analysis executes in either the same or less time this option should always be used except when cache disk space is unavailable The MFC technique does require some time to pre compute the frequency independent data Because of this pre computation time MFC does not provide any advantage when you simulate at four or fewer frequencies If you set up an analysis to run at four or fewer frequencies and you check the Multi Frequency Caching run option em will automatically disable MFC for the simulation Circuits for which the matrix fill time is large will benefit the most from MFC Characteristics of such circuits include e Circuits with a large number of cells in the X and Y dimensions e Circuits with a large number of metallization
245. ironment and the Microwave Office environment Deleting a metal type from the Sonnet project does not automatically delete it from the EM Structures Materials list in Microwave Office Port Mapping Microwave Office only allows consecutive numbering for ports starting at the value of one The port number must be a positive integer Sonnet allows you to have non consecutive and duplicate port numbers and allows you to use negative port numbers Sonnet s analysis engine em sums the total current going into all the positive ports with the same port number and sets that equal to the total current going out of all the ports with that same negative port number When the EM Structure is sent to Sonnet from Microwave Office Sonnet uses the port numbers sent by Microwave Office so there is no issue in going from Microwave Office to Sonnet If you are using Sonnet in Native Editor mode in which you may edit the EM Structure using Sonnet s project editor you may enter non consecutive as well as negative port numbers Any port number entered in Sonnet will be retained as part of the Sonnet project file saved in the Microwave Office project but will only be displayed correctly in the Sonnet environment The ports are mapped from Sonnet to Microwave Office by mapping the ports in Sonnet in ascending order and deleting negative and duplicate ports to a consecutive order which may be Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface displayed in Microwave Office Fo
246. is error code indicates that em has detected bad values for E g and Zp 138 Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines Higher Order Transmission Line Modes De embedding removes the port discontinuity and the connecting length of transmission line The de embedding assumes that there is only one mode propagating on the connecting transmission line usually the fundamental quasi TEM mode If higher order modes are propagating the de embedded results are not valid The same is true for actual physical measurements If this 1s the case we strongly recommend using a thinner substrate unless for some reason multi mode operation is desired Even when higher order microstrip modes are evanescent there can still be problems If the port is so close to the discontinuity of interest that their fringing evanescent fields interact the de embedding looses validity Again this is a problem which also arises in an actual physical measurement if the device to be de embedded is too close to the fixture connector 139 Sonnet User s Guide 140 Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS The Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS technique provides a fine resolution response for a frequency band requiring only a small number of analysis points Em performs a full analysis at a few points and uses the resulting internal or cache data to synthesize a fine resolution band TIP This technique in most cases
247. is zero The second parameter is the skin effect coefficient Ry p Em multiplies this number by the square root of the frequency in Hertz to yield the Ohms sguare value at high frequency The equations for Rpc and Rpg are Roc l of Rrp Skin effect coefficient Tu o where o is the bulk conductivity in mhos meter t is the metalization thickness in meters and u 4x x 1077 H m Typical values for Rpc and Rpg are 0 004 and 3e 7 If you start getting very strange loss results check Rgp paying special attention to the exponent Em also properly models the transition between electrically thin low frequency and electrically thick high frequency conductors The transition frequency from Rpc to Rrg is the square of Rpc Rpr At this frequency and a relatively narrow band around it both coefficients are important If the skin effect coefficient Rgp is set to 0 0 then the value of Rpc is used over all frequencies This is the usual case for resistors The above equation for Rgp assumes that all of the current travels on just one side of the conductor This is a good approximation for some microstrip circuits However if the current really travels on both sides this gives a pessimistic value for the loss The equation should be modified for other structures Stripline for example has current of equal amplitude on both the top and bottom of the conductor In this case you should divide the Rgg value by two while maintaining
248. ith the new dimensions New and user defined instances The Agilent interface translates most of the existing planar circuit elements The software can check each instance against a list of instances that it knows it can handle prior to translation This feature is turned off by default If you experience problems with translation you should enable this feature See TEST VALID page 294 for the keyword needed to use this feature If an instance is not found on this list the software issues a warning message and ignores the instance Instances identified in this manner will be placed in a file called bad instances in the project directory The list of valid instances is located in the file SSONNET DIR ebridge defaults valid instances If a file called valid instances is located in your project directory it will be read and appended to the list If your company has certain user defined instances that you would like to translate just add them to the list and try them out If they do not translate correctly or cause errors in the software remove them from the list Sonnet Software cannot guarantee compatibility with these instances If you are using custom instances such as with smart libraries closely review the LAYER CAP LAYER and BRIDGE LAYER statements in the preference file Using these statements can add a lot of power to translating your custom instances 285 Sonnet User s Guide The Preference File The Agilent interface
249. ject Tripat is available in the Sonnet examples For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button The chart below shows the result We see that the low VSWR points of each patch have differences between measured and calculated of about 1 This is typical of most analyses of patch antennas using this technique The differences in resonant frequency i e the reflection zeros then determine the differences in the rest of the plot The degree to which these differences are due to analysis error fabrication error and measurement error cannot be determined from this data i tripat son tripat measured snp EARME Cartesian Plot Z0 50 0 a0 Left Axis tripat None M 25 MAG VSWR1 a tripat measured None g 204 MAG VSWR1 n 154 Right Axis t em empty u 104 d e 5 0 2 2 1 22 23 24 25 26 Sonnet Software Inc Freguency GHz Click mouse to readout data values Pointer The measured and calculated data for the triple patch antenna were obtained completely separately so there was no chance to tweak the model for agreement If the typical differences between measured and calculated data shown above are acceptable given the specific reguirements for a particular project then the Open Waveguide Simulator technigue can provide useful results 350 Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation Far Field Viewer
250. knowns The right picture shows the conformal sections created by using conformal fill resulting in only about 130 subsections Note that each conformal section shown represents multiple subsections Conformal sections like standard subsections are comprised of cells so that the actual metalization still shows a jagged edge when the polygon has a smooth edge as pictured below However the sections can be much larger due to conformal meshing You may now make the underlying grid sufficiently small to accurately resolve challenging circuit dimensions without incurring excessive memory and analysis time requirements U S Patent No 6 163 762 issued December 19 2000 170 Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh Conformal meshing should be used in places where it will reduce subsection count For rectangular polygons with no diagonal or curved edges it is more efficient to use rectangular subsections default However if a polygon contains a curved edge conformal meshing provides a quicker analysis For a discussion on subsectioning when using Conformal Mesh see Conformal Mesh Subsectioning on page 69 Use Conformal Meshing for Transmission Lines Not Patches Conformal meshing assumes most of the current is flowing parallel to the edge of the conformal subsection This works well for transmission lines However this is usually not accurate for geometries like patch antennas For large areas of metal in both x and y directions hig
251. l you may need to model it with multiple layers to achieve an accurate analysis Creating the Vias 302 Vias may be added to your circuit in a number of ways Both the direction and type of via is chosen in the Tools gt Add Via menu The default may be set to go up one level down one level or down to ground through multiple layers if necessary Vias may be edge vias rectangular vias via polygons or circular vias Via Direction A via which goes up one level extends from the level of metalization to which it is added up through the dielectric layer to the level of metalization above it For example if you draw a via on level 2 with the direction set to Up One Level Tools Add Via Up One Level the via extends from level 2 up through the dielectric to level 1 of your circuit A via which goes down one level extends from the level of metalization to which it is added down through the dielectric layer to the next level of metalization For example you draw a via on level 0 with the direction set to Down One Level Tools Add Vias gt Down One Level The via extends from level 0 through the dielectric layer to metalization level 1 A via which goes down to ground extends from the level of metalization to which it is added through all intervening levels until it reaches the ground bottom of the enclosing box For example a circuit with 5 dielectric layers has four metalization Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures levels
252. l become the default for all metalization in all EM Structures in your Microwave Office project This setting may be changed locally for a particular EM Structure see Setting Sonnet Fill Type Locally page 234 or even for an individual polygon see Setting Sonnet Fill Type for a Single Polygon page 235 Click on the OK button to apply the changes and close the Property Pages The fill type will default to your selection whenever a new EM Structure is created in this Microwave Office project 233 Sonnet User s Guide 234 Setting Sonnet Fill Type Locally 1 Right click on the desired EM Structure name in the project browser and select Options from the pop up menu which appears The Options property pages appear on your display Click on the Mesh tab in the property pages The property pages should appear similar to the graphic below Options General Frequencies Layout Drawing Mesh Sonnet Options Meshing Density Sonnet ptions O Low Conformal Mesh Normal O High O No variable mesh Diagonal Fill Cells per subsection limits X max Y max 100 100 If the Project Defaults checkbox is selected click on it to clear it When this checkbox is selected then the Global settings are used Clearing this checkbox allows you to make selections for this particular EM Structure Click on the desired checkbox Conformal Mesh or Diagonal Fill to use that cell fill type for
253. l multiple of a half wavelength For example at an extremely low frequency the electrical length of the reference plane or calibration standard may be a fraction ofa degree 1 e zero half wavelengths In this case the analysis 1s unable to accurately evaluate the electrical length and especially the characteristic impedance At some point as the length of the reference plane or calibration standard approaches a multiple of a half wavelength em is able to determine that the calculated values of E g and Zo are becoming corrupt When this occurs em outputs the error message undefined nl in place of the E and Zo values see De embedding Error Codes in online help Note however that while em is unable to determine E and Zo the de embedded S parameter results are still perfectly valid Reference Plane Lengths Greater than One Wavelength If the length of the reference plane or calibration standard is more than one wavelength incorrect E pp results might be seen However the S parameters are still completely valid Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines Em s calculation of E g is based on phase length If the reference plane or calibration standard is say 365 degrees long em first calculates E jr based on a phase length of 5 degrees However em has some smarts built in If a non physical result is seen em increases the calculated phase length by 360 degrees at a time until physical i e E p gt 1 0 results are obtai
254. layer of dielectric with the same thickness as the thick metal Then place a polygon representing the wider bottom side of the thick metal on the bottom side of that dielectric layer This polygon should use the Normal model for the metal type which is modeled as a zero thickness metal To get the proper loss you should set the thickness of this metal type to one half the total thickness of the metal This compensates for the fact that current is now flowing through two conductors instead of the usual single conductor ASN The wide bottom of the trapezoidal line is made up of a polygon using the Normal model for the metal type This is a zero thickness metal 325 Sonnet User s Guide 326 Then place a polygon representing the top side of the thick metal on the bottom side of that dielectric layer using the Thick Metal metal type Make this polygon as thick as the dielectric layer Thick metal polygon on level 1 where it is drawn and placed on top of the wider zero thickness polygon The same polygon shown on level 0 Since the thick polygon is the same thickness as the dielectric layer the metal also appears on this level Only the outline of the zero thickness metal is shown on this level Next place any desired ports on the thick metal polygon not on the thin metal polygon Since the thick metal polygon is placed on top of the zero thickness polygon the two are connected electrically and the port is across both poly
255. layers e Circuits with vias e Circuits with polygons using diagonal fill e Circuits with polygons for which XMIN YMIN is greater than 1 It is important to remember that MFC only reduces the matrix fill time MFC has no affect on the matrix solve time MFC saves time by writing data to your hard disk and reusing that data later Therefore you need to have hard disk space available in order to use MFC When em begins a simulation with MFC enabled it displays the amount of disk space required and where the data will be stored In general if you have disk space available it is recommended that you always run with MFC enabled MFC will not slow the simulation down If you wish to change the location where em will store the data select File gt Preferences from the project editor main menu and enter a new disk location in the Cache Directory dialog box You may also set a Cache Limit in the same preferences window This limit sets the maximum amount of disk space that you Chapter 3 Important Options and Concepts will allow em to use for MFC Ifa particular simulation exceeds this limit em will automatically disable MFC for that simulation For details on how to set the location and limit the amount of memory see File Preferences in the project editor s online help When MFC is enabled em displays a message similar to the following Multi frequency caching enabled below fjr GHz This frequency is the maximum frequen
256. lectric layer in the Dielectric Layers dialog box Enter the desired number of copies in the Number of Copies text entry box You may enter multiple dielectric layers at one time by using this field Each dielectric layer will be of the thickness specified here and use the same loss parameters Click on the OK button in the Dielectric Editor dialog box The Dielectric Editor dialog box is closed and an entry for the dielectric layer just entered appears in the list in the Dielectric Layers dialog box 95 Sonnet User s Guide 96 11 Click on the OK button in the Dielectric Layers dialog box to close the box and apply the changes This completes adding a dielectric layer using a dielectric material from the library Editing a Dielectric Library You use the Dielectric Library dialog box to add edit or delete entries from your dielectric library To edit a dielectric library do the following Select Circuit Dielectric Layers from the main menu of the project editor The Dielectric Layers dialog box is opened on your display This dialog box allows you to add edit and delete dielectric material for your project Click on the Library button to edit your dielectric libraries This opens the Dielectric Library dialog box which allows you to create dielectric libraries and to edit them Select My Library or Global library by clicking on the appropriate radio button in the Dielectric Library dialog box If you wish to select
257. list 2 Em reads the netlist project which contains circuit and analysis control information This includes S Y and Z parameter data files modeled elements geometry subprojects project elements and network ele ments 3 Em uses the analysis controls input as part of the netlist project to run each electromagnetic analysis invoked by the network file It is possible to configure the analysis controls in such a way that geometry sub projects are analyzed using their own analysis controls Netlist sub projects always inherit their analysis controls from the present netlist 4 Once the analysis of geometry subprojects 1s complete em performs the circuit analysis specified in the netlist 185 Sonnet User s Guide 5 Em combines the electromagnetic results with the circuit results to obtain the desired output results Note that the above sequence of steps is generalized for analyses which include both electromagnetic and circuit analysis In cases where the overall analysis is restricted to either electromagnetic analysis or circuit analysis some of the steps are omitted Creating a Netlist 186 You create a netlist using the project editor To create a new netlist select File gt New Netlist from the main menu of the project editor The project editor tool bar and menus change for the netlist editor to allow you to add elements and networks to your netlist The initial netlist file contains a default two port network named
258. ll ofthe y directed subsections are still included in the analysis though their current is almost zero This wastes subsections memory and time To remove the transverse subsections in the project editor select Circuits Parallel Subsections Then select a side and either specify a length in the text entry box or use the mouse to specify the length for which parallel subsections are to be excluded The transverse subsections are parallel to the side of the box being referenced This option should be used carefully Here are a few rules e Never remove subsections for lengths greater than 1 4 to 1 2 wavelength e Remove subsections only from transmission lines with very small transverse currents such as feed lines For example do not remove subsections from discontinuities lines that change in width or regions where structures approach one another e Since this option affects all drawing levels in the project editor check all levels for possible problems Chapter 4 Subsectioning Chapter 4 Subsectioning The Sonnet subsectioning is based on a uniform mesh indicated by the small dots in the project editor screen The small dots are placed at the corners of a cell One or more cells are automatically combined together to create subsections Cells may be square or rectangular any aspect ratio but must be the same over your entire circuit The cell size is specified in the project editor in the Box Settings dialog box whi
259. ll to On the via subsections called via posts are also displayed in reverse video as shown below Via posts shown in reverse The via is indicated by video with cell fill on only triangles and an outline when cell fill is off When em subsections the circuit it subsections each edge via or via polygon into subsectional vias called via posts Each via post is a rectangular cylinder of current extending between the present level to the next level above or below 305 Sonnet User s Guide depending on the direction of the via A via post has a horizontal cross sectional area equal to one cell and a height equal to the thickness of the dielectric layer If you change the cell size then the via is resubsectioned into via posts with the new cell size The project editor places enough via posts to cover the entire length of the polygon edge for an edge via and the complete perimeter of a via polygon A via with the via posts detailed is illustrated on page 307 To view vias as they are being captured it is convenient to be able to change the viewed level in the project editor quickly To do so just type Ctrl U to go up one level towards the box top or Ctrl D to go down one level You may also click on the Up One Level or Down One Level button on the tool bar in the project editor Most keyboards also support the up and down arrow keys If you want a level to be displayed as a ghost outline whenever you are
260. lor fill pattern assigned to each brick material and whether the material is isotropic or anisotropic To modify the settings for a particular dielectric brick material edit that materials text entry boxes Note that for anisotropic materials all the parameters do not fit in the dialog box simultaneously so that it is necessary to use the scroll bars to access all settings Brick Materials x Default for Dielectric Diel Cond add bricks LossTan S m mmm Air 0 0 0 0 SiN 0 0 0 0 22224 Alumina 0 0 0 0 Remove Edit 230 337 Sonnet User s Guide Ifthe brick type is isotropic only one set of parameters X will be set Conversely if the brick material is set to anisotropic each parameter is defined separately for the X Y and Z dimensions If you wish to make a brick material anisotropic click on the Ani checkbox The default material used when new dielectric bricks are created can also be set in the Brick Materials dialog box Select a brick type from the Default for add bricks drop list Once the default material has been set all bricks created thereafter will be made of that material Changing Brick Materials The material type for bricks that already exist in a circuit can be changed by following the procedure given below 1 Select the brick s by clicking on it or lassoing it The brick is highlighted 2 Select Modify Brick Materials from the main menu of the project editor This
261. ls 4 Chapter 4 Subsectioning cells and 8 cells wide With edge mesh on the subsections for the same polygon would be 1 cell 4 cells and 8 cells as shown in the illustration below Notice only the outermost edge is affected Cell by 1 Cell on corner M Cell Size X A portion of circuit metal showing how em combines cells into subsections for polygons with edge mesh on with X Min 2 and Y Min 1 Edge mesh polygons always have 1 cell wide edge subsections As mentioned in the previous section the edge mesh setting only affects Manhattan polygons i e those with no diagonal or curved edges Edge mesh is always on for non Manhattan polygons regardless of the edge mesh setting for that polygon 63 Sonnet User s Guide 64 When used in conjunction with large X Min or Y Min values the edge mesh option can be very useful in reducing the number of subsections but still maintaining the edge singularity as shown in a simple example below This is very often a good compromise between accuracy and speed In the case pictured above X Min and Y Min are set to be very large and the frequency is low enough so that the Max Subsection size parameter corresponds to a subsection size that is larger than the polygon Using X Max and Y Max for an Individual Polygon You may control the maximum subsection size of individual polygons by using t
262. lt for an ABS analysis to converge The freguency band for an adaptive sweep should not contain multiple box resonances If multiple box resonances are present the number of discrete full analysis points goes up dramatically and 151 Sonnet User s Guide 152 synthesis of the data becomes very difficult If you do not know how to identify box resonances see Chapter 24 Package Resonances for a detailed discussion of box resonances De embedding Adaptive data resulting from an ABS analysis is either de embedded or non de embedded With other analysis types when the de embedding option is enabled default then both de embedded and non de embedded response data is calculated and available for display and output This is not true for an adaptive sweep In an adaptive sweep if you run with de embedding enabled de embedded data is available for the whole band Non de embedded data is available only for the discrete data points at which full analyses were performed while synthesizing the response If you wish to have non de embedded data for the whole frequency band you must perform an adaptive sweep with the de embed option disabled Select Analysis Setup from the main menu to open the Analysis Setup dialog box then click on the Advanced button to open the Advanced Options dialog box Click on the De embed checkbox to disable de embedding For details on these dialog boxes please refer to online help for the project editor
263. m the project editor main menu Defining the Subsectioning Freguency 68 The subsectioning parameter Max Subsection Size applies to the subsectioning of all polygons in your circuit and is defined as subsections per wavelength Normally the highest analysis freguency is used to determine the wavelength However this may be changed by using the Subsectioning Freguency options in Chapter 4 Subsectioning the Advanced Subsectioning Control dialog box in the project editor This dialog box is opened by selecting Analysis gt Advanced Subsectioning from the project editor main window For details on what options are available to define the subsectioning frequency click on the Help button in the Advanced Subsectioning Control dialog box The frequency defined by the selected option is now used to determine the maximum subsection size instead of the highest frequency of analysis Thus the same subsectioning can be used for several analyses which differ in the highest frequency being analyzed Conformal Mesh Subsectioning Conformal meshing is a technique which can dramatically reduce the memory and time required for analysis of a circuit with diagonal or curved polygon edges For a detailed discussion of conformal mesh and its rules of use please refer to Conformal Mesh page 169 Only the effect of conformal mesh on subsectioning is discussed in this chapter This technique groups together strings of cells following diagonal and
264. m allowed capacitance pF The default value is 0 01 pF LMAX Maximum allowed inductance nH The default value is 100 0 nH KMIN Minimum allowed mutual inductance dimensionless ratio The default value is 0 01 RZERO Resistor to go in series with all lossless inductors resistance in ohms Needed for some versions of SPICE The default value is 0 0 Separation This is the calculation interval between the two frequencies used to generate the SPICE model specified as a percentage The second frequency is obtained by adding the specified percentage of the first frequency to the second frequency 365 Sonnet User s Guide 366 All calculated component values which fall outside the allowed range specified by the user in the model options are excluded from the resulting lumped model The RZERO entry is provided for those versions of SPICE which need inductors to have some small loss to avoid numerical difficulties The default value of 0 0 disables this capability Enter the desired values for the parameters in the PI Model Options dialog box Click on the OK button in the PI Model Options dialog box to apply the changes and close the dialog box Click on the Save button in the Output PI Model dialog box A browse window appears which allows you to save the data displayed in the output window The file extension depends on which type of SPICE format you have selected A Simple Microwave Example Shown below is the Ste sym exa
265. mapped to the Sonnet project If the checkbox is on then the GDSII stream layer is mapped to the level specified in the Xgeom Level text entry box Xgeom Object Type This drop list allows you to select what type of object should be input to the Sonnet project Select Metal for metalization Brick for dielectric brick or Via for a via polygon from the drop list You select the metal type Metal or Via or brick material from the Xgeom Material drop list This selection is used for the stream layer and data type number entered for the GDSII file in the same row Xgeom Level This specifies the level in the Sonnet project where you wish to place the object being input from the GDSII file The top level is number 0 To put metal on the ground plane for via placement set the level number to gnd or GND Xgeom Material Select the material type you wish to use for the object in the Sonnet project The choices available depend on what type of object is selected in Xgeom Object type Metal or Brick and what materials are available in the template project This selection is used for the stream layer and data type number entered for the GDSII file in the same row 271 Sonnet User s Guide For example if you are importing a GDSII file into a project with four defined types of metal you may choose from those four metal types for any object being translated in metal in the Sonnet project You may also enter a new type of material for whic
266. mbed a structure contained inside a resonant cavity box This means that if a box resonance exists for a de embedding calibration standard the final S parameters will be suspect Chapter 24 Package Resonances Below is an S parameter S21 curve for the example project package son Notice that at 31 76 GHz there is a sharp change in the data and it approaches unity This indicates a strong package resonance induced coupling between the input and output at this frequency package son DB S21 mace 50 59 g 1 No eo 1 dB 45 50 31 7 31 71 31 72 31 73 31 74 31 75 31 76 31 77 31 78 31 79 318 Sonnet Software Inc Freguency GHz Results of a search for package resonances shows strong coupling between input and output at 31 7625 GHz A Box Resonance Example This example describes how to create a simple geometry file you can use to determine box resonance frequencies before you fabricate the wrong enclosure Errors of less than 0 1 can be achieved with no limit on the number of dielectric layers used The basic idea is to re create the box parameters of your real circuit using the same substrate size dielectric layers etc but without the metalization 389 Sonnet User s Guide Once the box parameter setup is complete you should create a small probe which is used to excite the modes This is just a small less than 1 8 wavelength open stub with a port on it If you bend the stub you have a better chance of
267. menu option 2 Select Modify Port Attributes to open the Port Attributes dialog box depicted on page 115 3 Then enter the desired length in the Ref Plane or Cal Length field in the Autognd Port Data box Alternatively you may use the mouse for setting the reference plane by clicking the Use Mouse button and then clicking in your circuit at the desired location The Ref Plane entry will be updated to reflect your selection 4 To remove a reference plane or calibration length enter a value of zero in the respective field W TP Changing a port to an autoground type and setting up a reference plane or calibra tion length for the port can be accomplished at the same time in the Port Attributes dialog box It is also possible to set calibration lengths for multiple ports by select ing the desired ports selecting Modify gt Port Properties and inputting a value in the calibration length text entry box in the Port Attributes dialog box Deleting Ports All types of ports are deleted in the same manner Simply select the port then perform a Cut or Delete operation either through the tool bar or menu to remove the port from the circuit 109 Sonnet User s Guide Ungrounded Internal Ports 110 A standard ungrounded internal port is located in the interior of a circuit and has its two terminals connected between abutted metal polygons An ungrounded internal port is illustrated below Note that internal ports have their neg
268. min gt MWOffice Interface gt Uninstall from the main menu on the task bar The Microwave Office Interface is uninstalled Once the uninstall is complete the only item on the Admin Microwave Office menu that is enabled is the Install command Sonnet will no longer be available as a choice for EM Simulator in Microwave Office All EM Structures in Microwave Office designs will be converted to EMSight Microwave Office s EM simulation engine Licensing The Microwave Office Interface is available as part of Sonnet Lite and Sonnet LitePlus It may be purchased as an option for Sonnet Level2 Basic or above Please see your system administrator if you are unsure of the availability of this feature Microwave Office Interface Overview You may use the Microwave Interface in a number of ways e You may edit your EM Structure or circuit in Microwave Office and run the Sonnet analysis engine em when you wish to simulate the circuit e You may invoke Sonnet s project editor to edit your geometry and run the analysis from the Microwave Office environment e You may export your EM Structure to a Sonnet project work on the analysis in the Sonnet environment and import the Sonnet project to 223 Sonnet User s Guide Microwave Office when your analysis 1s complete 224 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Shown below is an overview of the Microwave Office MWOffice Interface and how the programs and projects that a
269. mple a simple step discontinuity followed by the PI model produced when you set up an optional PI Model Spice output file Limits C gt 0 01pF L 100 0nH R 1000 00hms K gt 0 01 Analysis frequencies 1000 0 1100 0 MHz Subckt SonData 1 2 GND C C1 1 GND 0 273341pf C C2 2 GND 0 232451pf L L1 1 2 0 310155nh ends SonData Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis There are two capacitors to ground node GND and one inductor connected between node 1 and node 2 in the lumped element model Topology Used for PI Model Output The topology of the lumped element model generated by em depends on the circuit being analyzed In general the model contains an inductor in series with a resistor if using loss a capacitor and a resistor when using loss connected in parallel from each port to ground A similar parallel RLC network is also connected between each port Therefore a four port circuit can contain more elements than a two port circuit Each inductor may also have a mutual inductance to any other inductor in the network The figure below shows the most complex equivalent circuit possible for a two port mutual inductances not shown Any values that are outside of the open circuit limits are not included Equivalent circuit of a two port structure using the PI Model Mutual inductances also exist between all inductors but are not shown Any component whose value is outside of the open circuit limits are not printed i
270. n The third model should be used to account for high frequency effects or effects due to small circuit dimensions In these cases the surface resistances proportionality to begins to dominate and the following model is suggested The resistivity is a function of frequency squared and Sonnet presently does not have a method to do this Therefore if you are analyzing over a broad band you need to have a separate project for each frequency using the following equations Iu I x2 Rpc 59 uo D O yM M 19 L WAT where O 2n JA radians sec Oy Conductivity of the superconductor in its normal state Mhos m3 Ny Normal state carrier density 1 m T Superconducting state carrier density 1 m and are as defined above TT 1 Shen Z Y High Temperature Superconducting Microwave Circuits Boston 1994 Artech House 82 Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss The Surface Impedance Z for superconductors is modeled in Sonnet using the following equation Z Rpc tj OL Xpc for L gt 0 0 Sense Em solves for the current distribution however on occasion you may want to view the fields not the current You do this with what is called a sense metal The sense metal is a rectangular patch of conductor placed where you want to see the tangential electric field You cannot view the normal direction of the field with Sonnet For further discussion of sense metal see Chapter 25
271. n 2 1 Cell Wide g Y Min 1 ai 4 Cells 2 Cells v Cell Size X A portion of circuit metal showing how em combines cells into subsections for Manhattan polygons when X Min 2 and Y Min 1 If X min or Y min are greater than your polygon size em uses subsections as large as possible to fill the polygon NOTE The subsection parameters X Min Y Min X Max and Y Max are specified in cells not mils mm microns etc For example X Min 5 means that the minimum subsection size is 5 cells 61 Sonnet User s Guide 62 Although the X Min and Y Min parameters are very useful options it is not a substitute for using a larger cell size For example a circuit with a cell size of 10 microns by 10 microns with X Min 1 and Y Min 1 runs faster than the same circuit with a cell size of 5 microns by 5 microns with X Min 2 and Y Min 2 Even though the total number of subsections for each circuit may be the same em must spend extra time calculating the value for each subsection for the circuit with the smaller cell size X Min and Y Min with Edge Mesh On Having the edge mesh option on is the default state for Sonnet projects because it provides a more accurate analysis Having edge mesh on for a polygon changes how the subsections on the very edge are handled Starting from the left side of the previous example with edge mesh off the subsections were 2 cel
272. n Institute of Electronics Packaging pp 79 80 Mar 1999 Article in Japanese James C Rautio Tips and Tricks for Using Sonnet Lite Free EM software will radically change the way you do high frequency design Microwave Product Digest November 1999 pp 30 34 67 70 James C Rautio EM Simulation 1999 IEEE MTT S International Microwave Symposium Microwave and Millimeter Wave Design Tool Applications Workshop Anaheim CA June 13 1999 James C Rautio Application of Electromagnetic Analysis Software to 3 D Planar High Frequency Design International Multilayer Circuits Symposium IMCS March 1999 pp B2 1 B2 17 421 Sonnet User s Guide 422 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Shigeki Nakamura Top Interview Electromagnetic Analysis is not Difficult Big Rush to Install PC Version Electronic Products Digest Vol 16 No 1 January 1999 page 48 Japanese Article James C Rautio Comments on Revisiting Characteristic Impedance and Its Definition of Microstrip Line with a Self Calibrated 3 D MoM Scheme IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques Vol 47 No 1 January 1999 pp 115 117 James C Rautio and George Matthaei Tracking Error Sources in HTS Filter Simulations Microwaves and RF Vol 37 No 13 December 1998 pp 119 130 J C Rautio Electromagnetic Analysis for Microwave Applications Computati
273. n de embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 812 S22 1 00000000 0 062758 97 37 0 998029 16 65 0 998029 16 65 0 062758 115 9 embedded results of a steps son analysis Frequency 1 1 GHz Non de embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format 11 S21 S12 S22 shown in the project 1 10000000 0 069085 98 12 0 997611 18 32 0 997611 18 32 0 059085 118 5 log Frequency sweep 2 Frequency 10 GHz Non de embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 12 22 10 0000000 0 515668 152 64 0 856789 163 5 0 856789 163 5 0 515668 60 400 Analysis successfully completed Log Type ETE Using Multi Frequency Caching Multi frequency caching MFC is a technique that can dramatically reduce the em computation time when analyzing large circuits over many frequencies without any loss in accuracy If you only need response data over a frequency band an adaptive sweep ABS provides more data in much less time See Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS on page 141 However an adaptive sweep only computes current density data or transmission line parameters Eg p and Zo for the discrete data points but not for all the adaptive data If you need to compute current density data or transmission line parameters at a large number of frequency points the multi frequency caching option can save on processing time This technique is enabled by checking the Multi Frequency Caching run opt
274. n see the subsections used by Sonnet by following the instructions below Be aware that your dielectric layers must be defined and at least one port must be added to your circuit before you may use the Estimate Memory command To view the subsectioning do the following 1 From the project editor select Analysis gt Estimate Memory This calculates the amount of memory required for your analysis 55 Sonnet User s Guide Click the View Subsections button A picture of your circuit will appear The metal will show up as red and the subsection borders will show up as black lines as shown in the illustration below Metalization 2 Note the use of smaller subsections in an area where current density is changing rapidly Subsection Borders Subsectioning and Simulation Error 56 As discussed above Sonnet uses a fixed resolution grid and discretely meshes a given metallization pattern based on that underlying grid The edges of metal patterns in a design do not necessarily have to be aligned to the grid even though Sonnet only simulates metal fill which is on the grid Off grid metalization may be over or under filled depending on the degree of misalignment between grid and metal pattern While misalignment gives the user visual feedback of one potential error source in a Sonnet simulation it is important to keep in mind that every planar Method of Moments MoM simulation contains multiple sources of error Unlike S
275. n the SPICE output file 367 Sonnet User s Guide N Coupled Line Option 368 If your circuit is a single or multiple coupled transmission line you should use the transmission line models supplied by your Spice program Most SPICE programs have an element for single and multi conductor transmission lines in which you enter the capacitance and inductance per unit length for a single line or a capacitance and inductance matrix for multi coupled lines Sonnet can produce a LCT formatted Spice file which may without too much difficulty be edited to comply with other formats Analyses which use such data are much faster than those which use simple lumped models In addition accuracy 1s maintained at all frequencies for which TEM mode propagation is an adequate approximation Fora single line the L and C distributed parameters are each a single number For N coupled lines L and C become N by N matrices When metal loss is included we now also have an R matrix The resistance is in series with the inductance When there is dielectric loss a G matrix is also calculated The conductance is in parallel with the capacitance The synthesis determines whether a G or R matrix is needed only from the calculated S parameters not from the circuit geometry To generate RLGC matrices select Output gt N Coupled Line Model File in the response viewer or click on the N Coupled Line Model button in the Generate Default Output Files dialog box which is
276. n this case the subsectioning parameters are set to their default values X Min 1 Y Min 1 X Max 100 and Y Max 100 As we go away from the corner along the edge the subsections become longer For example the next subsection is two cells long the next one is four cells long etc If the edge is long enough the subsection length increases until it reaches X Max 100 cells or the maximum subsection size parameter whichever comes first and then remains at that length until it gets close to another corner discontinuity etc Notice however that no matter how long the edge subsection is it is always one cell wide This is because the current density changes very rapidly as we move from the edge toward the interior of the metal this is called the edge singularity 59 Sonnet User s Guide 60 In order to allow an accurate representation ofthe very high edge current the edge subsections are allowed to be only one cell wide However the current density becomes smooth as we approach the interior of the metal Thus wider subsections are allowed there As before the width goes from one cell to two cells then four etc TIP If two polygons butt up against each other or have a small overlap the modeling of the edge singularity will require a larger number of subsections at the boundary between the two polygons Using the Merge command Edit gt Merge Polygons to join the two polygons into one will reduce the number of
277. n time by reviewing the instances in the design This feature is utilized to index metalization loss of layers and for any special instances possibly user defined It is also used to remove layers from translation nl a layer number n2 the appropriate metalization level in the project editor usually set to 0 GND will be recognized as the ground plane and will place the Agilent layer on the bot tommost layer of the Sonnet project n3 a number indexing a RES statement for the metalization loss of this layer The RES index number starts at 0 referencing the first RES and or MET statement in the file and progresses upwards for additional statements The number 1 is a special case and references the default lossless metal in the project editor IGNORE The keyword IGNORE can be placed after lt n1 gt to indicate that the translator should ignore the corresponding Agilent layer number VIA If the keyword VIA is placed after n3 any polygons translated will have vias up to the next project editor level placed on every edge These layers can be used to connect multilayer custom designs NOPORT If the keyword NO PORT is placed after n3 or after a VIA keyword then no ports will be connected to this layer This helps the Agilent interface to isolate individual polygons to connect ports to the Agilent interface can only connect ports to single polygons This is used when multiple polygons overlap the port connection in a single in
278. nalysis be aware that the freguency response of the model up to 1 T where T is the minimum time step of the transient analysis is important You should use the Advanced Broadband Model options dialog box to specify additional predicted data up to 1 T You access this dialog box by clicking on the Advanced button in the Broadband Model File entry dialog box in the project editor or in the Output Broadband Model dialog box in the response viewer This allows you to view the freguency response of your model at data points not included in your em analysis You should look for anomalies in the response that indicate a problem with the model such as S parameters greater than one or unexpected sharp resonances If the model is not accurate enough see Improving the Accuracy of the Broadband Spice Model on page 377 for suggestions on improving your Broadband Spice model Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis Broadband Spice Extractor Log The Broadband Spice Extractor log displayed in the Broadband Spice details window contains detailed information about the creation of your Spice model file You may view a summary of the log or the complete log To view the summary of the log click on the Summary button at the bottom of the window To return to the full log click on the Complete button You use the log to determine which parameters to examine in order to determine if the Spice model is accurate enough for your use Two log files are shown below t
279. nalysis monitor Frequency Run 1 Sat Apr 07 15 18 18 2001 Frequency Sweep 3 95 GHz De embedded 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 3 95000000 0 999998 149 22 0 001765 113 1 0 001765 113 1 0 999998 164 55 lt Pl F 3 95 Eeff 2 93154529 0 0 Z0 52 0732019 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 0748436 lt P2 F 3 95 Eeff 2 93105773 0 0 Z0 52 0687952 0 0 R 0 0 C 0 07484847 De embedded S parameter transmission parameter and port discontinuity results The analysis monitor displays the de embedded S parameter results along with the feed transmission line parameters E grand Zo and calculated discontinuity R and C for each de embedded port P1 and P2 stand for port 1 and port 2 respectively A detailed discussion concerning the port discontinuities R and C Is presented in the next section De embedding Port Discontinuities 122 All ports in em introduce a discontinuity into the analysis results Sometimes this is desirable For example when analyzing a circuit fabricated with box walls the effects introduced by a box wall port discontinuity are real Under this circumstance the discontinuity should not be removed However in analyses where only the behavior of the DUT is of interest all port discontinuities should be removed by de embedding When enabled em s de embedding algorithm automatically removes the discontinuities for box wall ungrounded internal and auto grounded
280. ncy stop is the optional ending frequency and step is the optional interval between analysis frequencies STEP frequency Single frequency which analyzes your circuit at only one frequency ABS ENTRY lt start gt stop An adaptive sweep which uses the Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS technique to perform a fine resolution analysis ofa specified frequency band lt start gt specifies the beginning frequency of the frequency band and lt stop gt specifies the end of the frequency band ESWEEP start stop lt points An exponential sweep which specifies an exponential frequency sweep from the starting frequency to the end frequency with a common ratio between the desired number of frequency points start is the beginning frequency lt stop gt is the ending frequency and lt points is the number of frequency points used for the analysis For example the values Start 8 0 Stop 64 0 with the points 4 will analyze at 8 16 32 and 64 LSWEEP start stop lt points A linear sweep which uses multiple frequencies evenly spaced in an ascending order start gt is the starting frequency stop is the ending frequency and lt points is how many analysis frequencies at which you wish to analyze The frequency range is divided by the number of points to provide a constant interval between analysis frequencies For example the values Start 2 0 Stop 10 0 with the points 5 will analyze at 2
281. nd click on the Delete button in the Metal Library dialog box This deletes the metal type from the library Note that if the metal type has been added to the project and is in use deleting the metal from the library has no effect on the metal type being used in the project The metal type will no longer be available in the library for other projects but will still exist in the present project This completes editing the metal library Setting Up a Metal Library To create a new metal library global or local do the following Select Circuit gt Metal Types from the main menu of the project editor The Metal Types dialog box is opened on your display This dialog box allows you to add edit and delete metal types for your project Click on the Library button to edit your metal libraries This opens the Metal Library dialog box which allows you to create metal libraries and to edit them Select the type of library you wish to create by clicking on the My Library or Global Library radio button in the Metal Library dialog box Once a library is selected a list of metal types in the library should appear in the dialog box To create a new library click on the Specify button to the right of the radio button for the library you selected A browse window appears on your display Via Loss Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Use the browse window to specify the location and filename for the new metal library file The
282. ne effects are removed from the analysis results The em de embedding algorithm 1s described in detail in Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 To summarize this algorithm performs the following analysis steps when enabled 1 Calculates port discontinuities 2 Removes effects of port discontinuities from analysis results 3 Optionally shifts reference planes removes effects of feed or port trans mission lines from analysis results 4 Calculates transmission line parameters Er and Zo Run em with de embedding enabled whenever you do not want to include the effects of port discontinuities in your analysis results In fact the De embed option is selected by default in the analysis controls To enable de embedding click on Chapter 3 Important Options and Concepts the Advanced button in the Analysis Setup dialog box in the project editor In the Advanced options dialog box which appears on your display click on the De embed option checkbox knee OSS SSS The circuit steps son is shown above The de embedded and non de embedded analysis results as they appear in the project log are shown below Select Project View Log gt Response Data from the project editor s main menu The circuit is available in the Sonnet example files under Steps If you do not know how to obtain a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button 41 Sonnet User s Guide Emi Log V
283. ned This usually corrects the problem Thus it takes a particularly long reference plane or calibration standard before the E ogr calculation fails When it does fail it suddenly jumps down to a value just above 1 0 Zp and the de embedded S parameter data still have full validity This failure mode is rarely seen Non Physical S Parameters Generally reference planes should not be set in the project editor such that they extend beyond a discontinuity in the circuit Doing so may result in non physical S parameters To illustrate this problem consider the circuit shown below In this circuit the reference planes do not extend beyond any discontinuities When de embedding is enabled the port 1 discontinuity is removed along with a transmission line of 135 Sonnet User s Guide width W1 and length L1 Similarly the port 2 discontinuity is removed along with a transmission line of width W2 and length L2 The de embedded result is a set of 2 port S parameters for the block in the middle of the circuit ja Now consider the figure on page 137 This circuit is identical to the circuit shown above except that the length of the reference plane originating on the left box wall has been increased If em is run with de embedding enabled on this circuit it removes a length of transmission line equal to the specified reference plane 136 Chapter 8 De embedding Guidelines length This occurs even though the actual po
284. nes connecting the ports to the filter metalization Reference planes have been defined for port 1 and port 2 at the left and right edges of the filter metalization respectively These reference planes instruct em to remove the effects of the transmission lines up to the filter metalization when de embedding is enabled Filter Metalization DUT Transmission lt q Port2 Port discontinuities and transmission lines at the upper left and lower right are removed from the em analysis results by enabling de embedding Adding reference planes to a circuit in the project editor does not automatically enable de embedding in em However the De embed run option is set by default You select the de embed option in the Advanced Options dialog box in the project editor This run option is set by default To open the Advanced Options dialog box select Analysis gt Setup from the project editor main menu Then click on the Advanced button in the Analysis Setup dialog box which appears 121 Sonnet User s Guide An analysis was performed on the filter starting at 3 95 GHz to 4 2 GHz in 0 002 GHZz steps with the de embedding option on As em performs the analysis messages are output to the status section of the analysis monitor detailing the various tasks in the process The actual response data is shown in the output window when the Response Data button is pressed Below is the output response data for the filter as it appeared in the a
285. ng Outside Microwave Office The second method for working outside Microwave Office while performing your EM analysis is to use the Analyze Outside MWOffice command in Sonnet s project editor This command allows you to launch an analysis from the project editor in such a way that once the analysis is running you may exit the project editor which unlocks Microwave Office During this command you specify a temporary Sonnet project file for your EM Structure Once the analysis is complete you will need to import the temporary Sonnet project into Microwave Office To analyze outside Microwave Office do the following 1 Open your EM Structure in the Native Editor Sonnet s project editor is opened with your EM Structure shown 253 Sonnet User s Guide 254 Select File gt MWOffice gt Analyze Outside MWOffice from the main menu of the project editor If you have not turned off the message in the Hints Preferences then a message explaining the command appears on your display Click on the OK button to close the message A Browse window appears on your display which allows you to select a temporary location for the Sonnet project to which the EM Structure is exported and the analysis will be performed on Select a name and location of the Sonnet project to which you wish to save the EM Structure This saves the translated EM Structure presently open in the project editor as a Sonnet project and launches the EM analysis Once
286. nge dimensions in the project editor Fora tutorial which details how to add parameters to your circuit and perform an optimization please refer to Chapter 2 Parameter Sweep and Optimization Tutorial in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials 155 Sonnet User s Guide The analysis engine em adjusts the value ofa parameter in one of two ways The first is a parameter sweep in which em sweeps the parameter values through a user defined range The second method is optimization in which the analysis engine controls the parameter value within a user defined range in an attempt to reach a user defined goal Both parameterization and optimization of a geometry may be performed over a range of analysis frequencies The first step in performing a parameter sweep or optimization is defining the parameters in the project editor Parameters 156 Parameters are user defined circuit attributes that allow the analysis engine to modify the circuit in order to perform parameter sweeps and optimization Parameters also provide a quick way for the user to change dimensions in the project editor For example the length of a transmission line can be assigned the parameter L To change the length of the transmission line you edit the value for L In order to set up parameters you must first input your circuit in the project editor You select dimensions and define them as parameters which allows you to vary those dimensions within an an
287. ntal Tutorials Layer Mapping 266 The Layer Mapping dialog box accessible from a button in the Import dialog box allows you to map the DXF layers or GDSII streams to the metal levels in Sonnet If it is necessary You may save the settings in this dialog box to an external file for use in future imports See the appropriate section below for more details Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators NOTE The top level of your circuit is on Level 0 in the project editor Next level below is Level 1 See the figure below Level 1 gt The Project Editor Level Numbering in a 3 layer circuit DXF Layer Mapping Before you convert the file you must create a DXF file from your circuit layout program The file should have a suffix of dxf For example if you have a filter that you want to analyze you could call your file filter dxf During the input of a DXF file the DXF translator reads the layers in the DXF file and creates the default layer mapping which is used to execute the import In most cases the default layer mapping created by the translator is sufficient for the import In cases where you need to adjust the mapping you can use the Layer 267 Sonnet User s Guide 268 Mapping dialog box to edit the layer mapping save the settings to an external layer mapping file or load a previously saved layer mapping file for use in an import The Layer Mapping dialog box shown below maps Lay
288. o add a network element to your netlist click on the network to which you wish to add it then select Tools gt Add Network Element from the main menu or click on the Add Network Element button on the project editor tool bar The dialog box is similar to the Edit Network dialog box except you may not change the name You must select which network you wish to use by selecting the name of an existing network from a drop list Only networks defined above your present network are available Adding Modeled Elements A modeled element is a resistor capacitor inductor ideal transmission line or physical transmission line To add a modeled element to your netlist select Tools Add Modeled Element from the main menu or click on the Add Modeled Element button on the project editor tool bar The Edit Element dialog box appears on your display You select the type of modeled element you wish to add from a drop list then enter the parameters for the element in text entry boxes provided in the bottom of the dialog box If parameters are defined in your netlist then a parameter may be entered as the value for the modelled element s parameters A text entry box appears for each port and ground for the element The desired node number of the network for each port should be entered here Adding Data File Elements A data file element is a data file which contains response data which you wish to include in your network The response data can be an optional
289. o online help Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project For example the graphics below illustrate a parameter sweep of the circuit steps with a single parameter Width defined The parameter sweep starts with a value of 20 mils for width and increases in steps of 20 until the parameter s value is 60 Em automatically performs an analysis at each specified frequency for each circuit shown below when the parameter sweep is executed N LA R 3i Width 20 mils Width 40 mils Width 60 mils In the case of this sweep an ABS analysis from 10 20 GHz was performed The response data for the parameterization is shown in the graph below ES steps sweep son RESCUES EIE Cartesian Plot ZU 50 0 Parameter Sweep of Steps Left Axis steps sweep width 20 DB S 1 gs n steps sweep width 40 DB S 1 xe steps sweep width 60 DB S 1 9 D Oc TO 0 Q UJ empty 10 12 u 16 18 m Right Axis Sonnet Software Inc Frequency GHz Click mouse to readout data values Pointer 165 Sonnet User s Guide Since an analysis of the circuit at each combination of parameter values 1s executed for each specified analysis frequency care should be taken when choosing data ranges The higher the number of analysis frequencies and parameter values the higher the number of analyses that must be computed by em The number of combinations specified is displayed in the project e
290. ode or push push ports and have many uses including simulating thick metal or the even mode response of a circuit See Modeling an Arbitrary Cross Section for an example of using push push ports Ports with identical port numbers are electrically connected together Ports with Negative Numbers Ports may also have negative numbers as shown in the figure on page 103 This feature can be used to redefine ground Strictly speaking em sums the total current going into all the positive ports with the same port number and sets that equal to the total current going out of all the ports with that same negative port number For example for a circuit with a 1 port and a 1 port em sets current flowing into Chapter 6 Ports port 1 to be equal to the current flowing out of port 1 Thus they are sometimes called balanced push pull or odd mode ports Coplanar lines can be represented with balanced ports See Chapter 23 Coplanar Waveguide and Balanced Ports for an example of push pull ports mun STC Sup An of push NNN p ors po Ports may be non sequential i e you may have only 2 ports one labeled 1 and the other labeled 4 The port order for the S Y or Z parameters will be listed in increasing numeric order For the example of a two port with ports labeled 1 and 4 the output would be as follows S11 S41 S14 S44 Changing Port Numbering 1 Click on the po
291. of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button The b dimension is exactly 1 0 mm the w dimension is given by the above table and the length of each line is 4 99654097 mm with a dielectric constant of 1 0 Each of these lines is precisely 0 25 wavelengths long at 15 0 GHz The geometry projects have the subsectioning set so the lines are 16 cells wide and 128 cells long To evaluate DMAC do an analysis of the line at 15 GHz with de embedding enabled For the error in characteristic impedance take the percent difference between the calculated value and the exact value above For the error in propagation velocity take the percent difference between the calculated S5 phase and 90 degrees Total error in percent is the sum of the two errors 403 Sonnet User s Guide Some types ofanalyses do not calculate characteristic impedance A detailed error analysis shows that to first order for a 1 4 wavelength long 50 ohm line the value of S is equal to the error in characteristic impedance For example an S 0 02 means that there is about 2 error in characteristic impedance To use this approximation for say a 25 ohm line the S parameters must be converted to 25 ohm S parameters This may be done by adding transformers in a circuit theory program Residual Error Evaluation 404 We have performed a detailed analysis of the relationship between subsectioning and residual error DMAC The simplest way to
292. oftware To understand the physical meaning of normalized S parameters recall that our standard 50 ohm S parameters are measured by terminating all ports in 50 ohms and then measuring ratios of incident to reflected or transmitted wave amplitudes If we were to use 60 ohm terminations instead of 50 ohm terminations the resulting measurements of traveling wave ratios would yield S parameters normalized to 60 ohms If we were then to take the S parameters which had been measured using 60 ohm port terminations and use it in a circuit theory program which expects you to use 50 ohm terminations we would get incorrect results However 60 ohm S Parameters do have uses Say you want to know what percentage of power is absorbed by a 60 ohm load terminating port 2 of a two port circuit That is simply one minus the magnitude squared of S j using 60 ohm S parameters If you are interested in a different load use a different normalizing impedance Chapter 6 Ports S Parameters can be renormalized to any real impedance by using the circuit network capability of em or a circuit theory based program to cascade appropriate transformers on each port This technique can not be used with a complex impedance as is the case with a lossy line or complex load In em the default normalizing impedance is 50 ohms If you would like a different normalization refer to the section Changing Port Impedance page 106 on how to specify the normalizing
293. olygon which bridges the gap and overlaps the two polygons on either side of the gap then using the Merge Polygon command Edit gt Merge Polygons 175 Sonnet User s Guide A 176 Rule 4 Error Condition e Snapping the existing polygons to the grid Modify gt Snap To command using the Preserve shape and spacing option WARNING If you are snapping a circuit with curved edges use the Preserve shape and spacing option in the Snap Objects dialog box Otherwise curved edges can become distorted and are difficult to restore in the project editor Adjacent Polygons Should Not Have an Interior Vertex When three polygons are adjacent a vertex where two polygons meet should not occur between two vertices of the third polygon See the illustration below Correct Placement Memory Save Option It is recommended that memory save not be enabled when your circuit has polygons using conformal mesh fill This is because conformal mesh subsections are sensitive to precision error Since using the memory save option involves reducing the required memory at the expense of increasing precision error its use may lead to noisy S parameter results for circuits with conformal mesh fill Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh Using Conformal Meshing Effectively This section discusses some guidelines to use in order to get the most improvement in processing time and memory use and the most accurate results when using conformal meshing Follo
294. on This launches Sonnet s current density viewer which allows you to animate your current density data as a function of frequency or time For more information on using the current density viewer please refer to Sonnet s online help Using the current density viewer is also demonstrated in Sonnet s first tutorial in the Sonnet Tutorial Low Pass Filter son JXY Magnitude at 5 GHz DER ja se pes es en amp n BA Ws MT gm Moves down one level Down Arrow 1 0x Pointer Saving the Current Density Data You may choose to save your current density data from Sonnet as part of your Microwave Office project To do so perform the following Right click on the desired EM Structure and select Options from the pop up menu which appears The Options property pages appear on your display Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface 2 Click on the General tab of the property pages 3 Click on the Currents checkbox to save the data Options General Frequencies Layout Drawing Mesh Sonnet Options Simulator E ditor TE MWOffice Editor Sonnet 3D Planar Electromagnetic Simulator O Native Editor Save Results in Document WARNING Currents Saving these results can cause file size to grow substantially Some simulators do not support all of these options When this checkbox is selected any current density data returned from Sonnet after an analysis is stored as part of the Microw
295. on the project att res67 son using the analysis controls from the netlist The analysis control use is indicated by Hierarchy Sweep in the PRJ statement When control is set to Hierarchy Sweep em automatically analyzes the subproject at the same freguency sweep and run options as the netlist 192 Chapter 12 Netlist Project Analysis During the analysis em performs the following steps 1 Reads S parameter data from the file att_res16 s2p 2 Performs an electromagnetic analysis of the geometry project att res67 son a 67 ohm thin film resistor 3 Combines the S parameter results from the electromagnetic analysis with the S parameter results from att res16 s2p to obtain an overall set of S parameters for the T attenuator lt TP Before executing a PRJ statement em checks for the existence of data at the spec ified control frequencies If the data already exists and the project has not changed since the data was generated em does not execute an electromagnetic analysis but uses the available data The listing below shows the output of the netlist analysis as it appears in the analysis monitor which contains the overall set of S parameters for the T attenuator Frequency 200 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 200 000000 0 008924 67 700 0 500516 5 758 0 500516 5 758 0 008924 67 700 Frequency 300 MHz 50 Ohm S Params Mag Ang Touchstone Format S11 S21 S12 S22 30
296. ona J C Rautio Current Developments in 3 D Planar Microwave Electromagnetics Microwave Hybrid Circuits Conference Oct 1993 Arizona J C Rautio Current Developments in 3 D Planar Microwave Electromagnetics Microwave Hybrid Circuits Conference Oct 1994 Arizona J C Rautio Experimental Validation of Electromagnetic Software International Journal of Microwave amp Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 1 No 4 Oct 1991 pp 379 385 J C Rautio Electromagnetic Microwave Analysis IEEE International Microwave Symposium Workshop WSA Digest Albuquerque June 1992 J C Rautio EM Visualization Assists Designers Microwaves and RF Nov 1991 pp 102 106 J C Rautio Reviewing Available EM Simulation Tools Microwaves amp RF June 1991 pp 16A 20A Generating Spice Files Using the em Electromagnetic Analysis Sonnet Application Note 104a Dec 1998 J C Rautio A New Definition of Characteristic Impedance MTT International Symposium Digest June 1991 Boston pp 761 764 J C Rautio A De Embedding Algorithm for Electromagnetics International Journal of Microwave amp Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 1 No 3 July 1991 pp 282 287 J C Rautio Triangle Cells in an Electromagnetic Analysis of Arbitrary Microstrip Circuits MTT International Microwave Symposium Digest Dallas June 1990 pp 701 704 J C Rautio Experimental Validation of Micr
297. onal Electromagnetics and Its Applications Vol 5 Boston Kluwer Academic Publishers 1997 pp 80 96 Yasumasa Noguchi Shin ichi Nakao Hideaki Fujimoto and Nobuo Okamoto Characteristics of Shielded Coplanar Waveguides on Multilayer Substrates Electronic Information and Communications Univerisity Meeting Electronics Society Conference June 29 1998 Japanese Article Erik H Lenzing and James C Rautio A Model for Discretization Error in Electromagnetic Analysis of Capacitors IEEE Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques Vol 46 No 2 February 1998 pp 162 166 J C Rautio Retracing Key Moments In the Life of Maxwell Microwaves amp RF Vol 36 No 11 November 1997 pp 35 51 J C Rautio Electromagnetic Analysis for Microwave Applications NASA CEM Computational Electromagnetics Workshop Newport News VA May 1996 J C Rautio Seven Years Later Applied Microwave and Wireless November December 1996 pp 99 100 J C Rautio Questionable Reviews The Institute IEEE newspaper Jan 1996 pg 11 J C Rautio An Investigation of an Error Cancellation Mechanism with Respect to Subsectional Electromagnetic Analysis Validation International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 6 No 6 November 1996 pp 430 435 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Appendix II Sonnet References
298. onnet most EM software vendors speak very little about error sources see Accuracy Benchmarking page 401 The fact that Sonnet shows misalignment between the desired metal pattern and simulation grid does not necessarily imply that Sonnet simulations will be any less accurate than Chapter 4 Subsectioning competitive simulators that mesh using infinite resolution With all simulation packages the user should investigate every potential error source which will vary depending on the MoM technique used and ensure a good converged data set 1s achieved Changing the Subsectioning of a Polygon Sonnet allows you to control how cells are combined into subsections for each polygon This is done using the parameters X Min Y Min X Max and Y Max These parameters may be changed for each polygon allowing you to have coarser resolution for some polygons and finer resolution for others See Modify Metal Properties in the project editor s online help for information on how to change these parameters Before discussing how to make use of these parameters we need to first understand em s automatic subsectioning for a polygon when the parameters are set to their default settings Default Subsectioning of a Polygon By default Sonnet fills a polygon with staircase subsections Other more advanced fill types diagonal and conformal are covered in other chapters of this manual For diagonal subsections see Chapt
299. onnet 9 format Choose the Selected Geo item in order to translate the selected portions of the design into the Sonnet 9 format After translation the Sonnet project can be examined with the Launch xgeom item After some adjustments are made to the file and saved analyze the translated file from within xgeom and create S parameter files for incorporation into the design When the Selected Geo menu item is used the S parameter output file will automatically be referenced in the schematic 281 Sonnet User s Guide NOTE The Agilent Interface does not translate customized design files Translation Procedure There are two ways to initiate a translation the Rep Geo menu item and the Selected Geo menu item The Rep Geo command will convert an entire representation the whole layout into a Sonnet project The Selected Geo command converts only the selected area of the layout into a project In addition Selected Geo performs a few other functions in order to make the use of em simulation in a design easier These special features are described later in Special features of Selected gt Geo page 284 Some preparation of the design and preference file may be reguired in order to ensure that the translation program obtains all the correct data reguired to perform the translation appropriately The translator obtains its data from several different sources These sources are outlined below Substrate parameters
300. ons on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures The cvia son file is a very detailed model of a conical via If you are modeling a large circuit say an inter stage matching network with multiple vias you may want to use a simpler model for faster analysis Another approach would be to use circuit subdivision where you subdivide the circuit such that the via is simulated separately thus providing an accurate via simulation For more information on circuit subdivision see Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision on page 201 315 Sonnet User s Guide 316 Chapter 19 Thick Metal Chapter 19 Thick Metal Thick Metal Type The Thick Metal metal type allows you to model physically thick metal All other metal types are modeled as having zero thickness only the loss is affected by the thickness The thick metal type allows you to more accurately model the true 3D characteristics of thick conductors Since thick metal increases both your processing time and memory requirements it should only be used when necessary Metal is considered to be thick metal when its thickness is comparable to other dimensions in the circuit such as the width of a conductor or gaps between conductors When using thick metal the structure is approximated by two or more infinitely thin sheets of metal One sheet represents the top surfac
301. ontained in Openmite available in the Sonnet examples and is shown on the left in the figure on page 300 For details on how to use diagonal fill for a metal polygon see Modify Metal Properties in the project editor s online help For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button 299 Sonnet User s Guide 300 Notice that there are gussets where the miter polygon attaches to the transmission line shown on the left in the figure below Due to the nature of the triangle subsections used in diagonal fill acute angles less than 90 degrees cannot be modeled Em automatically cuts acute angles off as illustrated on the right Thus the tabs on the miter polygon On the left openmite son with a closely interacting mitered bend and open end discontinuity If the mitered region is captured as a simple triangle without tabs as shown on the right the vertices with acute angles are cut off This analysis required more time due to the use of diagonal fill to model the mitre accurately Once included however the em analysis time is relatively insensitive to the amount of diagonal fill Analyzing the file yields the following results 10 0000000 1 000000 150 6 Circuits with diagonal edges may benefit from using diagonal fill The edges of such structures are frequently much bet
302. oplanar This point is illustrated below The circuit shown below on the left consists of a coupled transmission line This is too simple a circuit to require subdivision but is very useful in demonstrating the principle When subdivided the circuit is split into two subprojects both of which would resemble the circuit shown on the right Since the port discontinuity is modeled as an infinite transmission line when the port is de embedded the coupling between points A and B is accounted for si s2 Infinite Transmission Line It 1s important to avoid areas where there is coupling across the subdivision line Subdivision lines should not split any diagonal polygon edges Illustrated below are good placements and bad placements of subdivision lines 208 Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision Good and Bad Placements of Subdivision Lines This section contains a series of illustrations each showing the good placement of a subdivision line in a circuit and its counterpart showing a bad and in some cases illegal placement of a subdivision line Setting a subdivision line perpendicular to one or more transmission lines provides a good general guideline for line placement The first example is a pair of coupled lines As explained above when you split coupled lines as on the left very little loss of accuracy results However on the right you have split the coupled pair along the axis where significant interaction takes place The
303. ose to the device under test DUT There are fringing fields associated with the port and separate fringing fields associated with the DUT If the port and DUT are too close the fringing fields interact The de embedding algorithm which is virtually identical to algorithms used in de embedding measured data is based on circuit theory and cannot handle fring ing field interaction See reference 60 in Appendix II Sonnet References for a detailed description of the problem 133 Sonnet User s Guide 134 e The first calibration standard is too short In this situation the discontinu ity associated with port 1 interacts with the discontinuity associated with port Z2 As a result the first calibration standard does not behave like a transmission line and its S parameters are invalid There is no precise rule as to how long a reference plane or calibration standard must be made in order to prevent the above effects from corrupting the de embedded results The required reference plane or calibration standard length is dependent upon the circuit geometry and the nature of the analysis However we recommend that you use reference plane or calibration standard lengths equal to or greater than one substrate thickness This is sufficient for most types of analysis Reference Plane Lengths at Multiples of a Half Wavelength Eeft and Zo cannot be calculated when the length of the reference plane or calibration standard is an integra
304. ossless the metal type is added to the Materials list in Microwave Office when the EM Structure is brought back into Microwave Office If you subseguently change the loss definition for that metal type in Sonnet one of two behaviors will occur e Ifyou change the definition of a metal type such that it still has loss but different parameters than the original definition a new material is created in Microwave Office whose name is the original material name with an X added to the end of the name For example if you have a material named Gold whose loss parameters you modify in Sonnet the new material in Microwave Office which is created when you input the circuit from Sonnet at the end of the editing session will be named GoldX e Ifyou change the definition of a metal type such that it is a lossless metal any polygons which use the metal type are changed to the default lossless metal type when the EM Structure is brought back into Microwave Office The definition of the metal type or material as it is referred to in Microwave Office remains the same in Microwave Office 259 Sonnet User s Guide 260 In both these cases these changes only affect the display of the EM Structure in Microwave Office The polygons retain the metal type and its definition when opened again in Sonnet Adding Changing or Deleting Metal Types When editing in the Native Editor 1f you wish to delete a metal type you must do so both in the Sonnet env
305. output file from a Sonnet analysis or data in Touchstone or Super Compact formats such as measured data To add a data file element to your netlist select Tools Add Data File Element from the main menu or click on the Add Data File Element button 187 Sonnet User s Guide on the project editor tool bar A browse window appears which allows you to select the data file you wish to include in your network Once the file is read the Edit Element dialog box appears which allows you to define the netlist node numbers for the ports Adding Project Elements A project element allows you to use another Sonnet project as part of your network The project may be a geometry or netlist project To add a project element to your netlist select Tools gt Add Project Element from the main menu or click on the Add Project Element button on the project editor tool bar The Edit Element dialog box appears on your display A browse window appears which allows you to select the project you wish to include in your network Once the project is read the Edit Element dialog box appears which allows you to define the netlist node numbers for the ports If the project contains parameters you may also enter values for these here If parameters are defined in your netlist then a parameter may be entered as the value for the modelled element s parameters This feature can be used to force two parameters from two different projects to use the same value Adding Par
306. ow four times faster 2 N 2 3 N74 201 Sonnet User s Guide 202 Circuit subdivision allows you to take advantage of this technique by breaking your circuit into smaller parts with fewer subsections hence requiring less processing time and memory to analyze The trade off is that you introduce some error into the analysis However by subdividing the circuit appropriately you can minimize the error while still obtaining the reduction in processing time The circuit should be split where there is no coupling across the subdivision line Areas where significant coupling occurs must be contained within a subproject In this way all the significant coupling in the circuit is accounted for If care is taken when subdividing the circuit the accuracy of the results is very high Circuit subdivision is not appropriate for every design but in the cases of large circuits 5 10 minutes processing time per frequency where it is applicable you can obtain marked increases in processing efficiency Another advantage of circuit subdivision is the use of frequency interpolation in the master netlist analysis A netlist is used to connect the response data of the subprojects of the circuit to simulate the full circuit If the subprojects are chosen in such a way that their response data does not vary significantly over the frequency band very few frequency points need to be calculated for the subproject So not only do the smaller files require less
307. owave Software 35th ARFTG Conference Digest Dallas May 1990 pp 58 68 Voted best paper at the conference J C Rautio Preliminary Results of a Time Harmonic Electromagnetic Analysis of Shielded Microstrip Circuits 27th ARFTG Conference Digest Dallas Dec 1986 Voted best paper at the conference 425 Sonnet User s Guide 426 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 J C Rautio An Experimental Investigation of the Microstrip Step Discontinuity IEEE Tran Microwave Theory Tech Vol MTT 37 Nov 1989 pp 1816 1818 J C Rautio A Possible Source of Error in On Wafer Calibration 34th ARFTG Conference Ft Lauderdale FL Dec 1989 pp 118 126 J C Rautio Microstrip Program Improves Accuracy of Circuit Models Microwaves amp RF Vol 27 No 12 pp 89 96 Nov 1988 J C Rautio Reflection Coefficient Analysis of the Effect of Ground on Antenna Patterns IEEE Antennas and Propagation Society Newsletter Feb 87 pp 5 11 J C Rautio and R F Harrington An Electromagnetic Time Harmonic Analysis of Shielded Microstrip Circuits IEEE Trans Microwave Theory Tech Vol MTT 35 pp 726 730 Aug 1987 J C Rautio and R F Harrington An Efficient Electromagnetic Analysis of Arbitrary Microstrip Circuits MTT International Microwave Symposium Digest Las Vegas June 1987 pp 295 298 J C Rautio and R F Harrington Results and Experim
308. ox Note that changing this value for a particular layer will have absolutely no affect on the analysis if there are no bricks on the layer If there are multiple bricks on the layer the Z subsectioning for all of those bricks will be identical It is not possible to apply different Z partitions to brick polygons which appear on the same layer 341 Sonnet User s Guide 342 Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation To this point this manual has been focused on using Sonnet for the analysis of high frequency circuits and transmission structures However there is a large class of radiating structures for which Sonnet has proven very useful This chapter describes how to use Sonnet to analyze 3 D planar radiating structures such as microstrip patch arrays and microstrip discontinuities using the Open Waveguide Simulator technique The underlying assumptions of this technique are described in detail Common modeling mistakes are also pointed out Examples are provided to illustrate the correct use of the modeling technique This chapter also discusses the far field viewer an analysis and viewing tool which calculates far field antenna patterns for arbitrary 3 D planar geometries The far field viewer uses the current distribution data in the project as input and creates a pattern The pattern may be viewed as a cartesian polar or surface plot 343 Sonnet User s Guide Background Since em 1s an
309. ox 268 layer name DXF 268 level 269 level number 267 Levels dialog box 306 Libra 280 library dielectric 93 metal 84 licensing Microwave Office Interface 223 limitations 352 LIMMAX 275 LIMMIN 275 Lite 34 loss 24 74 box top and bottom 89 low frequency 79 related to frequency 79 vias 89 311 LOWER LAYER 291 292 LTYPE 275 lumped elements 187 194 capacitors 184 inductors 184 inserting 184 inserting in a geometry 194 resistors 184 transmission lines 184 M magnetic wall 46 main menu accesses 29 main netlist 205 map checkbox 269 mapping 267 material 269 maximum frequency 53 maximum response 149 maximum subsection size 68 MCOV 282 memory available 409 memory save using with conformal mesh 176 memory save option 47 menu bar accesses 29 Menu options Launch EM 281 Launch EMVU 281 Launch user window 281 Launch XGEOM 281 Pick EM filename 281 Rep gt Geo 281 Selected Geo 281 Set EM filename 281 meshing See subsectioning Metal Editor dialog box 320 metal library 84 editing 86 setting up 88 using a metal type from 85 Metal Properties dialog box 172 metal type thick metal 317 metal types Index Microwave Office Interface 258 metalization commonly used metals 80 loss 24 metalization levels visibility 306 metallization loss 74 metallization thickness 79 MFC 39 microstrip 351 Microwave Office exporting an EM Structure to Sonnet 252 project browser 228 unlocking 252 263 working outside of 252 Microw
310. ports see Chapter 6 for a description of port types available in em A via port is the only Chapter 7 De embedding type of port that cannot be de embedded by em The port discontinuity for box wall ports is described in the section that follows The discontinuity for the other types of ports is similar in nature Box Wall Ports Box wall ports have one port terminal connected to a polygon inside the metal box and the second port terminal connected to ground see the figure on page 101 The port discontinuity is modeled as a series resistor R and capacitor C shunted to ground as shown below If the circuit being analyzed 1s completely lossless the resistor value R is zero Even with loss in the circuit the capacitive reactance is normally very large compared to the resistance S parameters from em without de embedding N Device O Under Test R Box wall port a C discontinuity Port discontinuity associated with a box wall port When enabled em s de embedding feature automatically calculates the values of R and C for each box wall port present in the circuit The port discontinuities are then removed by cascading a negative R and C as illustrated above 123 Sonnet User s Guide pomo SU CUN CHROM CN CNN ON mamak I S Parameters S parameters from em from em with without de embedding w I de embedding 4 I Device I O i Under I l
311. priate for doing an initial design Rather the faster circuit theory simulators which do not typically include stray coupling should be used for the first cut Em can then enhance the simulator performance by providing custom ultra precise discontinuity data and by validating large portions of the final circuit including all stray interactions 27 Sonnet User s Guide Sonnet is designed to work with your existing CAE software Since the output data is in Touchstone or Compact format at your discretion em provides a seamless interface to your CAE tool Em Origins The technique used in em was developed at Syracuse University in 1986 by Rautio and Harrington 79 80 82 It was originally developed as an extension of an analysis of planar waveguide probes 84 The technique expresses the fields inside the box as a sum of waveguide modes and is thus closely related to the spectral domain approach The complete theory has been published in detail in peer reviewed Journals A full list of relevant papers is presented in Appendix II Sonnet References Sonnet User s Guide Layout 28 Chapter 2 details what s new in release 10 as well as major changes since release 9 Chapter 3 through Chapter 8 discuss important design considerations while using Sonnet Many of the discussions contain examples to illustrate the point under consideration Chapter 9 through Chapter 11 explain the details of analysis options such as Adaptive Band Synth
312. r The Sonnet task bar appears on your display Sonnet Task Bar 10 0 Project View Admin Help PRESSE Edit Analyze View View View Manuals Project Project Response Current Far Field 30 Chapter 1 Introduction Once the Sonnet task bar is open for UNIX or Windows systems clicking on any given button opens the appropriate module The table below shows which modules are invoked by each button Table 2 Sonnet Task Bar Buttons Button Button Name Sonnet Program Edit Project Project Editor Analyze Project Analysis Monitor eii W View Response Response Viewer EI View Current Current Density Viewer 3 View Far Field Far Field Viewer a Manuals in PDF format Adobe Acrobat The translation programs for DXF and GDSII files are accessed through the project editor s File menu For details on each program please refer to the appropriate user s manual or online help 31 Sonnet User s Guide 32 Chapter 2 What s New in Release 10 Chapter 2 What s New in Release 10 This chapter summarizes new capabilities and changes in release 10 of Sonnet If you are not yet familiar with em you may want to just skim this chapter skipping any terms that are unfamiliar If you are an experienced user this chapter merits detailed reading Sonnet User s Manuals are only updated with each full release However our online help is also available at our web site and starting with Rele
313. r 21 Antennas and Radiation calculated by the far field viewer will be slightly incorrect The far field viewer then calculates antenna efficiencies greater then 100 If this occurs the box size should be increased Third Condition Place the top cover outside the fringing fields i e near field of the radiating structure preferably a half wavelength If this condition is violated the resistive top cover becomes involved in the reactive fringing fields which form the near field of the radiator This changes what would have been reactive input impedance into resistive input impedance overestimating the radiation loss Do not place the top cover thousands of wavelengths away from the radiator Extreme aspect ratios of the box should be avoided Empirical data for patch antennas has shown that a distance of about 1 2 wavelength works best Fourth Condition Set the top cover to Free Space This value is a compromise As shown by the equations on the previous page all TE modes have a characteristic impedance larger than 377 ohms 2 while all TM modes are lower Thus while a 377 Ohms square top cover does not perfectly terminate any mode it forms an excellent compromise termination for many modes This approximates removing the top cover of the box If the box is large it in turn approximates radiation as shall be demonstrated Fifth Condition The radiating structure can not generate a significant surface wave If there is
314. r example if the Sonnet project uses port numbers 1 4 4 and 7 when the project is translated to the Microwave Office environment the conversion would be as shown in the table below joel a MWOffice Port Number N 1 4 2 4 None the port is deleted 7 3 Ports on Ground Plane Sonnet allows you to place a port on the ground plane this is an error condition in Microwave Office which prevents an analysis from being executed A port on the ground plane in Microwave Office is translated into a via port which extends from the ground plane substrate up to the level above Port Termination and Excitation A port may be defined in two ways in Microwave Office termination and excitation You define the termination of a port as the real and imaginary parts This translates directly into Sonnet as the Resistance and Reactance parameter of the port Microwave Office does not allow you to define the Inductance or Capacitance of a port unlike Sonnet When using Microwave Office as the editor these two values are set to 0 When using the Native Editor you may enter values for the Inductance and Capacitance They are saved as part of the Sonnet project but are not displayed in Microwave Office 261 Sonnet User s Guide 262 Microwave Office allows you to define the excitation of one port in your circuit by entering the Available Power and Phase Sonnet does not have the ability to define port excitation in the
315. r oscillations in the S parameter values This is due to the rational fitting model having too many degrees of freedom when trying to fit a straight line If this is a problem it is recommended that you analyze the freguency band in which this occurs with another type of sweep Output Files You specify additional output files in the Output Files dialog box which appears on your display when you select Analysis gt Output Files from the project editor menu You click on the appropriate button to open the corresponding file entry dialog box Each entry dialog box has an option pertinent to ABS Response File When you specify an optional output file for your project you may select which type of data to output from an adaptive sweep The data selection is controlled by the Include Adaptive Data checkbox in the File Entry dialog box If this checkbox is selected which is the default then all the adaptive data from an ABS analysis 153 Sonnet User s Guide is included in the output file If this checkbox is cleared then only the data for the discrete data points is included in the output file We recommend leaving this box checked Viewing the Adaptive Response 154 When viewing an adaptive response ABS in the response viewer there are several things of which you need to be aware The adaptive data is plotted as a line A symbol indicating a data point only appears at the discrete frequencies at which a full analysis was executed as
316. r polygon shows the actual metalization analyzed by em As you can see a staircase is used to approximate a curved edge The conformal mesh fill type and the diagonal fill type are used to more accurately model curved and diagonal edges respectively In Sonnet s editor you may apply these fill types on a per polygon basis however when editing in Microwave Office you may apply these fill types on a global local or per polygon basis For a detailed discussion on fill types and how they affect subsectioning in Sonnet please refer to Chapter 4 Subsectioning on page 51 Setting Sonnet Fill Type Globally To apply the Conformal or Diagonal Fill option to all existing and new EM Structures in your Microwave Office project do the following 232 1 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Right click on the EM Structures entry in the project browser and select Options from the pop up menu which appears The EM Options property pages appear on your display Click on the Mesh tab in the property pages The property pages should appear similar to the graphic below EM Options Drawing Layout Current View Mesh EMSight Meshing Density Sonnet ptions O Low C Conformal Mesh 9 Normal O High O No variable mesh Diagonal Fill Cells per subsection limits X max Y max 100 100 Click on the desired checkbox Conformal Mesh or Diagonal Fill to use that cell fill type This wil
317. rcuit is complete the analysis controls are entered in the project editor Then the electromagnetic simulation is performed on your circuit using those analysis controls Any data output from the analysis is stored in the project This data may contain the results from multiple analyses as long as the geometry remains consistent Ifthe circuit is changed in the project editor you are prompted to either delete the response data before saving or perform a Save As to another project name In this way the response data in a project is kept consistent with the geometry or netlist One exception to this rule is the current density data If you generate current density data for a geometry with a parameter defined then change the nominal value ofa parameter in the circuit you will receive an error message in the current density viewer since no current density data exists with the parameter set to the new nominal value A change in the nominal value of a parameter 1s not a trigger for cleaning out the response data in a project The far field viewer inputs the current density data from the project and computes the far field radiation pattern You may save these calculations to a pat file which can also be used as an input file for the far field viewer 25 Sonnet User s Guide In addition in your analysis setup in the project editor you may define additional response files to be output separate from the project The table below shows whic
318. re used relate to one another AWR s Microwave Office Either Editor Native Editor Sonnet s Project MWoOffice Editor Sonnet s analysis engine The Microwave Office Interface uses the EM Socket in AWR s Microwave Office to provide Sonnet s analysis engine em as the solver on request You may choose to edit your EM Structure in Microwave Office or in Sonnet s project editor Native Editor in AWR When you edit your EM Structure in Microwave Office the geometry is sent to Sonnet for analysis and only the analysis results are sent back to Microwave Office If you choose the Native Editor Sonnet s project editor to edit your geometry the EM Structure is sent to Sonnet changes are made in Sonnet and the geometry is sent back to Microwave Office and stored as part of the Microwave Office project When an analysis is executed in Microwave Office the Sonnet project is sent to Sonnet for analysis and analysis results are sent back when the analysis is complete 225 Sonnet User s Guide Selecting Sonnet as your EM Simulator You may select Sonnet as your EM Simulator using one of two methods Opening a New EM Structure When you open a New EM Structure in Microwave Office you are prompted as to which analysis engine you wish to use In order to select Sonnet do the following 1 Open your Microwave Office Project in Microwave Office The Microwave Office window with the project browser window on the left hand si
319. ristic Impedance International Journal of Microwave amp Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 3 No 2 April 1993 pp 151 153 J C Rautio Some Comments on Electromagnetic Dimensionality IEEE MTT S Newsletter Winter 1992 pg 23 J C Rautio Sonnet Software Reveals Tangential Fields EEsof Wavelengths Vol 9 No 1 March 1993 pg 12 J C Rautio Sonnet Introduces Antenna Pattern Visualization in New Release EEsof Wavelengths Vol 9 No 2 June 1993 pg 21 J C Rautio EEsof Joins Forces With Sonnet Software EEsof Wavelengths Vol 8 No 3 Sept 1992 pg 14 J C Rautio Electromagnetic Design of Passive Structures Emerging Technology in Microwave CAD IEEE MTT S Newsletter Fall 1990 pp 21 22 J C Rautio Electromagnetic Microwave Design RF Microwave Applications Conference Santa Clara CA March 1992 pp 105 109 J C Rautio Experimental Validation of Microwave Software IEEE International Microwave Symposium Panel Session PSB Digest Albuguergue June 1992 J C Rautio Current Developments in 3 D Planar Microwave Flectromagnetics Microwave Hybrid Circuits Conference Oct 1991 Arizona 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 Appendix II Sonnet References J C Rautio Current Developments in 3 D Planar Microwave Electromagnetics Microwave Hybrid Circuits Conference Oct 1992 Ariz
320. ristic impedance of a stripline has an exact theoretical expression K k and is the complete elliptical integral ofthe first kind For evaluation on a computer a polynomial for K k is available in Abramowitz and Stegun Handbook of Mathematical Functions pp 590 592 Be sure to note the errata m1 1 m2 not 1 m b m quo d _ QoK K Zo fe 4 K k TW ae _ 72 k tanh 7 w k l k No 376 7303136 402 Chapter 26 Accuracy Benchmarking The expression for K k cited above provides an accuracy of about 1 x 105 When programmed on a computer the following values are obtained for three different transmission line impedances unity dielectric constant Table3 Stripline Benchmark Dimensions Zo ohms w b 25 0 3 3260319 50 0 1 4423896 100 0 0 50396767 For a length of stripline there are two parameters of interest characteristic impedance and propagation velocity With the w b given above we know the exact answer to within 1 x 1075 for Zo With a dielectric constant of 1 0 we also know the exact answer for the propagation velocity Itis the speed of light known to about 1 x 107 Any difference from these values is error or DMAC Each of the above three benchmarks is available in the Sonnet examples To get the 50 ohm line get the example S50 The other benchmark circuits are in S25 and S100 For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help gt Examples from the menu
321. ro so that you are forced to enter a value for this field If you use a dielectric brick in a layer and do not set the z partitions em reports an error and exits the analysis You must enter a non zero integer value for this parameter in order to run an analysis The value of this parameter is highly dependent on your circuit design therefore Sonnet cannot determine a reasonable value This is the reason we suggest you run a convergence test discussed earlier in the chapter on your circuit to determine the best value for the Z partitioning To set this parameter in the project editor do the following 339 Sonnet User s Guide 1 Select Circuit Dielectric Layers from the project editor main menu The Dielectric Layers dialog box shown below is displayed RIES Dielectric Layers bridge son Thickness Mat Erel Dielectric Diel Cond mils Name Loss Tan S m T o Unnamed U d 10 00 00 1 qe nname Edit oo Unnamed 1 0 0 0 00 Delete Library X Epl D ZParts Cancel Help 2 Click on the Z Parts button in the Dielectric Layers dialog box The Z Partitions dialog box appears on your display Z Partitions bridge son 2 x Level Mat Z Parts Num Name 0 Unnamed o Unnamed GND Unnamed fo Cancel 340 Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks Enter the number of z partitions to be used for each dielectric layer in the appropriate Z Parts text entry b
322. rrent travels on only the top and bottom surface of the thick metal for a 2 sheet model Current on the sides ofthe thick conductor can be accounted for by using 3 or more sheets The two sheet model Current flows in the x y plane on the top and bottom ofthe thick metal polygon shown here Current is also allowed to flow between the top and bottom sheets but only in the z direction No current flows in the zy or zx plane This model strikes a reasonable balance between accuracy and inordinate processing time and memory requirements Creating a Thick Metal Polygon To create a thick metal polygon in your circuit you must first define a metal type using the Thick Metal then apply that metal type to the polygon in your circuit To do this perform the following 1 In the project editor select Circuit gt Metal Types from the main menu The Metal Types dialog box appears on your display 319 Sonnet User s Guide 2 Click on the Add button in the Metal Types dialog box The Metal Editor dialog box appears on your display 3 Select Thick Metal Model from the type drop list in the Metal Editor dialog box This updates the dialog box with the text entry boxes for the three parameters needed for the thick metal model Conductivity Thickness and Number of Sheets 4 Enter the three parameters in the appropriate text entry boxes 5 Ifyou do not wish to use the default metal name enter the desired
323. rs on your display Be aware that the processing time needed to create your models can be significant The processing time is proportional to the number of analysis frequencies times the square of the number of ports in your circuit If you wish to stop the process before it is complete click on the Cancel button in the progress window Once the calculation is complete the Broadband Spice details dialog box appears on your display A log of the creation process appears in this dialog box The log contains information on the error for each parameter which parameter had the greatest error and the filename of the predicted S Parameter data It will also indicate whether the model achieved the error threshold Use this information to determine which parameters to examine in the response viewer You should look at the S parameter with the greatest error as well as any critical S parameters whose error was greater than 0 1 For a detailed explanation of the log see Broadband Spice Extractor Log on page 375 Click on the Plot button to open a plot of your response data versus the predicted S Parameter data The Predicted S Parameter data is opened in the response viewer along with the original response data You should view the S parameter with the greatest error and any other critical response data whose error was greater than 0 1 to judge if the fit or accuracy of the model is sufficient for your needs If the model is not accurate eno
324. rs when transferring the file from a PC to a UNIX workstation The GDSII file is a binary file and not an ASCII file A common mistake made when you transfer programs between computers is to assume that you are transferring ASCII files and consequently need to make changes to the files for compatibility For example MS DOS and UNIX use different characters to indicate the end ofa line in ASCII files This 1s the reason that most UNIX computers have the commands unix2dos and dos2unix These programs are used to convert ASCII files when transferring them between a PC and a UNIX computer If a dos2unix conversion is done on a GDSII file then it will be corrupted To determine if the GDSII file has been corrupted determine how many bytes the GDSII file has on the original computer and also on the computer where the GDSII translator conversion is done Both files should have the same number of bytes When transferring files between computers make sure that the transfer is using binary transfer mode For example FTP has two transfer modes ASCII and binary Also do not perform a dos2unix conversion on the GDSII file if transferring the file from a PC to UNIX Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators Partial Circuit Conversion in a GDSII Import You may have done a conversion but the Sonnet project has no circuit or only part of the circuit First verify that the settings in the Layer Mapping dialog box are correct You may wis
325. rt or ports to select it them This will enable the Modify menu option 2 Select Modify Port Properties to open the Port Attributes dialog box 3 Now the port number can be changed by typing the desired number in the Number text entry box of the dialog box Any nonzero integer nega tive or positive is valid Note that if multiple ports are selected Mixed will appear in the Number text entry box Editing this field will apply the same number to all selected ports 103 Sonnet User s Guide Port Normalizing Impedances 104 Whenever results are to be incorporated into a circuit theory based analysis program the normalizing impedance for each port should be 50 ohms In rare cases S parameters normalized to some other impedance are desired For example you may want to see what the reflection coefficient of a structure is when port 2 is connected to a 1 0 pF capacitor in parallel with a 10 ohm resistor a power FET input model while the input is being driven with a source which has a 35 ohm internal impedance In this case normalize port 1 to 35 ohms and port 2 to 10 ohms plus 1 0 pF Frequently pure electromagnetics are carried out using S parameters normalized to the characteristic impedance of each connecting transmission line These are often called generalized S parameters in spite of the fact that the line impedance is usually not specified thus precluding precise conversion to 50 ohms for use in circuit theory s
326. rt transmission line is shorter than the reference plane length As a result the de embedded S parameters are non physical Discontinuity begins here Example circuit for which non physical S parameters will be obtained when em is run with de embedding enabled A second de embedding example leading to non physical S parameter results is shown in the next figure In this example the circuit has two via pads on each side of the port transmission line The via pads are grounded to the box wall 137 Sonnet User s Guide When em is run with de embedding enabled on this circuit it removes three coupled transmission lines with a length equal to the reference plane length Since the reference plane extends from the box wall beyond the vias the de embedded S parameters are again non physical Box Resonances Because em s de embedding algorithm is based on circuit theory it is unable to de embed a structure contained inside a resonant cavity a limit it shares with all de embedding algorithms Thus whenever you wish to de embed a circuit with box resonances you must take the necessary steps to remove those box resonances See Chapter 24 for a detailed description on identifying and removing box resonances Note that if you do de embed a circuit with box resonances em may generate a bd de embedding error code see section De embedding error codes in online help Th
327. s pattern to identify the metal type Click on the OK button to close the Metal Editor and add the new metal type The new Metal Type appears in the Metal Types dialog box Click on the OK button in the Metal Types dialog box to close it and apply the changes This completes entering a new metal types Metal Libraries There are two types of metal libraries available in Sonnet global and local The metal libraries contain standard definitions for metal types which may be used in your projects There is no real difference between the global and local library The names refer to how they are used The global library would usually be used as a group wide library of standard metals for a group of designers Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss There is a default global library supplied by Sonnet which contains definitions for some common metals The default location for the global library is in Sonnet Directory gt data library where Sonnet Directory is the directory in which your Sonnet software is installed You may choose to use this location or can save this library in another location The local library would usually be used as the user s own library of metal definitions This library may be stored in a location of the user s choice You use the Metal Editor dialog box to add edit and delete entries to these libraries Using a Metal from a Metal Library To use a metal type from the metal library in your circuit do th
328. s cells into subsections and how you can control this process to obtain an analysis time or the level of accuracy you require There is also a discussion of selecting the cell size and how that may affect the em analysis Conformal Mesh is a special case of subsectioning used to model polygons with long diagonal or curved edges For more information on subsectioning when using conformal mesh see Conformal Mesh Subsectioning on page 69 Tips for Selecting A Good Cell Size 52 As you know em subdivides the circuit into subsections which are made up of cells the building block in the project editor The following discussion describes how to select a cell size You may also use the Sonnet Cell Size Calculator which allows you to enter important dimensions to calculate the most efficient cell size which provides the reguired accuracy To access the Cell Size calculator click on the Cell Size Calculator button in the Box Settings dialog box which is invoked when you select Circuit gt Box from the project editor menu TIP Select a cell size that is smaller than 1 20 of a wavelength Chapter 4 Subsectioning Before calculating a cell size it is important to calculate the wavelength at your highest frequency of analysis An exact number is not important If you know the approximate effective dielectric constant of your circuit use this in the wavelength calculation otherwise use the highest dielectric constant in your structure
329. s page Automatic Grounded Ports An automatic grounded port is a special type of port used in the interior of a circuit This port type has one terminal attached to the edge of a metal polygon located inside the box and the other terminal attached to the ground plane through all intervening dielectric layers An auto grounded port with a reference plane shift is shown below In many circuits the addition of auto grounded ports has little influence on the total analysis time of the em job However for some circuits auto grounded ports may require some extra overhead calculations thus increasing the total analysis 112 Chapter 6 Ports time Therefore they should be used only when they provide an advantage over standard box wall ports Auto grounded ports provide advantages over standard box wall ports when the layout of your circuit does not allow a direct path for a feed line to be connected between the port and the box wall as in the figure above or your circuit requires a large feed structure to reach the box wall If all or part of your feed structure can be eliminated using an auto grounded port could reduce the total number of subsections in your circuit thus decreasing the analysis time and or memory requirements Auto grounded ports are similar to via ports with the exception of the following characteristics Via ports require you to manually create vias that extend upward through the dielectric to the edge
330. s within the Sonnet simulation based on an example project As you will see this 1s a great way to prove a package design early in the design cycle We will also outline the use of the Box Resonance Estimator and give some advice as to how to remove box resonances from a structure 385 Sonnet User s Guide To obtain the example file package son used in this chapter get the example folder Package resonances from the Sonnet examples For directions on obtaining a Sonnet example select Help gt Examples from the menu of any Sonnet program then click on the Instructions button The file backage son is a model of an amplifier used to check for package resonances The entire width of the box is not shown Box Resonances The purpose of this section is to give the user a basic understanding of how to detect box resonances in a Sonnet project or simulated data There are three ways to do so 1 Runtime warning messages 2 Observations of simulated results 3 The Box Resonance Estimator Runtime Warning Messages If the proper selection 1s made during the analysis setup Sonnet will detect box resonances and output warning messages in the analysis monitor while the simulation 1s being performed The steps to enable this feature are 1 Select Analysis Setup from the project editor menu 386 Chapter 24 Package Resonances In the Analysis Setup dialog box which appears click on the Advanced button In the A
331. ser s Guide Using the Error Estimates 406 The above error estimate can be used to estimate the error for an overall circuit Let s say that a cell size is used that makes some high impedance transmission lines only 1 cell wide Other low impedance transmission lines are say 30 cells wide The 1 cell wide lines give us about 596 error The 30 cell wide lines give about 0 596 error In non resonant situations you can expect the total error to be somewhere between 596 and 0 5 If most of the circuit is the low impedance line the error is closer to 0 595 etc However let s say that our circuit has resonant structures Let s say itis alow pass filter It is easy to verify by means of circuit theory that the low pass filter is very sensitive to the high impedance lines This means we can expect about 5 error even though the high impedance lines only make up half the filter Given this information there are several courses of action First if 596 error is acceptable no further effort 1s needed More likely we wish to analyze the filter with less error Since we now know the error in the characteristic impedance is 596 we can physically widen the line so that the characteristic impedance is 596 lower to compensate for the known increase in characteristic impedance due to subsectioning the line only one cell wide Very precise analyses are possible using this compensation technique Chapter 27 Time Required for Analysis Chapter 27
332. shown in the picture below Discrete Data Point a dstub son MIEN ETES Cartesian Plot ZU 50 0 2 Left Axis M o dstub O 3 2 g DB SII O n i Right Axis t 4 empty u g 2 9 140 dB 12 4 45 Sonnet Software Inc 5 55 6 65 Frequency GHz Click mouse to readout data values Pointer When exporting data you may choose to output only the discrete frequencies or the complete response data for the ABS analysis To output only the discrete frequency data unselect the Include Adaptive Data checkbox in the Export Data dialog box in the response viewer For details see online help in the response viewer Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project It is often necessary to perform several iterations of a circuit design in order to meet specifications Part of those iterations involves changing the dimensions or attributes of some part of your circuit Parameterization and optimization can be used to make this task more efficient Rather than create multiple circuits each with different lengths of key components you may select dimensions of your circuit and define them as a parameter In the analysis you automatically vary the value of the parameter rather than setting up a separate circuit file for each value Parameterizing your circuit also provides you with a way to quickly and easily cha
333. solute values The three types of normalization are discussed below The power gain is defined as the radiation intensity divided by the uniform radiation intensity that would exist if the total power supplied to the antenna were radiated isotropicallyl l Directive gain is defined as the radiation intensity from an antenna in a given direction divided by the uniform radiation intensity for an isotropic radiator with the same total radiation power Pl The Gain and Directive gain may be displayed relative to the isotropic antenna i e 0 dB the maximum value of E for the antenna or an arbitrary value Selecting Absolute for the normalization displays the radiated power in Watts steradian at a given angle 356 Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation You may change the normalization in the far field viewer using the Select Normalization dialog box which is opened by selecting Graph Normalization from the far field viewer main menu Polarization The far field viewer displays the magnitude of the electric field vector for a given direction The magnitude may be represented as the vector sum of two polarization components E theta Eg and E phi Ey as shown in the figure describing spherical coordinates on page 353 The far field viewer allows you to see the total magnitude or either component of the magnitude Other polarizations are also available in the far field viewer and are discussed in Graph Polarization in the far fi
334. ss Filter in Sonnet Simulation in progress Click Cancel to terminate the simulation Analyzing 26 5 GHz Adaptively computing 301 frequencies Output log Loading matrix step 6 of 6 Reducing matrix De embedding ports on left box wall Loading matrix step 1 of 1 Reducing matrix Loading matrix step 1 of 1 Reducing matrix De embedding ports on right box wall Adaptively computing 301 frequencies v C Keep this window open when finished The window closes when the simulation is complete unless the Keep this window open when finished checkbox is selected Be aware that Microwave Office is locked while the Sonnet analysis is running and you may not make any changes to your project at that time If the Sonnet analysis is a significant one requiring a large amount of processing time Microwave Office may be locked for some time To avoid this you may export your EM Structure to a Sonnet project This allows you to make changes in the EM Structure and run analyses without locking up the Microwave Office project However this does increase the overhead on keeping your EM Structure in sync with the rest of the project and is more prone to human error See Working Outside Microwave Office on page 252 for more details about the Import Export options 247 Sonnet User s Guide Response Data 248 When you use Sonnet as your analysis engine the only electromagnetic simulation data which ma
335. stance but need to be translated rather than ignored Chapter 16 The Agilent Interface RES Syntax RES lt Rdc gt lt Rrf gt lt Xdc gt metal name Set loss values to be used by the LAYER parameter The effect of these values is detailed more specifically in Metalization Loss page 74 in the Sonnet User s Guide The RES statements are indexed by the LAYER statements in the order they appear in the preference file Rdc Indicates the DC resistance in Ohms per square Rrf Indicates the skin effect coefficient Xdc Indicates the metal surface reactance metal name This optional name string can be used to label the metal index in the project editor TOP or BOT Syntax1 TOP lt Rdc gt lt Rrf gt lt Xdc gt Syntax2 BOT lt Rdc gt lt Rrf gt lt Xdc gt Set the metalization loss of the top cover or ground plane of the em analysis The parameters Rdc Rrf and Xdc are identical to the RES statement above CUSTOM SUB Syntax CUSTOM SUB lt substrate lines gt END CUSTOM SUB This statement defines a default substrate for the translation without requiring an MSUB element The Syntax for the substrate lines is as follows CLAYER thickness Epsilon R MU R TAND TANDM MAIN LAYER thickness Epsilon R MU R TAND TANDM 289 Sonnet User s Guide 290 MAIN LAYER indicates that this layer is where all default metal will be placed i e metal not mapped elsewhere Any additional CAP and BRIDGE l
336. stop running The circuit shown on the right has no overlap between polygons and would not cause any errors TIP To maintain the same metal in your circuit without any overlap use the Edit gt Merge Polygons command on polygons which use the same metal type Using the Merge command on the example above in which all three polygons are the same metal type is shown below Rule 2 Rule 3 Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh Figure Eight Polygons A conformal mesh polygon should not wrap back around itself in other words its vertices should not form a figure eight This will result in an error message being issued and em will stop the analysis job Two examples of this type of polygon are shown below In the polygon shown on the left the vertices have been labelled in the order in which they were added Adjacent Polygons Should Have No Gap Any polygon which is adjacent to another polygon using conformal meshing should have its edges exactly touching with no gap existing between the two polygons Extremely tiny gaps are automatically removed but should be avoided Tiny gaps can be easily avoided by using any of the following methods e Using a snap grid while drawing your circuit Tools gt Snap Setup e Creating a larger polygon then dividing the polygon Edit gt Divide Polygons and applying conformal meshing to one of the resulting polygons The resultant polygons are adjacent with no space in between e Adding a small p
337. subprojects have no way to account for this coupling and will produce bad data 209 Sonnet User s Guide The second example shows how to split a series of resonators In this type of structure there is strong coupling at the gaps between adjacent resonators The example on the left is good since the subdivision lines do not prevent this inter resonator coupling The example on the right is incorrect since the resulting subprojects do not contain the inter resonator coupling si s2 s3 s4 si s2 s3 Good Bad The third example shows a square spiral The example on the left is a good placement since the location where the spiral is divided is essentially a group of coupled transmission lines and the subdivision line is perpendicular to those lines 210 Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision Here the left side of the spiral is sufficiently far from the right side so that coupling is negligible The example on the right is bad because the lines on the left side of the spiral do couple strongly with the lines on the right side si s2 si s2 N p Potti palstat S TA POOL TTT ES SESS SES 777 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Good Bad The meander line on the left is split in such a way that Sonnet provides an accurate answer since the bends on the top are far enoug
338. t In addition em can analyze at frequencies which are not included in the data files Em automatically interpolates if there are any differences between the requested frequency points and those in the data files A good example of a cascading operation is the project att cascade son which is included in the Att example for this chapter A schematic representation of the two port circuit is shown below This circuit consists of two identical thin film resistors connected in series The S parameters from the geometry project analysis on the thin film resistor are used as a data file element in the netlist The desired output network is the series combination of resistors The S Parameter data file att res16 s2p as well as the geometry project att res16 son used to generate the data file are included in the examples for this chapter 1 N S 7 S parameter M a 2 S parameter Node 3 file att res16 s2p file att_res16 s2p e 2 The two port S parameters contained in file att res16 s2p are cascaded to obtain an overall set of two port S parameters 189 Sonnet User s Guide The netlist att cascade son for the circuit is pictured below Dam gt Ile ARE s 2 well S2P 1 2 att_res16 s2p S2P 2 3 att_res16 s2p DEF2P 13 RESNET Main Network Use buttons or menus to modify netlist Network None Line None The main network Resnet has two ports indicated by the 2
339. t The dielectric material will no longer be available in the library for other projects but will still exist in the present project This completes editing the dielectric library Setting Up a Dielectric Library To create a new dielectric library global or local do the following 1 Select Circuit Dielectric Layers from the main menu of the project editor The Dielectric Layers dialog box is opened on your display This dialog box allows you to add edit and delete dielectric materials for your project 2 Click on the Library button to edit your dielectric libraries This opens the Dielectric Library dialog box which allows you to create dielectric libraries and to edit them 3 Select the type of library you wish to create by clicking on the My Library or Global Library radio button in the Dielectric Library dialog box Once a library is selected a list of dielectric materials in the library should appear in the dialog box 4 Tocreate a new library click on the Specify button to the right of the radio button for the library you selected A browse window appears on your display 97 Sonnet User s Guide 98 Use the browse window to specify the location and filename for the new dielectric library file The default name for a new dielectric library is die library txt If you wish to name the library file something else edit the filename entry Once the desired location is specified click on the OK button in the brows
340. t specify a reference plane in the project editor for a box wall or auto grounded port the reference plane length defaults to zero This means that em will not shift the reference plane for that port when de embedding is enabled However em will remove the discontinuity for that port Single Feed Line The figure below shows a circuit with a length of transmission line TRL inserted between a box wall port and the device under test Transmission line N Device O TRL Under S parameters Test from em without R de embedding EN TONS Box wall port discontinuity Port discontinuity and transmission line associated with a box wall port 125 Sonnet User s Guide 126 When de embedding is enabled em removes the transmission line in a manner similar to that used to remove the port discontinuity Em calculates S parameters for the TRL alone and then cascades a negative TRL along with negative R and C as illustrated in the next figure Block cascaded to negate trans mission line S parameters from em S parameters from em with de embedding without de embeddin P mH m m m M M M m m m m m M MN M mm mu m L I zd c cnc c ee ee 71 I I Transmission line y I I Device g or TRL TRL Under I Test I Block cascaded R R I to negate port _L Lc l discontinuity Box wall port discontinuity I
341. t density viewer 18 68 399 Using from Microwave Office 241 current striping 180 cut 310 cvia 314 D data blocks CKT 192 data consistency 25 data file elements adding 187 data files 183 cascading 189 data type number 270 de embedding 39 40 119 139 352 box wall ports 123 125 coupled transmission lines 126 enabling 121 Index example 121 guidelines 131 higher order modes 139 port discontinuities 122 reference planes 124 132 134 de embedding error codes 129 DEFAULT 282 deleting vias 310 dependent parameters 161 design suite 17 diagonal fill 299 334 dialog boxes Analysis Setup 145 Dielectric Layers 91 Layer Mapping 268 Levels 306 Metal Editor 320 Metal Properties 172 Port Impedance 107 dielectric 351 multiple constants 351 dielectric bricks 331 341 air 334 applications 333 convergence test 333 far field viewer 334 limitations 334 materials 337 338 subsectioning 333 vias 334 visibility 336 Z partitions 339 dielectric layers creating new 92 loss parameters 91 Dielectric Layers dialog box 91 dielectric library 93 431 Sonnet User s Guide editing 96 setting up 97 using a dielectric from 94 digital interconnect 361 DIMENSION 275 DIMSTYLE 275 directions 351 directive gain 356 disable instance check 294 discontinuity 39 lumped models 361 port 139 disk swap 47 DMAC 401 dual patch 111 348 DUT 119 DXF file 265 error message 273 DXF layer name 268 DXF Translator 19 DXF translator 24
342. t dis played in Microwave Office Linked Reference Planes Converted to a fixed length reference plane Displayed in Microwave Of fice as fixed length reference planes Calibration Lengths Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office 256 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Sonnet Feature Edit in Microwave Office Edit in Sonnet s Project Editor Edge Vias Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Circular and Polygon Vias Converted to rectangular vias Kept in circuit but displayed as rectangular via in MWOffice Symmetry Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Dielectric Bricks Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Relative magnetic permeabil ity Mrel and magnetic loss tangent Mag Loss Tan for Dielectric Layers Mrel set equal to 1 and Mag Loss Tan set equal to 0 Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Dielectric Layer Names Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Capacitance and Inductance in Port definitions Capacitance and Inductance set equal to 0 Kept in circuit but not dis played in Microwave Office Inductance L for metals Set to a value of zero Kept in circuit but not dis played in Micro
343. tennas 351 wire bonds 301 X xgeom 17 xgeom level number 267 441 Sonnet User s Guide XMAX 64 XMIN 60 62 Y YMAX 64 YMIN 60 62 Z Z current 301 Z0 134 135 152 Z axis 352 Z partitioning 333 334 339 341 442
344. ter approximated with the diagonal edges allowed by diagonal fill Include it only on polygons with diagonal edges that carry significant current See references 46 and 72 in the Sonnet References for a detailed description of diagonal fill triangle subsections Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures Introduction Em can handle full 3 D current as well as 2 5 D structures The third Z dimension of current is handled by a special kind of subsection called a via The term via commonly refers to a connection from metal on the substrate surface to the groundplate beneath the substrate However as used in Sonnet a via can be used to connect metalization between any substrate or dielectric layer not just bottom layer to ground Thus em s vias can be used in modeling airbridges spiral inductors wire bonds and probes as well as the standard ground via 301 Sonnet User s Guide Restrictions on Vias Em s vias use a uniform distribution of current along their height and thus are not intended to be used to model resonant length vertical structures The height of the via should be a small fraction of a wavelength The via height is the same as the thickness of the substrate or dielectric layer it penetrates If a microstrip substrate is a significant fraction of a wavelength thick over moding also becomes a major problem If vias are used to form for example a septum or an interior wal
345. ter mode 116 Chapter 6 Ports 4 Use the mouse to lasso ports 3 and 4 This action will highlight the ports you select 5 Select Modify gt Port Properties This will open the Port Attributes dialog box shown in on page 115 6 Now the ports can be changed from standard ports to auto grounded ports by choosing Autognd from the drop list in the Type field 7 Click on the OK button to exit the Port Attributes dialog box After converting ports 3 and 4 in this manner the circuit will appear as shown below RAINE NANN The circuit now has the two box wall and two auto grounded ports in the desired locations 117 Sonnet User s Guide 118 Chapter 7 De embedding Chapter 7 De embedding Each port in a circuit analyzed by em introduces a discontinuity into the analysis results In addition any transmission lines that might be present introduce phase shift and possibly impedance mismatch and loss Depending upon the nature of your analysis this may or may not be desirable De embedding is the process by which the port discontinuity and transmission line effects are removed from the analysis results The figure on page 120 illustrates the general layout of a circuit to be analyzed with em The device under test DUT shown as a box in the figure is the circuitry for which we wish to obtain analysis results The DUT is located inside the metal box and is connected to one or more ports The ports may be located
346. ter mode by clicking anywhere on the via that you wish to delete Then select Edit Cut from the menu or the Delete key to delete it Edge Vias To delete an edge via select the via while in pointer mode by clicking on a triangle of the via that you want deleted Then select Edit Cut from the menu bar or the Delete key to delete it Deleting a via deletes the via posts associated with it You should also note that if you delete or move a polygon from which an edge via originates the via is moved or deleted from your circuit as well 310 Via Loss Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures The loss for the via post is determined by the metal type of via polygons and the metalization of the polygon that the via 1s associated with for edge vias See Metalization Loss page 74 for an explanation on how to set the metalization loss for a metal polygon When a via polygon is created it s metal type is set to the default metal used for new metalization This is controlled in the Metal Types dialog box accessed by selecting Circuit gt Metal Types from the project editor s menu You may also change the metal type ofthe via polygon after it has been added to the circuit You may use any metal type defined in your circuit for a via polygon To change the metal type of a via polygon Right click on the via polygon and select Properties from the pop up menu which appears on your display The Via Properties dialog box appears on your displ
347. that the via extends both upward and downward Below is shown a rectangular via polygon extending from metal level 0 to ground in a three level circuit Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Gnd The via shown above extends from level 0 the highest metal level in the circuit down to the ground level The via arrows on the rectangular via on level 0 point only in the downward direction The via polygon appears on levels 1 and 2 in the same position but with via arrows pointing in both the upward and downward position indicating that the via extends in both directions from these levels Only the outline of the via polygon is drawn on the ground plane to indicate its position with the via arrows pointing upward indicating that the via extends upward Since the complete ground plane is metalization the via polygon is drawn simply as a reference for the user Note that the center of the via polygon is not metalization but is a rectangular cylinder of dielectric material Multi layer Vias It is possible to have a via which traverses more than one dielectric layer You may insert a via in your circuit originating on any level and ending on any level The via is automatically drawn on each level it traverses To create a multi layer via 308 Chapter 18 Vias and 3 D Structures first create a via in your circuit then modify its properties For example you have a four level circuit with an existing via polygon which extends from level 1 to
348. the Save button to save your settings in a file It is recommended that you use a lay extension which is the default If you have an existing layer file with mapping settings for the DXF file you are importing click on the Load button to select the layer file and load its contents in the dialog box 269 Sonnet User s Guide 270 GDSII Layer Mapping Before you convert the file you must create a GDSII file from your circuit layout program The file should have a suffix of gds For example if you have a filter that you want to analyze you could call your file filter gds Next you must enter the layer mapping to tell the GDSII conversion program the mapping of stream layers and data types to project editor levels and data types To help you with this process the GDSII translator opens the Layer Mapping dialog box with the layers from your GDSII file that can be used as a starting point The Layer Mapping dialog box shown below maps Stream Layer Numbers and Data Type Numbers to Sonnet Level Numbers and Material Names After you enter the correct data for your specific needs you have the option of saving the settings to a lay file for use in future conversions Layer Mapping BE DXF Xgeom Layer Name Map Object Type Level Material Unknown m Unknown m Metal Unknown m N BRIDGES BRDG MASKS lt m lt PAD CENTERS M Metal lt JFILTER MASK
349. the analysis monitor appears on your display indicating that the analysis is started you may exit out of the project editor by selecting File gt Exit The project editor is closed and Microwave Office is unlocked When the analysis is complete in Sonnet you will need to import the temporary project and its analysis results For details on how to do this see Importing a Sonnet Project on page 254 Importing a Sonnet Project Both methods discussed above exporting a project and analyzing outside Microwave office reguire you to explicitly perform updates of your EM Structure by opening your EM Structure in the project editor then selecting the Load command Once you close the project editor the Sonnet project contents are sent back to Microwave Office including any analysis results To import a Sonnet project into Microwave Office perform the following Open the Microwave Office from which the original EM Structure came Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface 2 Right click on the EM Structure and select Open in Native Editor from the pop up menu which appears The project editor is opened on the selected EM Structure 3 Select File gt MWOffice gt Load Sonnet Project from the main menu of the project editor 4 When the Browse window appears select the Sonnet Project which you wish to import into Microwave Office The Sonnet project is imported into Microwave Office when you exit out of the project editor Be awar
350. the axis of symmetry invoke the symmetry option for a significant memory and time savings The matrix solve time is proportional to the number of subsections cubed and is the main limitation on the analysis at this time 413 Sonnet User s Guide 414 Appendix I Em Command Line for Batch Appendix I Em Command Line for Batch If you wish to set up batch or script files to run your analyses overnight or at times of the day when the processing load is lighter it is possible to use command lines to run em from a batch file You should also be aware that it is possible to setup batch files with start and stop times using the analysis monitor For directions on how to do so please see How do I create a batch file to run multiple analysis jobs in online help You should be aware that running from the command line does not provide all of the status information that is provided in the analysis monitor while running an analysis The syntax of the command line is as follows em options lt project name gt external frequency file 415 Sonnet User s Guide where lt options gt is one or more of the run options shown in the table below If you use multiple options they should be typed with no spaces in between after the minus sign Note that other run options may be set in the Analysis Setup dialog box for your project and will be used during the analysis Option Meaning Dlicense Used for debugging em licensin
351. the box walls since such polygons do not behave like transmission lines Also the new ports added during the subdivide would be shorted to the boxwall The circuit on the left is correct since there is no contact between the top and bottom polygons with the top and bottom box wall sl s2 s1 s2 ks 11353 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS 2 J dee eec ESSSSSSSSSSS NNN Good Bad 213 Sonnet User s Guide Subdivision Line Orientation Subdividers may split the circuit on a horizontal axis or a vertical axis but you may not mix orientation Choosing the direction in which you split your circuit is dependent upon the structure of your circuit Shown below is a typical circuit in which you would use the vertical orientation and another example in which you would use the horizontal orientation si s2 s3 s4 sb sb s Example of Vertical Subdividers a ara ara a a aw Va vh Example of Horizontal Subdividers 214 Chapter 13 Circuit Subdivision You may use both orientations by using double subdivision mentioned earlier The first time you subdivide your main circuit you choose an orientation for your subdivision lines Then use circuit subdivision on the resulting geometry subprojects this time using the opposite orientation for your subdivision lines Before adding subdividers to your geometry project you should ensure that specification of your circuit is complete Subprojects created when you execute th
352. the thick metal polygon is thicker than the dielectric layer s above it the polygon also appears on metal levels above 321 Sonnet User s Guide Viewing Thick Metal in the Project Editor 322 The thick metal extends upward through the dielectric layer from the level on which the polygon is drawn If the thick metal is not as thick as the dielectric layer above it then the polygon only appears on the lower level where it was drawn If the thick metal is the same thickness as the dielectric layer above it appears on both the metal level where it was drawn and on the metal level above Examples of both instances are shown below Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 A 3 mil thick metal polygon is drawn on level 2 below a 5 mil thick dielectric layer The polygon is visible on level 2 where it was drawn but only the outline is visible on level 1 above since the thick metal does not pierce the dielectric Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 A 5 mil thick metal polygon is drawn on level 2 below a 5 mil thick dielectric layer The polygon is visible on level 2 where it was drawn and also on level 1 above since it is the same thickness as the dielectric layer Note that on level 1 the border of the polygon is drawn with a dashed line to indicate that the origin of this polygon is not on this level Z direction A Chapter 19 Thick Metal Ifthe thick metal is thicker than the dielectric above but not thick enough to pierce the next dielectric layer the pol
353. the wavelength is approximated at the beginning of the analysis The highest analysis frequency is used in the calculation of the wavelength This value is a global setting and is applied to the subsectioning of all polygons in your circuit The default of 20 subsections A is fine for most work This means that the maximum size of a subsection is 18 degrees at the highest frequency of analysis Increasing this number decreases the maximum subsection size until the limit of 1 subsection 1 cell is reached You might want to increase this parameter for a more accurate solution For example changing it from 20 to 40 decreases the size of the largest subsections by a factor of 2 resulting in a more accurate but slower solution Keep in mind that using smaller subsections in non critical areas may have very little effect on the accuracy of the analysis while increasing analysis time Another reason for using this parameter is when you reguire extremely smooth current distributions using for the current density viewer With the default value of 20 large interior subsections may make the current distribution look choppy Setting this value to a large number forces all subsections to be only 1 cell wide providing smooth current distribution Again analysis time is impacted significantly The Max Subsection Size parameter is specified in the Advanced Subsectioning Controls which are opened by selecting Analysis gt Advanced Subsectioning fro
354. tion instructions please refer to the Unix amp Linux Installation Manual Available on Redhat Linux platforms This release is available for the Linux operating system Redhat Enterprise 3 It should run on Redhat 9 0 and 8 0 but has not been tested on those platforms It will not run on Redhat 7 2 or 7 3 For installation instructions please refer to the Unix amp Linux Installation Manual You must purchase a Linux or UNIX license to operate Sonnet on a Linux platform You may not use a PC license on a Linux system See Floating Licenses UNIX Linux and PC on page 14 of the UNIX amp Linux Installation Manual Chapter 2 What s New in Release 10 Broadband Spice Extraction The new broadband Spice Extraction feature allows you to extract a distributed circuit model of a passive circuit which is valid over a broad band The Broadband Spice Extractor feature generates models that can be used in Spice as a black box representing the broadband behavior of your circuit This is an optional feature for the Sonnet Level2 Suites and above which must be purchased separately DC Point Analysis The DC Frequency sweep analyzes your circuit at a low non zero frequency to supply response data at a DC point This type of response data 1s necessary for some circuit analysis tools The DC analysis frequency may be calculated automatically by em or input manually by the user To calculate response data at a DC point you use the DC frequency s
355. tional Microwave Symposium Workshop WSMK Digest Atlanta June 1993 Comparison of Strategies for Analysis of Diagonal Structures Sonnet Application Note 51 02 J C Rautio MIC Simulation Column A Standard Stripline Benchmark International Journal of Microwave amp Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 4 No 2 April 1994 pp 209 212 J C Rautio Response 3 Standard Stripline Benchmark MIC Simulation Column International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 5 No 5 September 1995 pp 365 367 423 Sonnet User s Guide 424 49 50 51 32 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 J C Rautio Some Comments on Approximating Radiation International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Vol 4 No 2 1994 pp 454 457 J C Rautio Synthesis of Lumped Models from N Port Scattering Parameter Data IEEE Tran Microwave Theory Tech Vol 42 No 3 March 1994 pp 535 537 J C Rautio Educational Use of a Microwave Electromagnetic Analysis of 3 D Planar Structures Computer Applications in Engineering Education Vol 1 No 3 1993 pp 243 254 J C Rautio Characterization of Electromagnetic Software 42nd ARFTG Conference Digest San Jose CA Dec 1993 pp 81 86 J C Rautio Some Comments on Electromagnetic De Embedding and Microstrip Characte
356. to 90 degrees To view an azimuthal plot set O and sweep 353 Sonnet User s Guide NOTE 354 The far field viewer will allow the user to analyze the same space twice with the user determining the appropriate angle ranges for each analysis For details see Graph Select in the far field viewer s help The far field viewer displays three plot types cartesian polar and surface All three types of plots are shown below The cartesian plot allows the magnitude in dB to be plotted on a rectangular graph with your choice of theta 0 phi or frequency for the X axis as shown in the figure below The polar plot allows you to select either theta 0 or phi for the angle axis The surface plot shows all the calculated values of theta and phi plotted against the gain for a single frequency Chapter 21 Antennas and Radiation Magnitude dB theta 0 phi 6 or frequency The far field viewer allows you to sweep theta 0 phi a Cartesian 6 or frequency 0 or b A he Radius Axes Angle Axes b Polar 355 Sonnet User s Guide Normalization S SN N M s Y ES lt i A p 200 250 300 s Phi a 3 sp 100 15 c Surface Plot There are three types of normalization to chose from in the far field viewer By default the far field viewer displays the power gain The far field viewer can also provide directive gain and ab
357. tor dialog box The Metal Editor dialog box allows you to enter a loss definition for the metal type There are five different methods for entering loss Normal Resistor Rd Ref General and Sense The different loss models are discussed below followed with a procedure for entering new metal types The discussions assume simple single conductor microstrip and stripline geometries where mentioned You do not need to read the details of each loss model Instead you should make yourself familiar with the loss models you are likely to use Most users only need concern themselves with Normal All the methods use the same loss model in Sonnet which model you choose depends on the parameters you know about your real metal type Normal For the Normal metal type you determine the loss using the bulk conductivity the metal thickness and the current ratio Metal thickness is used only in calculating loss it does not change the physical thickness of metalization in your circuit The metalization in your circuit is still modeled as zero thickness 77 Sonnet User s Guide 78 Sonnet models your circuit using zero thickness metal but your real circuit possesses a metal thickness At higher frequencies current flows in a thin skin around the edge of the metal as pictured below The current ratio is the ratio of the current flowing on the top of the metal to the current flowing on the bottom of the metal Current PURUS
358. tor or Output PI Model File in the response viewer The PI model is only applicable for a narrow band The model that is output is usually one which is intuitive and easily understood by a user as shown below 0 o Za This figure shows a 2 port model but the PI model may be used for any Zp Zo number of ports O O The second model is an N coupled line transmission line model Sonnet creates this type of model when you specify an N Coupled Line Model output file in the LCT format Analysis gt Output Files in the project editor or Output gt N Coupled Line Model in the response viewer This model is valid at only one frequency point This model produces a RLGC matrix which can be used in many popular Spice programs The equivalent circuit is shown below for a single lossless transmission line o L L L eee L o Oo e e e o There are an infinite number of infinitesimal elements in the model NOTE Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis A third way to bridge the gap between the frequency domain and the time domain is to fit the frequency domain data with a rational polynomial Sonnet s Broadband Spice Extractor feature uses this method to provide a circuit model which is valid over a broad band This model unlike the lumped element model described above does not y
359. ts work It is not possible to create a PI model if the circuit 1s analyzed at only one frequency A PI model is created for pairs of frequencies The second frequency is determined by taking the first frequency and adding a percentage specified by the user The second frequency then becomes the first frequency for the next pair of frequencies for which a SPICE model is generated The synthesis continues in this way until all the frequencies have been used Chapter 22 SPICE Model Synthesis The default value for the separation percentage is 10 In this case a SPICE model is generated using the first frequency and the next highest frequency which provides a 1096 gap This continues until there are no more frequencies For example for a frequency sweep from 10 40 GHz with a 0 1 GHz resolution using a separation of 10 the first few frequencies used would be 10 11 12 1 and 13 3 GHz After completing the analysis always do a reality check for reasonable values If you have bad data the frequency may be too high or too low If the frequency is too low the solution may have unity S parameters causing a strange SPICE model To be absolutely sure your results are good select a different frequency band and re analyze the circuit You should obtain similar results between the two analyses You may obtain PI Model Spice data in two different ways The first is to specify an optional output file before executing your analysis The second is to
360. ttom due to a different adjustable point set the point set is highlighted by the oval Reference Reference Point 1 Point 2 Adjustable Point Set 2 Adjustable Point Set 1 Bwidth nominal value 40 mils Bwidth nominal value 80 mils Dependent Parameters One parameter is dependent upon another if the anchor point and or the reference point s for the second parameter are part of an adjustable point set for the first parameter You need to be aware of dependent parameters so that you can take into consideration the complete impact on your circuit when the value of the 161 Sonnet User s Guide Stub Adjustable Pt Set Stub Anchor Point Stub Ref Pt primary parameter is changed When the primary parameter is changed a dependent parameter is adjusted 1 e the anchor point or reference point is moved along with the primary parameter on which they depend A picture of a dependent parameter 1s shown below with the Anchor and Reference points highlighted as well as the point sets Width Anchor Point Width Adjustable Niall Pt Set ttn TAM Width VLL Ref Pt The parameter width is dependent on the parameter stub Note that the anchor point for the parameter width shown on the right is part of the adjustable point set for the parameter stub shown on the left 162 You may use the Select Dependents command in the project editor to determine if there are any dependent param
361. ubdividers Click on the Only Objects Checked Below radio button to enable the object choices then click on the Dielectric Bricks checkbox to turn offthe display ofthe bricks This will make any bricks present in the circuit invisible and unselectable but does not remove them from the circuit The dielectric bricks can be turned back on by once again selecting View gt Object Visibility and clicking the Dielectric Bricks checkbox or the AlI Objects radio button Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks Occasionally when a circuit contains many layers with overlapping metal polygons and dielectric bricks it may be somewhat difficult to distinguish the metal polygons and dielectric bricks from one another The ability to turn dielectric bricks off usually makes it easier to view such circuits Defining Dielectric Brick Materials Just as it is possible to define a variety of metal types each with different properties it is also possible to define a variety of dielectric brick materials each with different values for the dielectric constant loss tangent and bulk conductivity To define a new dielectric brick material or to modify the characteristics of an existing material you use the Brick Materials dialog box which is opened by selecting Circuit gt Brick Materials from the main menu of the project editor The Brick Materials dialog box shown on page 337 shows all the dielectric brick materials previously defined the co
362. ubstantially fewer subsections than the number used in the standard subsectioning Chapter 4 Subsectioning Conformal Mesh Subsectioning Control When you apply conformal mesh to a polygon it is possible to limit the maximum length of a conformal section in order to provide a more accurate simulation The default length of a conformal section 1s 1 20 of the wavelength at the subsectioning frequency For more information on the subsectioning frequency see Defining the Subsectioning Frequency page 68 To set the maximum length for a conformal section do the following 1 Select the desired polygon s The selected polygons are highlighted 2 Select Modify Metal Properties This opens the Metalization Properties dialog box 3 Click on the Maximum Length checkbox in the Conformal Mesh Subsectioning Controls section of the dialog box This will enable the Length text entry box to the right Note that this checkbox 1s only enabled when Conformal is chosen as the Fill Type 4 Enter the desired Maximum Length in the text entry box Click on the OK button to close the dialog box and apply the changes For a more detailed discussion of Conformal Mesh please refer to Chapter 11 Conformal Mesh on page 169 Fora tutorial on Conformal Mesh see Chapter 4 Conformal Mesh Tutorial on page 63 in the Sonnet Supplemental Tutorials 71 Sonnet User s Guide 72 Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Chapter 5 Metaliz
363. uctance In other words the reflection coefficient is almost zero and the transmission coefficient is almost unity with a couple degrees of phase If instead of 50 ohm S parameters we were to use S parameters normalized to the characteristic impedances of the lines connecting to each of the two ports this is common in electromagnetics the S parameters would look like a transformer between the two impedances This causes many circuit theory programs which are expecting 50 ohm S parameters to give grossly incorrect results Changing Port Impedance 106 There are two methods for changing the impedance of a port If you wish to change the impedance ofa given port and do not need to see the impedance values of other ports take the following steps using the project editor 1 Click on the port or ports to select it them This will enable the Modify menu option 2 Select Modify Port Properties to open the Port Attributes dialog box 3 The impedance values can be changed by typing the desired values in the Resistance Reactance Inductance and Capacitance text boxes in the dialog box This changes the parameters on all ports selected and all ports with the same number as the ports selected Chapter 6 Ports If you wish to change the impedance of a given port and wish to see the impedance values of other ports while doing so proceed as follows 1 Select Circuit Ports from the main menu to open the Port Impedance dialog box
364. ugh see Improving the Accuracy of the Broadband Spice Model on page 377 for suggestions on improving your Broadband Spice model 373 Sonnet User s Guide 374 Checking the Accuracy of the Broadband Spice Model Itis possible to save the predicted S parameter data created while calculating your Broadband Spice model so that you may visually check the accuracy of your model when it is complete To save the predicted S parameter data you should select the Generate Predicted S Parameter data file checkbox in the Output Broadband Model File dialog box when you create your model The predicted S parameter data file is created in the same directory as your Broadband Spice model file Upon the completion of creating your Broadband model you should open the original project in the response viewer then add the predicted S parameter data file to your graph and compare the two responses If you are creating your Broadband Model in the response viewer you may do this automatically by clicking on the Plot button in the Broadband Spice Details dialog box which appears upon completion of your model Use the log information in the Details window which is detailed in the next section to determine which parameter had the highest error and any critical parameters whose error was greater than 0 1 Check these parameters to see how much the curve fit data varies from your circuit response If your Broadband Spice Model is to be used for a transient a
365. undesirable By this we mean the case when you simply do not wish to consider their effect and would like them removed from the data This can occur when you analyze a portion of your overall circuit in Sonnet and the boxwalls artificially introduce resonances Removal is actually probably not the best term to describe this approach It is more of an attempt to push the resonances out of the desired frequency band or attenuate their levels The best way to remove a box resonance is to change the size of the box either larger or smaller to move the resonant frequency out of band If the problem occurs in de embedding you may be able to change the length of the calibration standard in the project editor to move the box resonance out of the band of interest Another simple way to remove or at least attenuate the effect of a box resonance is to take off the top cover We can create an approximation of this condition by setting the top cover resistivity to 377 ohms square the impedance of free space To do this open the Box Settings dialog window Circuit gt Box Settings and change top cover to Free Space This is an accurate approximation provided the cover is not so close that it interacts with the evanescent fringing fields surrounding the circuit Please note that it is inaccurate to place the top cover directly on top of the circuit without an intervening dielectric layer Using either technique will entail changing basic project paramet
366. utes S Y or Z parameters transmission line parameters Zo Eeff VSWR GMax Zin and the Loss Factor and SPICE equivalent lumped element networks Additionally it creates files for further processing by the current density viewer and the far field viewer Em s circuit netlist capability cascades the results of electromagnetic analyses with lumped elements ideal transmission line elements and external S parameter data Program module em The analysis monitor allows you to observe the on going status of analyses being run by em as well as creating and editing batch files to provide a queue for em jobs Program module emstatus The response viewer is the plotting tool This program allows you to plot your response data from em as well as other simulation tools as a Cartesian graph or a Smith chart You may also plot the results of an equation In addition the response viewer may generate Spice lumped models Program module emgraph The current density viewer is a visualization tool which acts as a post processor to em providing you with an immediate qualitative view of the electromagnetic interactions occurring within your circuit The currents may also be displayed in 3D Program module emvu The far field viewer is the radiation pattern computation and display program It computes the far field radiation pattern of radiating structures such as patch antennas using the current density information from em and displays the far f
367. utput menu Change in Project Editor Menu The command Analysis Optional Files command in the project editor is now Analysis gt Output Files You may specify output files of your S Y and Z parameters SPICE models and output data formatted for a spreadsheet The specified output files will be generated as part of your em analysis For more details please see online help on the Output command 37 Sonnet User s Guide 38 Chapter 3 Chapter 3 Important Options and Concepts Important Options and Concepts In the previous chapter we described the basics of running Sonnet what input files are required how you set up and save a project and what the output results mean In this chapter we discuss the following techniques which are frequently used to obtain more accurate results and or shorter analysis times De embedding the port discontinuity Using multi frequency caching MFC Using symmetry Invoking single precision Adjusting the subsectioning Removing parallel subsections 39 Sonnet User s Guide De embedding the Port Discontinuity 40 Each port in a circuit analyzed by em introduces a discontinuity into the analysis results In addition any feed transmission lines that might be present introduce phase shift and possibly impedance mismatch and loss Depending upon the nature of your analysis this may or may not be desirable De embedding is the process by which the port discontinuity and transmission li
368. ve or below the presently selected dielectric layer TIP Clicking on the Library button in the Dielectric Layers dialog box allows you edit the contents of your dielectric libraries but does not allow you to add dielectric materials from the library to your project This must be done in the Dielectric Ed itor dialog box 10 Chapter 5 Metalization and Dielectric Loss Click on the Select Dielectric from Library button in the Metal Editor dialog box The Dielectric Library dialog box appears on your display Select the My Library or Global library by clicking on the appropriate radio button in the Dielectric Library dialog box If you wish to select a new library file click on the Specify button to the right of the radio button which opens a browse window which allows you to select a file For instructions on setting up a library see Setting Up a Dielectric Library page 97 Once a library is selected a list of dielectric materials in the library should appear in the dialog box Click on the desired dielectric material to select it The entry is highlighted Click on OK in the Dielectric Library dialog box This selects the dielectric material and closes the dialog box The Dielectric Editor text entry boxes now contain the material name and loss parameters from the library dielectric you selected Enter the desired thickness for the dielectric layer in the Thickness text entry You may also edit the thickness of the die
369. ve the project by selecting File gt Save from the menu or by clicking on the Save button on the tool bar You need to save the file before analyzing it 144 Chapter 9 Adaptive Band Synthesis ABS 7 Select Project Analyze from the menu or click on the Analyze button on the tool bar Em performs an adaptive sweep on your project The analysis monitor appears on your display and indicates the progress of the adaptive sweep The Adaptive Sweep is also available within the Frequency Sweep Combinations analysis controls This allows you to mix adaptive sweeps with other types of sweeps For more details see the Frequency Sweep Combinations topic in online help in the project editor ABS Caching Level There are three levels of ABS caching available None Stop Restart and Multi Sweep plus Stop Restart The options for ABS caching level are found in the Advanced Options dialog box To access the Advanced Options dialog box select Analysis Setup from the project editor main menu then click on the Advanced button in the Analysis Setup dialog box which appears The default is Stop Restart Stop Restart retains the cache data while the analysis is proceeding Once the adaptive data has been calculated the cache data is deleted from the project This setting provides for the circumstance in which the analysis is stopped or interrupted before the adaptive data is synthesized you will not lose the internal data produced so far
370. ves to a new position e Third you select any additional points in your circuit you wish to move when the reference point moves As the value of the parameter is varied the reference point as well as the rest of the adjustable point set is moved accordingly Note that the parameter is always defined as the distance between the anchor and the reference point in either the X direction or the Y direction never as a diagonal distance between them Two examples of anchored parameters each at two different nominal values are illustrated below Chapter 10 Parameterization and Optimization of a Geometry Project Point Set Dwidth nominal value 40 mils Dwidth nominal value 60 mils Notice that although the top and bottom examples have identical anchor and reference points and starting and ending nominal values that the resulting polygon on the top differs from that on the bottom due to a different adjustable point set the point set is highlighted by the oval Anchor Point Reference Point Adjustable Point Set Dtop nominal value 40 mils Dtop nominal value 60 mils Symmetrical Parameters A symmetric parameter is one which extends from a fixed middle point to two reference points and their respective adjustable point sets It is comprised of four things the first reference point the first reference point s adjustable point set the second reference point and the second reference point s adjustable point set Th
371. vu patvu dxfgeo ebridge emgraph gds emserver emclient and sonntawr lower case bold italics Lite LitePlus Level2 Basic Level2 Silver and Level3 Gold are trademarks of Sonnet Software Inc Sonnet and em are registered trademarks of Sonnet Software Inc UNIX is a trademark of Unix Systems Labs Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows2000 Windows ME Windows XP and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Inc X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology AutoCAD and Drawing Interchange file DXF are trademarks of Auto Desk Inc SPARCsystem Open Windows SUN SUN 4 SunOS Solaris SunView and SPARCstation are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc HP HP UX Hewlett Packard are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company ADS Series IV Touchstone and Libra are trademarks of Agilent Technologies GDSII is a trademark of Calma Company FLEXIm is a registered trademark of Globetrotter Software Inc OSF Motif is a trademark of the Open Software Foundation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Introduction 0 ccc ccc wc ccc cc cece cece nnn sg gs NT The Sonnet Design Suite liliis esee 17 The Analysis Engine em oossoo eee 21 A Simple Outline of the Theory 0 0 00 00 005 22 The Sonnet Project sos nn n KN 24
372. wave Office Comments Deleted from geometry Kept in circuit but not avail able in Microwave Office Metal Types See Metal Types on page See Metal Types on page 258 258 Port Mapping See Port Mapping on page See Port Mapping on page 260 260 Ports on Ground Plane See Ports on Ground Plane on page 261 See Ports on Ground Plane on page 261 257 Sonnet User s Guide Sonnet Feature Edit in Microwave Office Edit in Sonnet s Project Editor Port Termination and Excita tion See Port Termination and Excitation on page 261 See Port Termination and Excitation on page 261 Off Grid Placement See Off Grid Placement on page 262 See Off Grid Placement on page 262 Coordinate System See Coordinate System on page 262 See Coordinate System on page 262 Metal Types Models There are six different metal type models available in Sonnet Normal Resistor Rdc Rrf General Sense Metal and Thick Metal Model Each model has a different set of parameters When your Sonnet project is imported into Microwave Office the metal types are converted to an equivalent model using the parameters Rdc Rrfand Xdc DC resistance skin effect and DC reactance respectively such that the model yields the same loss characteristics in Microwave Office as are calculated in the Sonnet analysis This is the equivalent in Sonnet of the General metal type with the
373. weep which is available in the Frequency Sweep Entry dialog box in the project editor To access this dialog box you select Analysis Setup to open the Analysis Setup dialog box Then you select Frequency Sweep Combinations in the Analysis Setup dialog box and click on the Add button See online help in the project editor for more details This feature is only available as part of the Sonnet Professional Suite 3D Viewer This release introduces the new 3D viewer available in the project editor and the current density viewer The viewer provides a three dimensional view of your circuit The view may be rotated in any direction so that the circuit may be observed at any angle The 3D viewer is invoked by selecting View View 3D from the main menu of the project editor or the current density viewer You may animate the 3D view in the current density viewer For more details about the 3D viewer please refer to online help for the project editor and the current density viewer Graph Archives This new feature allows you to create a graph archive file which includes all the source projects for the data used in the graph allowing you to re create that graph on any computer by moving the graph archive file and unpacking it For more details select File gt Pack Graph or File gt Unpack Graph from the main menu ofthe response viewer When the dialog box appears click on the Help button to open online help 35 Sonnet User s Guide Changes
374. which will resemble the figure below 4 Now the port can be changed from a standard port to an auto grounded port by choosing Autognd from the drop list in the Type field The port should now be similar to the port shown on page 112 Port Attributes L2 1x Autognd Port Data Port Number 1 Cal Length o o Ref Plane 0 Type Autognd N b Use Mouse Resistance Reactance Inductance Capacitance Ohms Ohms nH pF Apply Cancel Help Creating Auto grounded Ports An Example This next section details how to add auto grounded ports to a circuit You add an auto grounded port to a circuit in the same way that you add a standard box wall or ungrounded internal port The only difference is that after adding the port you must change its type to auto grounded 115 Sonnet User s Guide The procedure for adding auto grounded ports to a circuit is shown below Place Standard Box Wall Ports Here Place Auto Grounded Ports Here Assume that you start with the circuit pictured above Detailed below are the steps you would use to create two standard box wall ports and two auto grounded ports at the locations indicated in the figure above 1 Select Shift Tools gt Add Port 2 Click with the mouse on each of the indicated polygon edges The resulting circuit will be similar to that shown in on page 116 Note that all four ports are standard port types 3 Press ESC to return to poin
375. will open the Dielectric Brick attributes dialog box shown below Brick Properties par dstub son 2 x Brick Air hd Subsectioning Controls XMin YMnh X Max oo Y Max fo Edge Mesh on sj Apply Cancel Help 3 Select the brick material you desire from the drop list labeled Brick This drop list contains all the types defined for dielectric bricks including the default type air 338 Chapter 20 Dielectric Bricks 4 Click on the OK button to apply your selection and close the dialog box Z Partitioning A dielectric brick simulates a volume of dielectric material Because a brick simulates a volume it must be subsectioned in the X Y and Z dimensions The more subsections finer resolution used in each dimension the more accurate the analysis X Y subsectioning of dielectric bricks is identical to X Y subsectioning of metal polygons You can control the X Y subsectioning of both through your choice of grid size XMIN YMIN XMAX YMAX and subsections per lambda Z subsectioning of dielectric bricks is controlled by the Z Partitions dialog box which is opened when you click on the Z Parts button in the Dielectric Layers dialog box Circuit gt Dielectric Layers You may enter a Z Parts value for each dielectric layer in your circuit This parameter specifies the number of Z partitions for all dielectric bricks on a particular circuit layer The default for this parameter is ze
376. wing these guidelines will help you to use conformal meshing in the most efficient manner Use Conformal Meshing for Non Manhattan Polygons Conformal meshing should be used for non Manhattan polygons Manhattan polygons are polygons which only have vertical and horizontal edges no diagonals or curves For these types of polygons rectangular subsections are more efficient You should look at your geometry and if necessary divide it up into Manhattan and non Manhattan polygons using the Edit gt Divide Polygon Then set the Manhattan polygons to staircase fill and the non Manhattan polygons to Conformal fill For example the spiral conductor shown below contains Manhattan sections in the feed lines and non Manhattan sections in the circular spiral It should be divided up such that the feedlines are represented by polygons set to staircase fill and the circular spiral is another polygon set to Conformal fill Conformal Staircase Fill 177 Sonnet User s Guide 178 The exception to this rule is when relatively small Manhattan polygons are between conformal mesh polygons In that case the inefficiency of switching so frequently between staircase and conformal mesh outweighs the gain of using Manhattan polygons In that case conformal mesh should be applied to all the polygons An example is shown below Normally these polygons would use staircase fill but because they are relatively small areas and in between polygons on
377. works for low loss metals good conductors However for thin film resistors high loss the lossless current is not the same as the lossy current and a perturbational approach fails Em s loss analysis is not perturbational It works just as well for a 100 Ohms square resistor as it does for a 0 004 Ohms square good conductor The Sonnet loss analysis also properly models the transition between electrically thin low frequency and electrically thick high frequency conductors See reference 18 in Sonnet References on page 419 for a detailed description of the theory used by Sonnet See reference 85 listed on page 426 for the equations actually used in the Sonnet model Another aspect of loss is that the surface impedance of a good conductor has an imaginary part which is equal to the real part This reactive surface impedance is physically due to the increased surface inductance caused by the current being confined closer to the surface of the conductor This surface reactance is included in the Sonnet loss model The effect is small but potentially significant in certain cases Keep in mind that a circuit running with lossless metal and dielectrics requires about one half the amount of memory and runs about twice as fast Therefore the simplest approximation is to run a lossless simulation This can be quite useful in the initial design phase Problems In Determining Metal Loss Sonnet s loss model is very accurate if accurate values ar
378. y and should appear similar to the illustration below Options General Tab Simulator j Click here to Sonnet 3D Planar Electromagnetic Simulator BA select Microwave Office as your Save Results in Document editor WARNING C Currents Saving these results can cause file size to grow substantially Some simulators do not support all of these options 2 Click on the MWOffice Editor radio button to select Microwave Office as your EM Structure editor All editing and changes to your EM Structure will be made in the Microwave Office editor When you double click on the EM Structure the circuit is opened in the right hand pane of the Microwave Office window where you may edit it This limits you to using features that are available in both Microwave Office and Sonnet Please see Translation Issues on page 255 for a list of features which do not translate between Microwave Office and Sonnet 231 Sonnet User s Guide o TP Double clicking on an EM Structure in the project browser opens whichever edi tor is selected Microwave Office or the Native Editor Changing the Fill Type You may control the fill type used in Sonnet for metal polygons The default fill type for Sonnet is staircase fill In this case small cells are used to approximate curved or diagonal edges as shown below The two polygons are identical Notice that the dark outline on the bottom polygon indicates the polygon input by the user in Sonnet The uppe
379. y be viewed in Microwave Office is the port parameter data S Y Z ABCD etc Meshing current density plots and far field radiation pattern plots are not available in Microwave Office When you choose Sonnet as your simulation engine the Animation menu in Microwave Office is disabled You must use Sonnet to view currents or far field radiation patterns You may use the Graph function in Microwave Office to create plots of port parameter data including equations which use this data To view current density plots or far field radiation patterns you must calculate current density data in your analysis Since the format of current density data differs in Microwave Office and Sonnet you must use Sonnet modules to view the current density data produced by Sonnet See Viewing the Current Density Data on page 242 Sonnet also uses current density data to calculate far field radiation patterns If you have created current density data in a Sonnet analysis you may use Sonnet s far field viewer to plot the patterns To open Sonnet s far field viewer open the EM Structure in the Native Editor Sonnet s project editor once the analysis is complete Then select Project View Far Field from the project editor s main menu Refer to online help for this program for instructions on how to view your data Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface Editing in Sonnet s Project Editor A When you select Sonnet as your analysis engine you have a
380. y combination of these statements may be included in the preference file but only one CAP LAYER and one BRIDGE LAYER statement may exist Additional layers may be added using UPPER LAYER and LOWER LAYER These statements in combination with the LAYER statements andthe valid instances file can be used to implement custom layered instances specific to a company such as a smart library See the descriptions below for details CAP LAYER Syntax CAP LAYER lt T gt Er Ur Tand Tanm Adda capacitor dielectric layer to the project The layer is added above the highest main substrate layer If a TFC or MTFC instance appears in the design the top TFC or MTFC layer is replaced with this layer T Thickness in length units Er Optional dielectric constant If not specified Er 1 Ur Optional relative permeability If not specified Ur 1 Tand Optional dielectric loss tangent If not specified Tand 0 Tanm Optional magnetic loss tangent If not specified Tanm 0 Only one CAP LAYER statement is allowed in a preference file BRIDGE LAYER Syntax BRIDGE LAYER lt T gt Er Ur Tand Tanm Add an air bridge dielectric layer to the project The layer is added above the highest main substrate layer and CAP LAYER statements If an MRINDSBR instance appears in the design the top MRINDSBR layer is replaced with this layer See CAP LAYER for the definition of each parameter Only one BRIDGE LAYER statement is supported in a pref
381. y requirement is right on the edge is to free up some of your computer s memory Make sure no one else is also running a memory intensive program at the same time The estimate of required memory printed out by em is just an estimate It is usually within 1 Mbyte or so but could be off by much more To get both the memory estimate and the number of subsections without going on to actually analyze the circuit use the Calculate Memory Usage option available in the Additional Options dialog box For most circuits the following equation can be used to estimate the amount of memory that will be used by em B K N where B is the number of bytes and N is the number of subsections K is equal to 8 if running with double precision and loss This can be circuit metal loss top or bottom cover loss or dielectric loss K 1s equal to 4 if you are running with loss but using Memory Save or running lossless and using double precision K is equal to 2 if you are running a lossless circuit and using Memory Save This equation should be used only as an estimate as it only includes the memory used by the final matrix in em Circuits with large boxes in terms of number of cells or many layers require more memory You should use this equation to calculate an upper limit on the number of subsections for your computer For UNIX systems you can check the memory actually used by typing the ps process status command Consult your system administrator or
382. ygon appears on the level where it was drawn and on the metal level above However note that the top of the thick metal does not appear in the project editor because it is embedded in a dielectric layer You will be able to view the top sheet of metal in the current density viewer which is discussed later in the chapter A side view of a circuit with three 50 mil dielectric layers A B and C and a 75 mil thick metal polygon on level 2 is shown below Note that the top of the thick metal only extends halfway through dielectric layer The top of this thick metal is not visible in the project editor 150 mils Level 0 75 mils i 100 mils Level 1 c 50 mils Level 2 Dielectric A Thick metal Another important thing to note about the modeling of a thick metal which ends in the interior of a dielectric layer 1s that even though you model the thick metal with 2 sheets the software actually uses three sheets The bottom sheet is on level 2 where the polygon originates The top sheet is in the interior of dielectric layer A The third sheet is on metal level 1 Whenever a thick metal polygon traverses a metal level a sheet is added on that level This adds additional computational time and should be kept in mind when using thick metals which encompass more than one dielectric layer If Single Level select is enabled then you may only select the thick metal polygon on the level where it was drawn 323
383. ylines with a given width The area covered by the width of the line defines the metallization area Circles or arcs whose interiors define the metallization areas These circles and arcs will be converted into small line segments that resemble the original object The arc conversion angle in the DXF Options dialog box is the angular step size used to convert to poly gons The default value is 10 degrees which would divide a circle into 36 line segments A series of lines open polylines and arcs which define a closed area of metallization The DXF translator searches all lines open polylines and arcs for possible connection of common end points Any connecting items are strung together to form a closed polygon of the type described in method number 1 above The Combining Tolerance entered in the Import Options dialog box defines a toler Chapter 15 The DXF and GDSII Translators ance to be used to determine if end points are close enough to be considered connected The Arc Conversion Angle also entered in the Import Options affects how arcs that become part of the poly gon are converted to line segments This method should be used carefully and only when needed The method will not work prop erly at points where three or more lines share common end points Blocks are handled by the DXF translator including scaling rotation and row column replication and may be useful in any of the above methods The following is a list of some of
384. ype Microwave Office Interface 232 setting for a single polygon in MWOffice 235 setting globally in MWOffice 232 setting locally in MWOffice 234 Index filter gds 270 Find Maximum 149 find maximum 149 Find Minimum 149 find minimum 149 FINDMAX 149 FINDMIN 149 first freguency 351 first reference point 160 flags 275 freguencies 355 default value 351 freguency maximum 53 freguency interpolation 202 freguency sweep coarse 217 fringing fields 139 G GABMAC 401 gain directive 356 power 356 relative to 356 gds 19 GDSII file corruption of 276 error message 276 structures 277 type 276 GDSII translator 24 geometry project 24 191 geometry subprojects 204 goal 167 graph calculate 351 normalization 357 433 Sonnet User s Guide ground via 301 314 H header variables 275 highest frequency 53 horizontal orientation 214 H plane 353 I IGNORE 288 IGNORE VALID 294 impedance 106 107 surface 83 inductors 184 infinite array 344 install Microwave Office Interface 222 instance check disable 294 instance checking 294 interface basics 33 internal ports 312 interpolation 202 isotropic 356 iterations 167 K Keywords EMPORT 290 IGNORE 288 NOPORT 288 NPPORT ORPHAN 290 ORPHAN 290 PORT 290 kinetic inductance 81 L LIMMAX 275 LIMMIN 275 434 lateral dimensions 352 Launch EMVU 281 Launch XGEOM 281 285 LAYER 285 288 291 layer file external 269 layer mapping 267 270 Layer Mapping dialog b
385. ysis engine you have a choice as to where you will edit the EM Structure in Microwave Office or in Sonnet s project editor known as the Native Editor This next section discusses editing your structure in the Microwave Office environment You edit your EM Structure in Microwave Office when your structure does not use any advanced features unique to Sonnet such as thick metal dielectric bricks or autogrounded ports For a complete list of features available only in Sonnet see Translation Issues on page 255 When you use Microwave Office as your editor you may use the analysis controls provided by the Microwave Office interface in the Microwave Office menus and dialog boxes to control the analysis frequencies and run options When you 230 Chapter 14 Microwave Office Interface request an analysis the geometry specification for the EM Structure entered in Microwave Office is passed to Sonnet and only the resulting analysis data 1s returned to Microwave Office Selecting Microwave Office as the EM Structure Editor Microwave Office is the default editor for all new EM Structures If you have previously selected Sonnet as your editor see Editing in Sonnet s Project Editor on page 249 you may switch the editor back by doing the following 1 Right click on the desired EM Structure in the Microwave Office project browser and select Options from the pop up menu which appears The Options property pages appear on your displa

Sonnet User`s Manual Volume I - Sonnet User`s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents